 |
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
|
| If you can't view the Datasheet, Please click here to try to view without PDF Reader . |
|
|
| Datasheet File OCR Text: |
| Preface, Contents General Technical Specifications 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIMATIC www..com Power Supply Modules Digital Modules S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications Reference Manual Analog Modules Other Signal Modules Interface Modules RS 485 Repeater SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Appendices Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Diagnostics Data of the Signal Modules Dimension Drawings Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) List of Abbreviations Glossary, Index A B C D E F This manual is part of the following documentation packages with the order numbers: S7-300 Programmable Controller: 6ES7398-8FA10-8BA0 ET 200M Distributed I/O Device: 6ES7153-1AA00-8BA0 Edition 10/2001 A5E00105505-01 Chapter Safety Guidelines This manual contains notices which you should observe to ensure your own personal safety, as well as to protect the product and connected equipment. These notices are highlighted in the manual by a warning triangle and are marked as follows according to the level of danger: ! ! www..com Danger indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage will result if proper precautions are not taken. Warning indicates that death, severe personal injury or substantial property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. ! Caution indicates that minor personal injury or property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Caution indicates that property damage can result if proper precautions are not taken. Note draws your attention to particularly important information on the product, handling the product, or to a particular part of the documentation. Qualified Personnel Only qualified personnel should be allowed to install and work on this equipment. Qualified persons are defined as persons who are authorized to commission, to ground, and to tag circuits, equipment, and systems in accordance with established safety practices and standards. Correct Usage Note the following: ! Warning This device and its components may only be used for the applications described in the catalog or the technical descriptions, and only in connection with devices or components from other manufacturers which have been approved or recommended by Siemens. This product can only function correctly and safely if it is transported, stored, set up, and installed correctly, and operated and maintained as recommended. Trademarks SIMATICR, SIMATIC HMIR and SIMATIC NETR are registered trademarks of SIEMENS AG. Some of other designations used in these documents are also registered trademarks; the owner's rights may be violated if they are used by third parties for their own purposes. Copyright W Siemens AG 1998-2001 All rights reserved The reproduction, transmission or use of this document or its contents is not permitted without express written authority. Offenders will be liable for damages. All rights, including rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility model or design, are reserved. Siemens AG Bereich Automatisierungs- und Antriebstechnik Geschaeftsgebiet Industrie-Automatisierungssysteme Postfach 4848, D- 90327 Nuernberg Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Disclaim of Liability We have checked the contents of this manual for agreement with the hardware and software described. Since deviations cannot be precluded entirely, we cannot guarantee full agreement. However, the data in this manual are reviewed regularly and any necessary corrections included in subsequent editions. Suggestions for improvement are welcomed. Siemens AG 1998-2001 Technical data subject to change. A5E00105505 Preface Purpose of the Manual www..com The information contained in this manual will enable you to look up operator actions, function descriptions and the technical specifications of the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules of the S7-300. How to configure, assemble and wire these modules in an S7-300, M7-300 or ET 200M system is described in the installation manuals for each system. Required Experience To understand the manual, you should have general experience of automation engineering. Audience This reference manual describes the modules of the S7-300 which are used in the S7-300, M7-300 and ET 200M systems. It includes data sheets for the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules of the S7-300. Scope of the Manual The present documentation package contains the descriptions for all modules available at the time of publication. We reserve the right to separately include current product information on new modules and new releases of existing modules. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 iii Preface Changes Compared with the Previous Version Compared to the previous version, of the "Module Data" reference manual, the following chapters and appendices have been thoroughly revised and new modules added, as necessary: S S S S www..com Chapter 3 "Digital Modules", Chapter 4 "Analog Modules" Chapter 5 "Other Signal Modules" Chapter 8 "SIMATIC TOP connect und SIMATIC TOP connect TPA" Appendix A "Parameter Sets for Signal Modules", Appendix B "Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules", List of Abbreviations and Glossary S Note: The previous version of this "Module Data" reference manual can be recognized by the number in the footer: EWA 4NEB 710 6067-0x-02. The current number is: A5E00105505-01. Standards and Approvals The S7-300 meets the requirements and criteria of IEC 61131, Part 2. The S7-300 satisfies the requirements of the CE Mark. The approbations for CSA, UL and FM are available for the S7-300. Details on the approbations and standards are given in Section 1.1. iv S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Preface How the Manual Fits in S7-300, M7-300 Reference Manual "CPU Specifications" & & "CPU Specifications CPU 312 IFM to 318-2 DP" "CPU Specifications CPU 312C to 314C-2 PtP/DP" Manual "Technological Functions" www..com Description of the operation, functions and technical CPU specifications. & 4 Manual Examples Description of the individual technological functions: - - - - Positioning Counting PtP Connection Controlling The CD contains examples for the technological functions. Installation Manual & Manual Description of the configuration, assembly, wiring, networking and commissioning of an S7-300. Function description and technical specifications of the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules. Reference Manual "Module Specifications" You are reading this manual & Reference Manual Instruction List & & "CPUs 312 IFM, 314 IFM, 313, 315, 315-2 DP, 316-2 DP, 318-2 DP" "CPUs 312 C to 314 C-2 PtP/DP" Getting Started & & & & & & & "CPU 31xC: Positioning with Analog Output" "CPU 31xC: Positioning with Digital Output" "CPU 31xC: Counting" "CPU 31xC: PtP Connection" "CPU 31xC: Controlling" "CPU 31xC" "S7-300" A Getting Started leads you through an example from the first steps in commissioning to a functioning program. List of instructions for the CPUs and their execution times. List of blocks that can be executed (OBs/SFCs/SFBs) and their execution times. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 v Preface ET 200M Manual "ET 200M Distributed I/O Device" & Manual Reference Manual "Signal Modules for Process Automation" & Reference Manual Description of the overview of usage in process automation, the parameter assignment with SIMATIC PDM, the digital input and output modules. Function description and technical specifications of the signal modules, power supply modules and interface modules. Description of the mechanical and electrical configuration, installation and wiring. www..com You are reading this manual Reference Manual "Module Specifications" & Reference Manual Navigation To help you find special information quickly, the manual contains the following access aids: S S S S At the start of the manual you will find a complete table of contents and a list of the diagrams and tables that appear in the manual. An overview of the contents of each section is provided in the left column on each page of each chapter. You will find a glossary in the appendix at the end of the manual. The glossary contains definitions of the main technical terms used in the manual. At the end of the manual you will find a comprehensive index which gives you fast access to the information you need. vi S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Preface Attributes of Technical Specifications Several values of the technical data are specified with attributes in the module data sheets. These attributes for the values in the technical data mean: Attribute minimum/maximum Meaning A minimum/maximum value represents a limit or operating value guaranteed by SIEMENS. The minimum or maximum of this value must not be exceeded within other operating limit values during operation. As a user, you must stay within the limits of this value. The typical value becomes settled under rated conditions and at an ambient temperature of 25 C. Values may fall below or exceed the typical value due to component tolerances. The "approx." value denotes a rounded value, for example the weight of a module. Values without attributes are rated values with no tolerances. www..com typical approx. without attributes Further Support Please contact your local Siemens representative if you have any queries about the products described in this manual. http://www.ad.siemens.de/partner Training Center SSiemens offers a number of training courses to familiarize you with the SIMATIC S7 automation system. Please contact your regional training center or our central training center in D 90327 Nuremberg, Germany for details: Telefon: +49 (911) 895-3200. http://www.sitrain.com SIMATIC Documentation on the Internet You will find the documentation on the Internet at: http://www.ad.siemens.de/support Use the Knowledge Manager to find the documentation you need quickly. If you have any questions or suggestions concerning the documentation you can use the "Documentation" conference in the Internet forum. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 vii Preface Automation and Drives, Service & Support Contact at any time of the day throughout the world: Nuremberg Johnson City www..com Singapore SIMATIC Hotline Worldwide (Nuremberg) Technical Support (FreeContact) Local time: Mon. - Fri. 7 AM to 5 PM Phone: Fax: E-mail: GMT: +49 (180) 5050-222 +49 (180) 5050-223 techsupport@ ad.siemens.de +1:00 Local time: Mon. - Fri. 0 AM to 12 PM Phone: Fax: GMT: +49 (911) 895-7777 +49 (911) 895-7001 +01:00 Worldwide (Nuremberg) Technical Support (subject to charge, with SIMATIC Card only) Europe / Africa (Nuremberg) Authorization Local time: Mon. - Fri. 7 AM to 5 PM Phone: Fax: E-mail: GMT: +49 (911) 895-7200 +49 (911) 895-7201 authorization@ nbgm.siemens.de +1:00 America (Johnson City) Technical Support and Authorization Local time: Mon. - Fri. 8 AM to 7 PM Phone: Fax: E-mail: GMT: +1 423 461-2522 +1 423 461-2289 simatic.hotline@ sea.siemens.com -5:00 Asia and Australia (Singapore) Technical Support and Authorization Local time: Mon. - Fri. 8.30 AM to 5.30 PM Phone: Fax: E-mail: GMT: +65 740-7000 +65 740-7001 simatic.hotline@ sae.siemens.com.sg +8:00 The languages spoken on the SIMATIC Hotlines are normally English and German; on the Authorization Hotline, French, Italian and Spanish are also spoken. viii S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Preface Service & Support on the Internet In addition to our documentation, we offer our Know-how online on the Internet at: http://www.ad.siemens.de/support where you will find the following: S S S www..com Current Product Information leaflets, FAQs (Frequently Asked Questions), Downloads, Tips and Tricks. A newsletter giving you the most up-to-date information on our products. The Knowledge Manager helps you find the documents you need. Users and specialists from all over the world share information in the forum. Your local customer service representative for Automation & Drives in our customer service representative data bank. Information on field service, repairs, spare parts and more under "Services". S S S S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 ix Preface www..com x S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Contents Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 www..com iii 1-1 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-7 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-13 2-1 2-2 2-6 2-10 2-15 3-1 3-4 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-13 3-16 3-19 3-21 General Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Standards and Approvals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electromagnetic Compatibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating S7-300s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rated Voltages of the S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC Outdoor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating SIMATIC Outdoor Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A; (6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A; (6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; (6ES7 307-1EAx0-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; (6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . 3 Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 3.6 3.7 3.7.1 3.7.2 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics of the Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC; (6ES7 321-1BLx0-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; (6ES7 321-1BHx2-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts; (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . Assigning Parameters to the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 xi Contents 3.7.3 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 www..com Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-24 3-26 3-28 3-30 3-32 3-35 3-37 3-40 3-43 3-46 3-50 3-51 3-54 3-55 3-58 3-61 3-64 3-68 3-71 3-74 3-78 3-82 3-86 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; Source Input; (6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 48-125 VDC; (6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 120 VAC; (6ES7 321-1EH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 120/230 VAC; (6ES7 321-1FFx1-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 120 VAC; (6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7 322-1BHx1-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/2 A; (6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; with Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 48-125 VDC/1.5 A; (6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 120 VAC/1 A; (6ES7 322-1EH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 120/230 VAC/2 A; (6ES7 322-1FFx1-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 120 VAC/1.0 A; (6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 16 Rel. 120 VAC; (6ES7 322-1HH00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC; (6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A; (6ES7 322-1HF10/-1HF80-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A; (6ES7 322-1HF20-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BHx1-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.16.1 3.16.2 3.16.3 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 3.23 3.24 3.25 3.26 xii S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Contents 4 Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.3.1 4.3.2 4.4 4.5 4.5.1 4.5.2 4.5.3 4.6 4.7 4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.18.1 4.18.2 4.19 4.19.1 4.19.2 4.20 4.20.1 4.20.2 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module . . . . . . Analog Value Representation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules . . . . Analog Module Parameter Assignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Voltage Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Current Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads and Actuators to Voltage Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting Loads and Actuators to Current Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts of the Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit; (6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit; (6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1 4-4 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-23 4-27 4-30 4-30 4-31 4-33 4-34 4-38 4-39 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-48 4-49 4-51 4-55 4-62 4-63 4-66 4-68 4-71 4-74 4-79 4-82 4-85 4-89 4-91 www..com Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit; (6ES7 331-7KBx2-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-94 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-99 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-102 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 xiii Contents 4.21 4.21.1 4.21.2 4.22 4.22.1 4.22.2 4.23 www..com Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 RTD (6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0) . . . 4-105 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-109 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-113 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 TC (6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0) . . . . 4-116 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-121 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-126 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit; (6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-128 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-131 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-132 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit; (6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-134 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-137 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit . . 4-138 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit; (6ES7 332-7ND00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-140 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-143 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-144 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit; (6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-145 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-149 Measuring/Output Method and Measuring/Output Range of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-150 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit; (6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-151 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-155 Measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-156 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-5 5-7 5-10 5-11 5-15 5-17 5-20 4.23.1 4.23.2 4.24 4.24.1 4.24.2 4.25 4.25.1 4.25.2 4.26 4.26.1 4.26.2 4.27 4.27.1 4.27.2 5 Other Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 5.4.1 5.4.2 5.4.3 5.4.4 5.4.5 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16; (6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Position Detection Module SM 338; POS-INPUT; (6ES7 338-4BC00-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Principle of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Addressing SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interrupts of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xiv S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Contents 6 Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-5 6-7 7-1 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-6 8-1 8-2 8-4 8-4 8-6 8-10 8-10 8-12 8-12 8-14 8-16 8-18 8-20 8-20 8-21 8-23 8-24 A-1 A-1 A-3 A-5 A-7 A-11 A-19 A-27 A-30 7 RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.1 7.2 Application and Characteristics; (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . . . . . . Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) . . . . . . . RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . www..com 7.3 7.4 8 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8.1 8.2 8.2.1 8.2.2 8.2.3 8.2.4 8.3 8.3.1 8.3.2 8.3.3 8.3.4 8.4 8.4.1 8.4.2 8.4.3 8.4.4 Module Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect with Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect TPA with Analog Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components and Selection Aid . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Assignment and Terminal Allocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connecting the Signal-Line Shield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A Parameter Sets for Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program . Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameters der SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 xv Contents B Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program . Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1 B-1 B-2 B-5 B-7 C-1 C-2 C-9 C-14 C-17 C-18 D-1 E-1 E-2 E-3 E-4 F-1 C Dimension Drawings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C.1 C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawings for Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . www..com C.3 C.4 C.5 D E Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . E.1 E.2 E.3 What is ESD? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Charging of Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage . F List of Abbreviations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Glossary-1 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1 xvi S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Contents Figures 2-1 2-2 2-3 2-4 2-5 2-6 2-7 2-8 3-1 www..com 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 3-16 3-17 3-18 3-19 3-20 3-21 3-22 3-23 3-24 3-25 3-26 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . . . . . Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) . . . . . . Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . . . . . Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) . . . . . . Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . . . . . Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment for the Redundant Supply of Encoders of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (Source Input) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16 48-125 VDC . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 120/230 VAC . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 120 VAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 48-125 VDC/1.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 120 VAC/1 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 120/230 VAC/2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; D0 32 120 VAC/1.0 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 120 VAC/1.0 A . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 REL. 120 VAC . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 REL. 230 VAC Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-5 2-7 2-7 2-11 2-12 2-15 2-16 3-11 3-11 3-14 3-17 3-17 3-26 3-28 3-30 3-33 3-35 3-38 3-38 3-41 3-44 3-47 3-48 3-56 3-59 3-62 3-65 3-66 3-69 3-72 3-75 3-76 3-79 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 xvii Contents 3-27 3-28 3-29 3-30 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 www..com 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-33 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-80 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-83 Terminal assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . 3-83 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-87 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module . . . . . . 4-28 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module . . . . . 4-29 Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-33 Scan Time of an Analog Input or Output Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-34 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response . . . . . . . . . 4-36 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels . . . . . . . . . . 4-37 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-45 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-46 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-47 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-48 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-50 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters Supplied from L+ to an Isolated AI . . 4-50 Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-51 Four-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI . . 4-52 Three-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI . 4-53 Three-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-53 Two-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI . . . 4-54 Design of Thermocouples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-55 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-58 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-59 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-60 SM 331; AI 8 TC 24 Bit: Connection of Thermocouples of the Same Type with External Compensation by Means of a Resistance Thermometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-61 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Wire Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-64 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a Two-Wire Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-65 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-66 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO . . . . . . . . . . 4-67 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-73 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-75 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-86 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-95 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . 4-106 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . 4-117 xviii S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Contents 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 6-1 6-2 6-3 7-1 7-2 7-3 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-13 B-1 B-2 B-3 www..com Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit . . . . Module View of Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View of Dummy Module DM 370 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . Operating Principle of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front View of the Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front View of the Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Front View of the Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RC Network with 10 MWohm for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference Potential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Isolation between the Bus Segments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector . . . . . . . . Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module . . . . . . . Front Connector Module for 32-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Insert the Connecting Cable into the Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spring-Loaded Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ............................................................... Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate . . . . . . . Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321; AI 8 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 TC (Continued) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-129 4-135 4-141 4-146 4-152 5-4 5-6 5-8 5-10 6-4 6-6 6-8 7-5 7-5 7-7 8-2 8-5 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-11 8-15 8-17 8-19 8-22 8-23 8-24 A-4 A-6 A-8 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 A-28 A-31 B-2 B-3 B-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 xix Contents B-4 B-5 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-9 B-10 C-1 C-2 C-3 C-4 C-5 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 C-10 www..com C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 C-18 C-19 C-20 C-21 C-22 C-23 C-24 C-25 C-26 E-1 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331 with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332 with Diagnostics Capability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for "Insert and Remove" Function with Active Bus Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-Proof Partition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 360 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 361 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Module IM 365 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Signal Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-Tier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RS 485 Repeater on S7-300 Rail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-5 B-5 B-6 B-6 B-7 B-8 B-8 C-2 C-3 C-3 C-4 C-4 C-5 C-5 C-6 C-6 C-7 C-8 C-9 C-10 C-11 C-12 C-13 C-14 C-15 C-16 C-17 C-18 C-19 C-19 C-20 C-20 C-21 E-3 Tables 1-1 1-2 1-3 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 Use in an Industrial Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pulse-Shaped Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sinusoidal Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mechanical Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2 1-4 1-5 1-6 1-7 1-8 1-8 xx S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Contents 1-8 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-12 2-1 2-2 2-3 www..com 2-4 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-11 3-12 3-13 3-14 3-15 4-1 4-2 4-3 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-8 4-9 4-10 Test Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rated Voltages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . "SIMATIC Outdoor Modules" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outdoor Modules Climatic Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . Assigning the Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0), Causes of Error and Remedial Measures . . . Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dependence of the Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A, Causes of Error and Remedial Action . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Example: Bit Pattern of a 16-Bit and a 13-Bit Analog Value . . . . . . . . . . . . Possible Resolutions of the Analog Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unipolar Input Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges + 10 V to + 1 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges + 500 mV to + 80 mV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-9 1-10 1-12 1-13 1-14 2-5 2-8 2-12 2-16 3-4 3-5 3-6 3-6 3-7 3-19 3-20 3-20 3-21 3-21 3-23 3-50 3-51 3-52 3-53 4-4 4-5 4-6 4-7 4-9 4-10 4-11 4-11 4-12 4-13 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 xxi Contents 4-11 4-12 4-13 4-14 4-15 4-16 www..com 4-17 4-18 4-19 4-20 4-21 4-22 4-23 4-24 4-25 4-26 4-27 4-28 4-29 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-33 4-34 4-35 4-36 4-37 4-38 4-39 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges + 20 mA to + 3.2 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Transmitters 10 kW and from 150 to 600 W . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors PT 100, 200, 500,1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt 100. 200, 500,1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type J . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type K . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type N . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type R, S . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Unipolar Output Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Output Range + 10 V . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V . Analog Value Representation in Output Range + 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value within the Range of Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-13 4-14 4-14 4-15 4-15 4-16 4-16 4-17 4-17 4-18 4-18 4-19 4-19 4-20 4-20 4-21 4-21 4-22 4-22 4-24 4-24 4-25 4-25 4-26 4-26 4-30 4-31 4-32 4-39 xxii S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Contents 4-40 4-41 4-42 4-43 4-44 4-45 4-46 4-47 4-48 www..com 4-49 4-50 4-51 4-52 4-53 4-54 4-55 4-56 4-57 4-58 4-59 4-60 4-61 4-62 4-63 4-64 4-65 4-66 4-67 4-68 4-69 4-70 4-71 4-72 4-73 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 5-6 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 Bit: Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature . . . . . Ordering Data of the Comparison Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit Using Measuring Range Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit Using Measuring Range Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD to Channel Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scan Times in "Software Filter, 8 Channels" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 TC to Channel Groups . Scan Times in "Software Filter, 8 Channels" Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit . . Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit . . Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit . . Measuring Ranges of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Ranges of the SM SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Other Signal Modules Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Meaning of the Switch Positions of the Dummy Module DM 370 . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SM 338; POS-INPUT: Interrelationship between Length of Cable and Transmission Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Diagnostic Messages of the SM 338; POS-INPUT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-41 4-42 4-56 4-60 4-69 4-69 4-70 4-71 4-79 4-80 4-81 4-83 4-89 4-90 4-91 4-92 4-99 4-100 4-103 4-109 4-110 4-112 4-113 4-115 4-121 4-122 4-124 4-126 4-127 4-133 4-139 4-144 4-157 4-157 5-2 5-6 5-11 5-12 5-15 5-18 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 xxiii Contents 5-7 6-1 7-1 7-2 7-3 8-1 8-2 8-3 8-4 www..com 8-5 8-6 8-7 8-8 8-9 8-10 8-11 8-12 8-13 8-14 A-1 A-2 A-3 A-4 A-5 A-6 A-7 A-8 A-9 A-10 A-11 A-12 A-13 A-14 A-15 A-16 A-17 A-18 A-19 A-20 A-21 A-22 A-23 B-1 D-1 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Cable Length of a Segment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: Connectable Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA . . . . . . . . . Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes of 32-Channel Digital Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Components of SIMATIC TOP connect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selection Table for SIMATIC TOP connect Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules . . . . . . . . . . . Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SFCs for Assigning Parameters to Signal Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Digital Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules . . . . . Codes of the Module Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories and Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-19 6-2 7-2 7-2 7-3 8-3 8-4 8-7 8-9 8-12 8-13 8-14 8-15 8-16 8-16 8-18 8-18 8-20 8-21 A-2 A-3 A-5 A-7 A-9 A-9 A-11 A-16 A-16 A-16 A-18 A-18 A-19 A-24 A-24 A-25 A-26 A-26 A-27 A-29 A-30 A-32 A-32 B-2 D-1 xxiv S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 General Technical Specifications 1 What are General Technical Specifications? www..com General technical specifications include the following: S S the standards and test values which the modules of the S7-300 programmable logic controller maintain and satisfy the test criteria to which the S7-300 modules were tested. In this Chapter Section 1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 1.8 Standards and Approvals Electromagnetic Compatibility Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating S7-300s Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection Rated Voltages of the S7-300 SIMATIC Outdoor Modules Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating SIMATIC Outdoor Modules Contents Page 1-2 1-4 1-6 1-7 1-9 1-10 1-11 1-13 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 1-1 General Technical Specifications 1.1 Standards and Approvals IEC 61131 The S7-300 programmable logic controller satisfies the requirements and criteria of Standard IEC 61131 Part 2. CE Mark www..com Our products satisfy the requirements and protection objectives of the EC Directives listed below and comply with the harmonized European standards (EN) promulgated in the Official Journals of the European Community for programmable logic controllers: S S 89/336/EEC "Electromagnetic Compatibility" (EMC Directive) 73/23/EEC "Electrical Equipment Designed for Use between Certain Voltage Limits" (Low-Voltage Directive) The declarations of conformity are held at the disposal of the competent authorities at the address below: Siemens Aktiengesellschaft Bereich Automatisierungstechnik A&D AS E 42 Postfach 1963 D-92209 Amberg Mark for Australia Our products satisfy the requirements of Standard AS/NZS 2064 (Class A). Use in Industrial Environment SIMATIC products have been designed for use in industrial environments. Table 1-1 Use in an Industrial Environment EMC Directive Industry Requirements in Respect of: Emitted Interference EN 50081-2 : 1993 Immunity EN 50082-2 : 1995 1-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 General Technical Specifications Use in Residential Areas If you operate an S7-300 in a residential area, you must ensure Limit Value Class B in accordance with EN 55011 to guard against radio interference emissions. Measures to achieve interference suppression according to Limit Value Class B: S S installation of the S7-300 in grounded cabinets and control boxes use of filters in supply lines UL Approval www..com UL recognition mark Underwriters Laboratories (UL) to Standard UL 508, File No. 116536 CSA Approval CSA certification mark Canadian Standard Association (CSA) to Standard C22.2 No. 142, File No. LR 48323 FM Approval Factory Mutual Approval Standard Class Number 3611, Class I, Division 2, Group A, B, C, D. ! Warning Personal injury or property damage can result. In areas subject to danger of explosion, personal injury or property damage can result if you withdraw connectors while an S7-300 is in operation. Always isolate the S7-300 in areas subject to danger of explosion before withdrawing connectors. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 1-3 General Technical Specifications 1.2 Electromagnetic Compatibility Introduction In this section you will find details of the noise immunity of S7-300 modules and details of radio interference suppression. The S7-300 modules satisfy, among other things, the requirements of the law applicable to EMC on the European domestic market. www..com Definition of "EMC" Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) is the ability of an electrical installation to function satisfactorily in its electromagnetic environment without interfering with that environment. Pulse-Shaped Interference The following table shows the electromagnetic compatibility of modules compared to pulse-shaped disturbance variables. A requirement for this is that the S7-300 system complies with the specifications and directives on electric design. Table 1-2 Pulse-Shaped Interference Tested with 8 kV 4 kV 2 kV (supply cable) 2 kV (signal cable) Satisfies Degree of Severity 3 (discharge in air) 2 (contact discharge) 3 Pulse-Shaped Interference Electrostatic discharge according to IEC 61000-4-2 Bursts (fast transient bursts) to IEC 61000-4-4 Energy-rich single impulse (surge) according to IEC 61000-4-5 External protective circuitry required (refer to the manual S7-300 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation, Chapter "Lightning Protection and Overvoltage Protection") S Asymmetrical coupling S Symmetrical coupling 2 kV (supply cable) 2 kV (signal/ data cable) 1 kV (supply cable) 1 kV (signal/data data cable) 3 1-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 General Technical Specifications Sinusoidal Interference The table below shows the EMC behavior of the S7-300 modules with regard to sinusoidal disturbance variables. Table 1-3 Sinusoidal Interference Test Values Satisfies Degree of Severity Sinusoidal Interference www..com HF irradiation (electromagnetic fields) according to IEC 61000-4-3 10 V/m with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz over the range from 80 MHz to 1000 MHz 10 V/m with 50% pulse modulation at 900 MHz Test voltage 10 V with 80% amplitude modulation of 1 kHz over the range from 9 MHz to 80 MHz 3 according to IEC 61000-4-3 HF conductance on cables and cable shields according to IEC 61000-4-6 3 Emission of Radio Interference Interference emission of electromagnetic fields in accordance with EN 55011: Limit value class A, Group 1. From 30 to 230 MHz From 230 to 1000 MHz Measured at a distance of 10 m (98.4 ft.) < 40 dB (mV/m)Q < 47 dB (mV/m)Q Interference emission via the mains AC power supply in accordance with EN 55011: Limit value class A, Group 1. From 0.15 to 0.5 MHz From 0.5 to 5 MHz From 5 to 30 MHz < 79 dB (mV)Q < 66 dB (mV)M < 73 dB (mV)Q < 60 dB (mV)M < 73 dB (mV)Q < 60 dB (mV)M S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 1-5 General Technical Specifications 1.3 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules and Backup Batteries Shipping and Storage of Modules S7-300 modules surpass the requirements of IEC 61131, Part 2, in respect of shipping and storage requirements. The following details apply to modules shipped and/or stored in their original packing. www..com Table 1-4 Shipping and Storage Conditions for Modules Condition Permitted Range v 1m - 40 _C to + 70_C 1080 to 660 hPa (corresponding to an altitude of - 1000 to 3500 m) 10 to 95 %, no condensation 5 - 9 Hz: 9 - 150 Hz: 3.5 mm 9.8 m/s2 Free fall (in shipping packing) Temperature Atmospheric pressure Relative humidity Sinusoidal oscillations to IEC 60068-2-6 Shock according to IEC 60068-2-29 250 m/s2, 6 ms, 1000 shocks Transporting Backup Batteries Wherever possible, transport backup batteries in their original packing. Special approval does not have to be obtained for transporting backup batteries for S7-300 systems. The lithium content of the backup battery is approximately 0.25 g. Storing Backup Batteries Backup batteries must be stored in a cool and dry place. The maximum shelf life is 5 years. ! Warning Improper handling of backup batteries can result in injury and damage to property. If backup batteries are not treated properly, they can explode and cause severe burning. Observe the following rules when handling backup batteries used in the S7-300 programmable logic controller: S never charge them S never heat them S never throw them in the fire S never damage them mechanically (drill, squeeze, etc.) 1-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 General Technical Specifications 1.4 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating S7-300s Operating Conditions S7-300 systems are intended for stationary use in locations protected against the weather. The operating conditions surpass the requirements of IEC 61131, Part 2. The S7-300 satisfies the operating conditions of Classes 3M3 and 3C3 to DIN EN 60721, Part 2. www..com Use with additional measures The S7-300, for example, must not be used without taking additional measures: S S in locations exposed to a high degree of ionizing radiation in hostile environments caused, for instance, by - dust accumulation - corrosive vapors or gases - strong electric or magnetic fields S in installations requiring special monitoring, for example - elevators - electrical installations in particularly hazardous areas An additional measure might be, for instance, installation of the S7-300 in a cabinet or in a housing. Ambient Mechanical Conditions The ambient mechanical conditions for S7-300 modules are listed in the following table in the form of sinusoidal oscillations. Table 1-5 Mechanical Conditions Continuous 0.0375 mm amplitude 0.5 g constant acceleration Occasional 0.075 mm amplitude 1 g constant acceleration Frequency Range in Hz 10 v f v 58 58 v f v 150 Reducing Vibrations If your S7-300 modules are exposed to severe shock and/or vibrations, you must take the appropriate measures to reduce the acceleration and/or amplitude, respectively. We recommend that you install the S7-300 on vibration-damping materials (for example, rubber-metal antivibration mountings). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 1-7 General Technical Specifications Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test The following table contains important information on the type and scope of tests for ambient mechanical conditions. Table 1-6 Test ... Vibrations Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test Test Standard Vibration test according to IEC 60068 Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) Remarks Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 10 Hz v f v 58 Hz, constant amplitude of 0.075 mm 58 Hz v f v 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1g Duration of oscillation: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each other Type of shock: half-sine Severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/- direction in each of three axes perpendicular to each other www..com Shock Shock test to IEC 60068, Part 2-29 Climatic Conditions You can use S7-300s under the following climatic conditions: Table 1-7 Climatic Conditions Permitted Range 0 to 60_C 0 to 40_C 10 to 95 % Non-condensing, corresponds to relative humidity (RH) Class 2 according to IEC 61131, Part 2 Corresponding to an altitude of - 1000 to 2000 m Test: 10 ppm; 4 days Test: 1 ppm; 4 days Remarks - Climatic Conditions Temperature: horizontal installation: vertical installation: Relative humidity Atmospheric pressure Concentration of contaminants 1080 to 795 hPa SO2: < 0.5 ppm; RH < 60 %, non-condensing H2S: < 0.1 ppm; RH < 60 %, non-condensing 1-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 General Technical Specifications 1.5 Information on Insulation Tests, Protection Class and Degree of Protection Test Voltages Dielectric strength was demonstrated in the routine test with the following test voltages: Table 1-8 www..com Test Voltages Test Voltage 600 VDC, 1 s (2 UN + 1000) VAC Circuits with Rated Voltage Ue to Other Circuits or to Ground 0 V < Ue v 50 V 100 V < Ue v 300 V Protection Class Protection Class I according to IEC 60536 - in other words, protective conductor connection to rail necessary Protection against Ingress of Foreign Bodies and Water Degree of protection IP 20 according to IEC 60529, that is, protection against contact with standard probes. There is no special protection against the ingress of water. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 1-9 General Technical Specifications 1.6 Rated Voltages of the S7-300 Rated Operating Voltages The modules of the S7-300 operate with different rated voltages. The following table contains the rated voltages and the corresponding tolerances. Table 1-9 Rated Voltages Rated Voltage www..com Tolerance Range 20.4 to 28.8 VDC 93 to 132 VAC 187 to 264 VAC 24 VDC 120 VAC 230 VAC 1-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 General Technical Specifications 1.7 SIMATIC Outdoor Modules Definition SIMATIC Outdoor modules are modules that can be used under extended environmental conditions. Extended environmental conditions mean: S S www..com operation possible at temperatures from - 25C to + 60C occasional, brief condensation permitted increased mechanical stress permissible S Comparison with "Standard" Modules The functional scope and technical specifications for the SIMATIC Outdoor modules correspond to those of the "standard" modules. The mechanical and climatic environmental conditions as well as their test method have changed. The SIMATIC Outdoor modules have their own Order Numbers (refer to Table 1-10) Configuring in STEP 7 If you have a STEP 7 version in which the SIMATIC Outdoor modules are not contained in the hardware catalog, simply configure your system with the corresponding "standard" modules (refer to Table 1-10). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 1-11 General Technical Specifications SIMATIC Outdoor Modules The following table contains all SIMATIC Outdoor modules. The Order Numbers of the corresponding "standard" modules have been included as an aid to configuration. You can refer to the description and technical specifications in the special section on the "standard" module. Table 1-10 "SIMATIC Outdoor Modules" Module www..com SIMATIC Outdoor Module for Use under Extended Environmental Conditions "Standard" Modules as of Order No. IM 153-1 CPU 315-2 DP CPU 312 IFM CPU 314 CPU 314 IFM IM 365 Power supply module PS 305 PS 307 SM 321 digital input module; SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 V-125 VDC SM 321; DI 8 120/230 VAC SM 322 digital output module; SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A SM 322, DO 8 48-125 VDC/1.5 A SM 322; DO 8 120/230 VAC/2 A SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A Digital input/output module SM 323; DI8/DO8 24 VDC/0.5 A Analog input module SM 331 analog input module; AI 2 12 Bit Analog output module SM 332 analog output module; AO 2 12 Bit SM 334 analog I/O module; SM 334; AI4/AO 2 12 Bit 6ES7 334-0KE80-0AB0 6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0 6ES7 332-5HB81-0AB0 6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0 6ES7 331-7KB82-0AB0 6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0 6ES7 323-1BH81-0AA0 6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0 6ES7 322-1BH81-0AA0 6ES7 322-1HF80-0AA0 6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0 6ES7 322-1FF81-0AA0 6ES7 322-8BF80-0AB0 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0 6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0 --6ES7 322-1FF01-0AA0 6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0 6ES7 321-1BH82-0AA0 6ES7 321-1BL80-0AA0 6ES7 321-7BH80-0AB0 6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0 6ES7 321-1FF81-0AA0 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0 6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0 6ES7 321-7BH00-0AB0 --6ES7 321-1FF01-0AB0 6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0 6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0 --6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0 6ES7 153-1AA82-0XB0 6ES7 315-2AF82-0AB0 6ES7 312-5AC81-0AB0 6ES7 314-1AE83-0AB0 6ES7 314-5AE83-0AB0 6ES7 365-0BA81-0AA0 6ES7 153-1AA02-0XB0 6ES7 315-2AF02-0AB0 6ES7 312-5AC01-0AB0 6ES7 314-1AE03-0AB0 6ES7 314-5AE03-0AB0 6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0 1-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 General Technical Specifications Table 1-10 "SIMATIC Outdoor Modules", continued Module SIMATIC Outdoor Module for Use under Extended Environmental Conditions "Standard" Modules as of Order No. FEPROM 64 KByte memory card FEPROM 32 kByte memory card FEPROM 16 kByte memory card Bus connector www..com 6ES7 951-0KF80-0AA0 6ES7 951-0KE80-0AA0 6ES7 951-0KD80-0AA0 6ES7 951-0KF00-0AA0 6ES7 951-0KE00-0AA0 6ES7 951-0KD00-0AA0 6ES7 972-0BAx0-0XA0 6ES7 972-0BBx0-0XA0 1.8 Mechanical and Climatic Environmental Conditions for Operating SIMATIC Outdoor Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3M4. Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test The following table provides information about the type and extent of tests for mechanical ambient conditions on SIMATIC Outdoor modules. Table 1-11 Outdoor Modules Ambient Mechanical Conditions Test Test ... Vibrations Test Standard Vibration test according to IEC 6008 Part 2-6 (sinusoidal) Remarks Type of oscillation: frequency sweeps with a rate of change of 1 octave/minute. 5 Hz f 9 Hz, constant amplitude of 3.5 mm 9 Hz f 150 Hz, constant acceleration of 1 g Ocillation period: 10 frequency sweeps per axis in each of three axes perpendicular to each other Shock Shock test according to IEC 6008 Type of shock: half-sine Part 2-27 Severity of shock: 15 g peak value, 11 ms duration Direction of shock: 3 shocks each in the +/- direction in each of three axes perpendicular to each other S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 1-13 General Technical Specifications Climatic Conditions The SIMATIC Outdoor modules can be used under the following climatic ambient conditions: Operating category: according to IEC 721 3-3, Class 3K5. Table 1-12 Outdoor Modules Climatic Conditions Ambient Condition Temperature: horizontal installation www..com vertical installation Relative humidity Permitted Range - -25C to 60C -25 C to 40C From 5 to 95 % Occasional, brief condensation, corresponds to relative humidity (RH) Class 2 according to IEC 61131, Part 2 Corresponds to a height of -1000 to 2000 m Test: 10 ppm; 4 days 1 ppm; 4 days Remarks Atmospheric pressure Pollutant concentration (according to IEC 721 3-3; class 3C3) 1080 to 795 hPa SO2: < 0.5 ppm; Relative humidity < 60% H2S: < 0.1 ppm; Relative humidity < 60% 1-14 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Power Supply Modules 2 Introduction www..com Various power supply modules are available to supply your S7-300 programmable controller and the sensors/actuators with 24 VDC. Power Supply Modules This chapter describes the technical specifications of the power supply modules of the S7-300 programmable controller. In addition to the technical specifications, this chapter describes the following: S S S S S The characteristics Connection Diagram Block Diagram Line protection Reaction to atypical operating conditions In this Chapter Section 2.1 2.2 2.3 2.4 Contents Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A (6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0) Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A; (6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0) Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; (6ES7 307-1EAx0-0AA0) Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; (6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0) Page 2-2 2-6 2-10 2-15 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 2-1 Power Supply Modules 2.1 Power Supply Module PS 305; 2 A; (6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0) Order Number "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" 6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0 www..comCharacteristics The PS 305 power supply module (2 A) has the following salient features: S S S S S Output current 2 A Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit Connection to DC power supply (rated input voltage 24/48/72/96/110 VDC) Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 Can be used as load power supply 2-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Power Supply Modules Wiring Schematic of the PS 305; 2 A LED for "24 VDC output voltage available" 24 VDC www..com On/Off switch for 24 VDC Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor L+1 M1 I L+2 M2 L+2 M2 L+2 M2 Terminals for 24 VDC output voltage Strain-relief assembly Figure 2-1 Wiring Schematic of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 2-3 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 305; 2 A (6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0) Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 80 125 120 Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation I, with protective grounding conductor Approx. 740 g Input Rating S S Input voltage Isolation voltage rating (24 V to input) Tested with 150 VAC S www..com S S S S S S Rated value Voltage range 24/48/72/96/1 VDC 10 16.8 to 138 VDC 2800 VDC SELV circuit > 10 ms Rated input current at 24 V at 48 V at 72 V at 96 V at 110 V 2.7 A 1.3 A 0.9 A 0.65 A 0.6 A 20 A 5 A2s Output Rating Output voltage Reliable isolation Buffering of supply failures (at 24/48/72/96/1 V) 10 S Repeat rate min. 1 s 75% 64 W 16 W Diagnostics Efficiency Power input Power loss Inrush current (at 25 _C) I2t (at inrush current) LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED S S S S Rated value Permitted range 24 VDC 24 V " 3%, stable at no load max. 3 s 2 A; 1) Can be connected in parallel Ramp-up time Output current Rated value Short-circuit protection Residual ripple 1) Electronic, nonlatching, from 1.65 to 1.95 IN max. 150 mVss With limited input voltage range > 24 V (24 to 138 VDC) the PS 305 can be loaded with 3 A. 2-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Power Supply Modules Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305; 2 A L+1 M1 U 24 VDC www..com L+2 M2 I/ Figure 2-2 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) Line Protection We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 305 power supply module (2 A): S S Rated current at 110 VDC: 10 A Tripping characteristic (type): C. Reaction to Atypical Operating Conditions Table 2-1 Reaction of the PS 305 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions If ... ... the output circuit is overloaded: S I > 3.9 A (dynamic) S 3 A < I v 3.9 A (static) ... the output is short-circuited ... Then ... 24 VDC LED Flashes Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Voltage drop, shortening of service life Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been eliminated Possible destruction Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery Dark an overvoltage occurs on the primary side there is an undervoltage on the primary side Dark S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 2-5 Power Supply Modules 2.2 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A; (6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0) Order Number 6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The PS 307 power supply module (2 A) has the following salient features: S S S S S Output current 2 A Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit Connection to single-phase AC system (input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz) Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 Can be used as load power supply 2-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Power Supply Modules Wiring Schematic of the PS 307; 2 A LED for "24 VDC output voltage available" 24 VDC 230V Voltage Selector www..com I On/Off switch for 24 VDC L1 N Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor Terminals for 24 VDC output voltage L+ M L+ M Strain-relief assembly Figure 2-3 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307; 2 A L1 N U 24 VDC I/ L+ M Figure 2-4 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 2-7 Power Supply Modules Line Protection We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 307 power supply module (2 A): S S Rated current at 230 VAC: 6 A Tripping characteristic (type): C. Reaction to Atypical Operating Conditions www..com Table 2-2 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (2 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC LED Flashes ... the output circuit is overloaded: S I > 2.6 A (dynamic) S 2 A < I v 2.6 A (static) ... the output is short-circuited Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Voltage drop, shortening of service life Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been eliminated Possible destruction Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery Dark an overvoltage occurs on the primary side there is an undervoltage on the primary side - Dark 2-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 307; 2 A (6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0) Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 50 125 120 Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation S Rated insulation level (24 V to L1) S Tested with Reliable isolation Bridging of power failures (at 93 and/or 187 V) S Repeat rate Efficiency Power input Power loss I, with protective grounding conductor Approx. 420 g Input Rating 250 VAC 2800 VDC SELV circuit min. 20 ms min 1 s 83 % 58 W typ. 10 W www..com Input voltage S Rated value System frequency S Rated value S Permitted range Rated input current S at 230 V S at 120 V Inrush current (at 25C) I2t (at inrush current) 120 / 230 VAC 50 Hz or 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz 0.5 A 0.8 A 20 A 1 A2s Output Rating Output voltage S Rated value S Permitted range S Ramp-up time Output current S Rated value 24 VDC 24 V " 5%, stable at no load max. 2.5 s 2 A, cannot be connected in parallel Electronic, nonlatching, 1.1 to 1.3 IN max. 150 mVss Diagnostics LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED Short-circuit protection Residual ripple S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 2-9 Power Supply Modules 2.3 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A; (6ES7 307-1EAx0-0AA0) Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0 Order Number "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" www..com 6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0 Characteristics The PS 307 power supply module (5 A) has the following salient features: S S S S S Output current 5 A Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit Connection to single-phase AC system (input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz) Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 Can be used as load power supply 2-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Power Supply Modules Wiring Schematic of the PS 307; 5 A LED for "24 VDC output voltage available" 24 VDC Voltage Selector 230V www..com On/Off switch for 24 VDC Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor L1 N I L+ M L+ M L+ M Terminals for 24 VDC output voltage Strain-relief assembly Figure 2-5 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 2-11 Power Supply Modules Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307; 5 A L1 N U www..com L+ M 24 VDC I/ Figure 2-6 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) Line Protection We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 307 power supply module (5 A): S S Rated current at 230 VAC: 10 A Tripping characteristic (type): C. Reaction to Atypical Operating Conditions Table 2-3 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (5 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions If ... ... Then ... 24 VDC LED Flashes ... the output circuit is overloaded: Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery S I > 6.5 A (dynamic) S 5 A < I v 6.5 A (static) ... the output is short-circuited an overvoltage occurs on the primary side there is an undervoltage on the primary side Voltage drop, shortening of service life Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been eliminated Possible destruction Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery Dark - Dark 2-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0) Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 80 125 120 Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation I, with protective grounding conductor Approx. 740 g Input Rating S S Input voltage Rated insulation level (24 V to L1) Tested with 250 VAC S www..com Rated value 120 / 230 VAC 2800 VDC SELV circuit min. 20 ms min 1 s 87 % 138 W typ. 18 W Diagnostics System frequency S S S S Rated value Permitted range 50 Hz or 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz Reliable isolation Bridging of power failures (at 93 and/or 187 V) Rated input current at 120 V at 230 V 2A 1A 45 A 1.2 A2s Output Rating Output voltage S Repeat rate Efficiency Power input Power loss Inrush current (at 25 _C) I2t (at inrush current) LED for output voltage available 24 VDC 24 V " 5%, stable at no load max. 2.5 s Yes, green LED S S S S Rated value Permitted range Ramp-up time Output current Rated value 5A Cannot be connected in parallel Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching, 1.1 to 1.3 Residual ripple IN max. 150 mVss S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 2-13 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 307; 5 A (6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0) Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 80 125 120 Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation I, with protective grounding conductor Approx. 570 g Input Rating S S Input voltage Rated insulation level (24 V to L1) Tested with 250 VAC 2800 VDC SELV circuit min. 20 ms min. 1 s 84% 143 W 23 W S S S S S Rated value 120/230 VDC www..com System frequency Rated value Permitted range 50 Hz or 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz Reliable isolation Bridging of power failures (at 93 and/or 187 V) Rated input current at 120 V at 230 V 2.1 A 1.2 A 45 A 1.8 A2s Output Rating Output voltage S Repeat rate Efficiency Power input Power loss Inrush current (at 25 _C) I2t (at inrush current) Diagnostics LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED S S S S Rated value Permitted range Ramp-up time 24 VDC 24 V " 3% max. 3 s Output current Rated value 5 A; cannot be connected in parallel Electronic, nonlatching, 1.1 to 1.3 Residual ripple IN Short-circuit protection max. 150 mVss 2-14 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Power Supply Modules 2.4 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A; (6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0) Order Number 6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The PS 307 power supply module (10 A) has the following salient features: S S S S S Output current 10 A Output voltage 24 VDC; proof against short-circuit and open circuit Connection to single-phase AC system (input voltage 120/230 VAC, 50/60 Hz) Reliable isolation to EN 60 950 Can be used as load power supply Wiring Schematic of the PS 307; 10 A LED for "24 VDC output voltage available" Voltage Selector On/Off switch for 24 VDC 24 VDC 230V I L1 N L+ M L+ M L+ M L+ M Terminals for 24 VDC output voltage Strain-relief assembly Terminals for system voltage and protective grounding conductor Figure 2-7 Wiring Schematic of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 2-15 Power Supply Modules Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307; 10 A L1 N U 24 VDC I/ L+ M www..com Figure 2-8 Basic Circuit Diagram of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) Line Protection We recommend that you install a miniature circuit-breaker (MCB) (for example, Siemens 5SN1 series) with the following rating to protect the incoming supply cable of the PS 307 power supply module (10 A): S S Rated current at 230 VAC: 16 A Tripping characteristic (type): C. Reaction to Atypical Operating Conditions Table 2-4 Reaction of the PS 307 Power Supply Module (10 A) to Atypical Operating Conditions If ... ... the output circuit is overloaded: S I > 13 A (dynamic) S 10 A < I v 13 A (static) ... the output is short-circuited Reaction of the Module 24 VDC LED Flashes Voltage dip, autom. volt. recovery Voltage drop, shortening of service life Output voltage 0 V; automatic voltage recovery after short circuit has been eliminated Possible destruction Automatic disconnection; automatic voltage recovery Dark an overvoltage occurs on the primary side there is an undervoltage on the primary side - Dark 2-16 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Power Supply Modules Technical Specifications of the PS 307; 10 A (6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0) Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight Input Rating Input voltage H D 200 1.2 kg 125 120 Other Parameters Protection class according to IEC 536 (DIN VDE 0106, Part 1) Insulation I, with protective grounding conductor S 120 / 230 VAC Rated insulation level (24 V to L1) Tested with 250 VAC 2800 VDC SELV circuit min. 20 ms min 1 s 89 % 270 W typ. 30 W S www..com Rated value S System frequency S S S S Reliable isolation 50 Hz or 60 Hz 47 Hz to 63 Hz Bridging of power failures (at 93 and/or 187 V) Rated value Permitted range Rated input current at 230 V at 120 V 1.7 A 3.5 A 55 A 9 A2s Output Rating Output voltage S Repeat rate Efficiency Power input Power loss Inrush current (at 25 C) I2t (at inrush current) Diagnostics LED for output voltage available Yes, green LED S S S S Rated value Permitted range Ramp-up time 24 VDC 24 V " 5%, stable at no load max. 2.5 s Output current Rated value 10 A, cannot be connected in parallel Short-circuit protection Electronic, nonlatching, 1.1 to 1.3 Residual ripple IN max. 150 mVss S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 2-17 Power Supply Modules www..com 2-18 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3 Changes and Improvements since the Previous Version of the Reference Manual www..com This chapter describes all new digital modules. Furthermore, two new overview sections will make it easier for you to access the information: S the "Module Overview" section shows you the modules that are available, together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find the module suitable for your task. the section entitled "Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module" provides the answer to the question "What must I do in succession to commission the module quickly and successfully? S Structure of the Chapter The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects: 1. Overview containing the modules that are available here and a description 2. Information that is generally valid - in other words, relating to all digital modules (for example, parameter assignment and diagnostics) 3. Information that refers to specific modules (for example, characteristics, diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special characteristics of the module): a) for digital input modules b) for digital output modules c) for digital input/output modules Additional Information Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0, 1 and 128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program. Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-1 Digital Modules In this Chapter Section 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 3.5 www..com Contents Module Overview Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Assigning Parameters to Digital Modules Diagnostics of Digital Modules Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 (6ES7 321-1BLx0-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 (6ES7 321-1BHx2-0AA0) 24 VDC; 24 VDC; Page 3-4 3-7 3-8 3-9 3-10 3-13 3-16 3-26 3-28 3-30 3-32 3-35 3-37 3-40 3-43 3-46 3-55 3-58 3-61 3-64 3-68 3-71 3.6 3.7 3.8 3.9 3.10 3.11 3.12 3.13 3.14 3.15 3.16 3.17 3.18 3.19 3.20 3.21 3.22 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts; (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 (6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 (6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 (6ES7 321-1EH01-0AA0) Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 (6ES7 321-1FFx1-0AA0) 24 VDC; Source Input; 48-125 VDC; 120 VAC; 120/230 VAC; Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 120 VAC; (6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 (6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 (6ES7 322-1BHx1-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 (6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0) 24 VDC/0.5 A; 24 VDC/0.5 A; 24 VDC/2 A; Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A; with Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 (6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 (6ES7 322-1EH01-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 (6ES7 322-1FFx1-0AA0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 (6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0) Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 16 (6ES7 322-1HH00-0AA0) Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 (6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0) 48-125 VDC/1,5 A; 120 VAC/1 A; 120/230 VAC/2 A; 120 VAC/1,0 A; Rel. 120 VAC; Rel. 230 VAC; 3-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Section 3.23 3.24 3.25 3.26 Contents Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 (6ES7 322-1HF10/-1HF80-0AA0) Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 (6ES7 322-1HF20-0AA0) Rel. 230 VAC/5 A; Rel. 230 VAC/5 A; Page 3-74 3-78 3-82 3-86 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 16/DO16 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0) Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BHx1-0AA0) www..com S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-3 Digital Modules 3.1 Module Overview Introduction The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the digital modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task. Table 3-1 www..com Module Characteristics (-1BLx0-) Number of inputs 32 DI; isolated in groups of 16 (-1BH02-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 16 Digital Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; source input (-7BHx0-) (-1BH50-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 16 16 DI; source input, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 48-125 VDC (-1CH80-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 8 SM 321; DI 16 120 VAC SM 321; DI 8120 /230 VAC SM 321; DI 32 120 VAC (-1EH01-) 16 DI; isolated in groups of 4 (-1FFx1-) 8 DI, isolated in groups of 2 (-1EL00-) 32 DI; isolated in groups of 8 Rated input voltage Suitable for... 24 VDC Switches; 24 VDC 24 VDC 48 to 125 VDC 120 VAC Switches; 120/ 230 VAC 120 VAC two, three, and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs) Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon edge change Adjustable input delays Special features No No No No - No No No No - Yes Yes Yes Yes 2 shortcircuitproof sensor supplies for 8 channels each External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors No No No No - No No No No - two and three-wire AC proximity switches No No No No - No No No No - No No No No - 3-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Table 3-2 Digital Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance SM 322; DO32 24 VDC/ 0.5 A (-1BL00-) 32 DO; isolated in groups of 8 SM 322; DO16 24 VDC/ 0.5 A (-1BHx1-) 16 DO; isolated in groups of 8 SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/2 A SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/ 0.5 A (-8BFx1-) 8 DO; isolated in groups of 8 SM 322; DO 8 48-125 VDC/ 1.5 A (-1CF80-) 8 DO; isolated and reverse polarity protection, in groups of 4 1.5 A 48 to 125 VDC SM 322; DO16 120 VAC/ 1A (-1EH01-) 16 DO; isolated in groups of 8 SM 322; DO 8 120/ 230 VAC/ 2A (-1FFx1-) 8 DO, isolated in groups of 4 SM 322; DO 32 120 VAC/ 1.0 A (-1EL00-) 32 DO, isolated in groups of 8 Module Characteristics Number of outputs (-1BF01-) 8 DO; isolated in groups of 4 www..com Output current Rated load voltage Suitable for... 0.5 A 24 VDC 0.5 A 24 VDC 2A 24 VDC 0.5 A 24 VDC 1A 120 VAC 2A 120/ 230 VAC 1.0 A 120 VAC Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights. No No No No No No No No No Blown fuse indicator for each group Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Substitute value output Special features No No No No No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Redundant driving of a load possible No No No - Fuse blown indicator. Replaceable fuse for each group S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-5 Digital Modules Table 3-3 Relay Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance 16 SM 322; DO REL. 120 VAC (-1HH00-) SM 322; DO 8 REL. 230 VAC (-1HF01-) 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 2 24 to 120 VDC, 48 to 230 VAC SM 322; DO 8 230 VAC/5A REL. (-1HF10/-1HF80-) 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 24 to 120 VDC, 48 to 230 VAC SM 322; DO 8 230 VAC/5A REL. (-1HF20-) 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 24 to 120 VDC, 24 to 230 VAC Module Characteristics Number of outputs Rated load voltage Suitable for... www..com Special features 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 to 120 VDC, 48 to 120 VAC AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional horsepower motors and indicator lights - Table 3-4 Digital Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 0.5 A (-1BL00-) 24 VDC/ SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A Characteristics Number of inputs Number of outputs Rated input voltage Output current Rated load voltage Inputs suitable for... Outputs suitable for... Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Hardware interrupt upon edge change Adjustable input delays Substitute value output Special features (-1BHx1-) 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 8 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 VDC 0,5 A 24 VDC 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 VDC 0,5 A 24 VDC Switches and two, three and four-wire proximity switches (BEROs). Solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights No No No No No - No No No No No 3-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Introduction The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission digital modules successfully. The sequence of steps is a suggestion, but you can perform individual steps either earlier or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install other modules or install, commission etc. other modules in between times. www..com Sequence of Steps Table 3-5 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Digital Module Step 1. 2. Procedure Select the module Install the module in the SIMATIC S7 network Refer To... Section 3.1 and specific module section from Section 3.5 "Installation" section in the manual for the programmable logic controller being used: S S7-300, M7-300, S7-400 or M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation or S ET 200M Distributed I/O Device 3. 4. Assign parameters to module Commission configuration Section 3.3 "Commissioning" section in the manual for the programmable logic controller being used: S S7-300, M7-300, S7-400 or M7-400 Programmable Controllers, Hardware and Installation or S ET 200M Distributed I/O Device 5. If commissioning was not successful, diagnose configuration Section 3.4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-7 Digital Modules 3.3 Digital Module Parameter Assignment Introduction Digital modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics of dome modules by means of parameter assignment. The information contained in this section refers only to the programmable digital modules: www..com S S Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0) Tools for Parameter Assignment You assign parameters to digital modules in STEP 7. You must perform parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU. When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to RUN mode, the CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual digital modules. Static and Dynamic Parameters The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters. Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above. In addition, you can modify the dynamic parameters within the current user program of an S7 control by means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a change from RUN STOP, STOP RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in Appendix A. Parameter Static Dynamic Settable with PG (STEP7 HWCONFIG) PG (STEP7 HWCONFIG) SFC 55 in the user program CPU Operating State STOP STOP RUN Parameters of the Digital Modules You will find the parameters of the digital input or output module that you can set in the specific section for the module (Section 3.7 on page 3-16 or Section 3.16 on page 3-46). 3-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.4 Diagnostics of the Digital Modules Introduction The information contained in this section refers only to the digital modules with diagnostics capability. For the S7-300, these modules are as follows: S S www..com Digital input module SM 321; DI 1624 VDC; (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Digital output module SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0) Programmable and Non-Programmable Diagnostic Messages In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages. You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" parameter field in STEP 7. Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the digital module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled. Actions Following Diagnostic Message in STEP 7 Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: S S S The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the digital module and forwarded to the CPU. The SF LED on the digital module lights. If you have programmed "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called. Reading out Diagnostic Messages You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program (refer to the Appendix "Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules"). You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to online Help for STEP 7). Diagnostic Message by Means of SF LED The digital modules with diagnostics capability indicate errors for you by means of their SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the digital module. It goes out when all errors have been rectified. The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-9 Digital Modules Diagnostic Messages Interrupt Processing by the Digital Modules You will find the diagnostic messages of the digital input module and output module with their possible causes and remedial action, together with a description of possible interrupts in the specific section on the module (Section 3.7 on page 3-16 or Section 3.16 on page 3-46). 3.5 www..com Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC; (6ES7 321-1BLx0-0AA0) Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0 Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" 6ES7 321-1BL80-0AA0 Characteristics The digital input module SM 321; DI 32 features: S S S 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire BEROs (proximity switches). 24 VDC has the following salient 3-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC www..com Backplane bus interface 24V Channel number Status LEDs -green 24V Figure 3-1 Module View and Block Diagram of the Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC Terminal Assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses. Input byte x Input byte (x+2) Input byte (x+1) Input byte (x+3) Figure 3-2 Terminal assignment of the SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-11 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 321; DI 32 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 24 VDC 500 VDC Insulation tested with Current consumption S Approx. 260 g Data for Specific Module From the backplane bus max. 15 mA typ. 6.5 W Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None Number of inputs Length of cable www..com 32 S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Input voltage Data for Selecting a Sensor S S S S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 32 32 16 S S S S S S Rated value For signal "1" For signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V - 30 to + 5 V Input current At signal "1" typ. 7 mA Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Yes Yes 16 Input delay At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 1131, Type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC S Permitted bias current 3-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.6 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 (6ES7 321-1BHx2-0AA0) 24 VDC; Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0 Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" www..com 6ES7 321-1BH82-0AA0 Characteristics The digital input module SM 321; DI 16 features: S S S 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire BEROs (proximity switches). 24 VDC has the following salient S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-13 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC www..com Backplane bus interface module M 24 V Channel number Status LEDs - green Figure 3-3 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC 3-14 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 24 VDC Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module S S S S S S Rated value For signal "1" For signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V -30 to + 5 V Number of inputs Length of cable www..com 16 Input current At signal "1" typ. 7 mA S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Input delay At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 1131, Type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA Voltage, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Vertical configuration Up to 60 _C 16 16 S Permitted bias current Isolation S S Between channels and backplane bus Yes Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC Insulation tested with Current consumption S From the backplane bus max. 10 mA typ. 3.5 W Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-15 Digital Modules 3.7 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; with Hardware and Diagnostic Interrupts; (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 321-7BH00-0AB0 www..comOrder Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" 6ES7 321-7BH80-0AB0 Characteristics The SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; with hardware and diagnostic interrupts features the following characteristics: S S S S S S S S S S S S 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Input characteristic curve according to IEC 1131, Type 2 Suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire BEROs (proximity switches). 2 short-circuit-proof sensor supplies for 8 channels each External redundant power supply possible to supply sensors "Sensor supply (Vs) O.K." status LEDs Group error display Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Configurable hardware interrupt Programmable Input delays 3-16 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC L+ SF L+ M www..com Vs L+ M Vs Vs Vs Backplane bus interface Channel number Status LEDs - green Fault indicator - red Encoder supplies Vs - green M M 24 V Figure 3-4 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Terminal Assignment for Redundant Supply of Encoders The figure below shows how encoder can additionally be supplied by means of Vs with a redundant voltage source - for example, via another module. L+ Short-circuitproof driver Digital input module Vs M to the sensors 1 L+ 2 L+ Figure 3-5 Terminal Assignment for the Redundant Supply of Encoders of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-17 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 24 VDC Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible Diagnostic functions Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module S S Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Number of inputs Length of cable www..com 16 Outputs max. 600 m max. 1000 m Sensor Power Supply Outputs 2 S S Unshielded Shielded Output voltage S S S With load min. L+ (- 2.5 V) Voltage, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics and encoder L+ 24 VDC Output current Rated value Permitted range 120 mA 0 to 150 mA Permitted Yes, electronic S S S S S Reverse polarity protection Yes Additional (redundant) supply Short-circuit protection Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C Vertical configuration Up to 60 _C Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Yes 16 16 Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage S S S S Rated value For signal "1" For signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V *30 to + 5 V Input current At signal "1" typ. 7 mA According to IEC 1131, Type 2 Possible max. 2 mA Input characteristic curve 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC Connection of Two-Wire BEROs Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits Insulation tested with Current consumption S Permitted bias current Time/Frequency max. 55 mA max. 40 mA typ. 4 W Internal preparation time for S S From the backplane bus From load voltage L + (without sensor supply VS) S S S S Only interrupt processing Interrupt and diagnostics processing max. 250 ms max. 250 ms Power dissipation of the module Input delay Parameters can be assigned Rated value Yes typ. 0.1/0.5/3/15/20 ms Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display S S S S Inputs Sensor power supplies (Vs) Hardware interrupt Diagnostic Interrupt Green LEDs per channel Green LED per output Interrupts Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned 3-18 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.7.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC Parameterization You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 3.3. Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 www..com 24 VDC You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC in the table below. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7. Table 3-6 Parameters of the SM 321; DI 16 Parameter 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Dynamic Static Scope Enable S Diagnostic interrupt S Hardware interrupt Input delay/voltage type Yes/no Yes/no 0.1 ms (DC) 0.5 ms (DC) 3 ms (DC) 15 ms (DC) 20 ms (DC/AC) No No 3 (DC) Module Module Diagnostics S Sensor supply missing Trigger for hardware interrupt Yes/no No Static Channel group S Rising edge S Falling edge Yes/no Yes/no No No Dynamic Channel group Assignment of the Encoder Supplies to Channel Groups The two encoder supplies of the module are used to supply two channel groups: inputs 0 to 7 and inputs 8 to 15. In these two channel groups, you parameterize the diagnostics for the encoder supply, too. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-19 Digital Modules Assigning Interrupt Parameters to Channel Groups The table below shows the channels that can be combined to form a channel group if you would like to parameterize interrupt processing. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC. Table 3-7 Assigning the Interrupt Parameters to the Inputs of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Parameter... www..com Can Be Set in Following Channel Groups 0 and 1 2 and 3 4 and 5 6 and 7 8 and 9 10 and 11 12 and 13 14 and 15 0 to 7 8 to 15 Channel Group Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 - Hardware interrupt (for falling, rising or both types of pulse edges) Diagnostic Interrupt (with missing encoder supply) Tolerances of the Programmable Input Delays Table 3-8 Tolerances of the Input Delays of SM 321; DI 16 (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Programmed Input Delay 0.1 ms 0.5 ms 3 ms (preset) 15 ms 20 ms 24 VDC Tolerance 87.5 to 112.5 ms 0.43 to 0.57 ms 2.62 to 3.38 ms 13.1 to 16.9 ms 20 to 25 ms 3-20 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.7.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC Effect of Operating and Mode Supply Voltage on the Input Values The input values of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module. Table 3-9 www..com Dependencies of Input Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Power Supply L+ to Digital Module L+ exists L+ missing STOP L+ exists L+ missing Input Value of Digital Module Process value 0 signal Process value 0 signal - - CPU Operating State POWER ON RUN POWER OFF - L+ exists L+ missing Diagnostics Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC The table below presents an overview of the diagnostics messages for the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC. Table 3-10 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0) Diagnostics Message LED 24 VDC Scope of the Diagnostics Channel group Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Parameters can be assigned Yes Sensor supply missing External auxiliary supply missing Internal auxiliary power missing Fuse blown Incorrect parameter on module Watchdog timeout EPROM error RAM error Hardware interrupt lost SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF No S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-21 Digital Modules Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostics messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly in STEP 7. Behavior upon Failure of the Supply Voltage www..com A failure of the supply voltage of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC is always indicated by the SF LED on the module. In addition, this information is made available on the module (entry the "encoder supply missing" diagnosis). The input value is initially held for 20 to 40 ms before the 0 signal is transferred to the CPU. Supply voltage dips < 20 ms do not modify the process value (refer to Table 3-9). Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see Section 3.7.3). Failure of the Supply Voltage with Redundant Encoder Incoming Supply Note If an external redundant source is applied simultaneously to the sensor supply (Vs), a failure in the internal sensor supply causes a failure of the internal and/or external sensor supply and/or a blown fuse to be indicated instead of a regular sensor supply failure. Short-Circuit of Sensor Supply Vs Irrespective of the parameter assignment, the corresponding Vs LED goes out if a short-circuit of the encoder supply Vs occurs. 3-22 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Causes of Error and Remedial Measures Table 3-11 Diagnostics Messages of the SM 321; DI 16 Error and Remedial Measures Diagnostics Message Lack of encoder supply External auxiliary voltage missing Internal auxiliary voltage missing Fuse blown Wrong parameters in the module Watchdog tripped Possible Error Cause Overload of sensor supply Short circuit of sensor supply to M Power supply L+ to module missing Power supply L+ to module missing Fuse in module defective Fuse in module defective One parameter or the combination of parameters is not plausible Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective EPROM error Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective RAM error Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective Hardware interrupt lost The module cannot send an interrupt, since the previous interrupt was not acknowledged; configuration error possible 24 VDC (6ES7 321-7BHx0-0AB0), Causes of Remedy Eliminate overload Eliminate short circuit Feed supply L+ Feed supply L+ Replace module Replace module Reassign module parameter Eliminate interference Replace module Eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of CPU Replace module Eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of CPU Replace module Change interrupt processing in CPU and reconfigure module parameters, if required The error continues until the module is configured with new parameters www..com S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-23 Digital Modules 3.7.3 Interrupts of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC Introduction This section describes the SM 321; DI 16 behavior. The following interrupts exist: S S www..com 24 VDC with regard to its interrupt Diagnostic Interrupt Hardware interrupt The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail. Enabling Interrupts The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in STEP 7 (refer to Section 3.7.1). Diagnostic Interrupt If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostics interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module. 3-24 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Hardware Interrupt The SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC can trigger a hardware interrupt for every channel group with a rising or falling edge, or both, of a signal status change. Perform parameter assignment one channel group at a time. It can be modified at any time (in RUN mode using the user program). Pending hardware interrupts trigger hardware interrupt processing in the CPU (OB 40). The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program or of the priority classes with low priority. www..com You can set in the user program of the hardware interrupt OB (OB 40) how the programmable logic controller has to react to an edge change. When the hardware interrupt OB is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module. The module can buffer one interrupt per channel. If no higher priority run-time levels are waiting to be processed, the buffered interrupts (of all modules) are serviced one after the other by the CPU according to the order in which they occurred. Hardware Interrupt Lost In an interrupt has been buffered for a channel and another interrupt occurs on that channel before it has been processed by the CPU, a diagnostics interrupt "hardware interrupt lost" is triggered. More interrupts on this channel are not acquired until processing of the interrupt buffered on this channel has been executed. Interrupt-Triggering Channels The interrupt-triggering channels are stored in the local data of the hardware interrupt OBs (in the OB start information). The start information is two words long (bits 0 to 31). The bit number is the channel number. Bits 16 to 31 are not assigned. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-25 Digital Modules 3.8 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; Source Input; (6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0) Order Number 6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The SM 321; DI 16 S S S 24 VDC (source input) has the following salient features: 16 inputs, source input, isolated in groups of 16 24 VDC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire BEROs (proximity switches). Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC L+ Backplane bus interface Channel number Status LEDs - green Figure 3-6 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 Input) 24 VDC (Source 3-26 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 24 VDC Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage (reference potential is L+) Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module S S S S Rated value For signal "1" For signal "0" 24 VDC -13 V to -30 V +30 V to -5 V Number of inputs Length of cable www..com 16 Input current At signal "1" typ. 7 mA S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Input delay Voltage, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously S S At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 1131, Type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs S S S S Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C 16 16 S Permitted bias current Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Yes Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC Insulation tested with Current consumption S From the backplane bus max. 10 mA typ. 3.5 W Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-27 Digital Modules 3.9 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 (6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0) 48-125 VDC; Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" 6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The SM 321; DI 16 S S S 48-125 VDC features the following characteristics: 26 inputs, isolated in groups of 8 Rated input voltage 48 to 125 VDC Suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire BEROs (proximity switches). Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 48-125 VDC 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1M 48 to 125 V M 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 2M 48 to 125 V Channel number Status LEDs - green M Backplane bus interface Figure 3-7 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 321; DI 16 48-125 VDC 3-28 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable www..com 16 48-125 VDC Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None Sensor Selection Data Input voltage S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m S S S 8 6 Rated value 48 VDC to 125 VDC 30 V to 146 V -146 V to 15 V Voltage, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously at UE Up to 60 V Up to 146 V For signal "1" For signal "0" S S Horizontal installation Up to 50 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 8 8 8 8 Input current S S S At signal "1" typ. 3.5 mA Input delay From " 0" to "1" At "1" to "0" 0.1 ms to 3.5 ms 0.7 ms to 3.0 ms According to IEC 1131, Type 1 Possible max. 1 mA Isolation Input characteristic curve Yes Yes 8 Connection of Two-Wire BEROs S S S Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of S Permitted bias current Permiss. potential differences Between the different circuits 146 VDC / 132 VAC 1500 VDC Insulation tested with Current consumption S From the backplane bus max. 40 mA typ. 4.3 W Power dissipation of the module S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-29 Digital Modules 3.10 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 (6ES7 321-1EH01-0AA0) 120 VAC; Order Number 6ES7 321-1EH01-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The SM 321; DI 16 S S S 120 VAC features the following characteristics: 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 4 120 VAC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two/three-wire AC proximity switches Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 16 AC 120 V N M N M Backplane bus interface N M N M Channel number Status LEDs - green Figure 3-8 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 16 120 VAC 3-30 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 321; DI 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 120 VAC Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage Approx. 225 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable www..com 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m S S S S S S S Rated value For signal "1" For signal "0" Frequency range 120 VAC 79 to 132 V 0 to 20 V 47 to 63 Hz Input current At signal "1" At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" typ. 6 mA max. 25 ms max. 25 ms According to IEC 1131, Type 1 Possible max. 1 mA Input delay S S Unshielded Shielded Voltage, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously Input characteristic curve 16 Connection of Two-Wire BEROs 16 S S S S S S Horizontal configuration Up to 60 __C Vertical configuration Up to 40 __C S Permitted bias current Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between Minternal and the inputs Between the inputs of the different groups 120 VAC 250 VAC 1500 VAC max. 16 mA typ. 4.1 W Yes Yes 4 Insulation tested with Current consumption S From the backplane bus Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-31 Digital Modules 3.11 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 8 (6ES7 321-1FFx1-0AA0) 120/230 VAC; Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 321-1FF01-0AA0 Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" www..com 6ES7 321-1FF81-0AA0 Characteristics The SM 321; DI 8 S S S 120/230 VAC features the following characteristics: 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 2 120/230 VAC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two/three-wire AC proximity switches 3-32 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 120/230 VAC 1N M www..com M Backplane bus interface 2N 3N M 4N M Channel number Status LEDs - green Figure 3-9 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 8 120/230 VAC S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-33 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 321; DI 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 120/230 VAC Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage Approx. 240 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable www..com 8 max. 600 m max. 1000 m S S S S S Rated value For signal "1" For signal "0" Frequency range 120/230 VAC 79 to 264 V 0 to 40 V 47 to 63 Hz Input current At signal "1" 120 V, 60 Hz 230 V, 50 Hz Input delay 8 8 Connection of Two-Wire BEROs typ. 6.5 mA typ. 11 mA S S Unshielded Shielded Voltage, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously S S S S Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C S S At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 25 ms max. 25 ms According to IEC 1131, Type 1 Possible max. 2 mA Input characteristic curve Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Yes Yes 2 S Permitted bias current S S Between Minternal and the inputs Between the inputs of the different groups 230 VAC 500 VAC 1500 VAC max. 29 mA typ. 4.9 W Insulation tested with Current consumption S From the backplane bus Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None 3-34 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.12 Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 (6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0) 120 VAC; Order Number 6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0 Technical Specification www..com The SM 321; DI 32 S S S 120 VAC features the following characteristics: 32 inputs, isolated in groups of 8 120 V AC rated input voltage Suitable for switches and two/three-wire AC proximity switches Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 321; DI 32 120 VAC 1L 3L 1N 2L backplane bus IM 3N 4L 2N Channel number Status LEDs -green 4N Figure 3-10 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input Module SM 321; DI 32 120 VAC S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-35 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 321; DI 32 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (in millimeters) Weight 40125120 Approx. 300 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Length of cable www..com 32 max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously 120 VAC Data for Selecting a Sensor Input voltage S S S S S S S Rated value for ``1'' signal for ``0'' signal Frequency range 120 VAC 74 to 132 V 0 to 20 V 47 to 63 Hz Input current at ``1'' signal From ``0'' to ``1'' From ``1'' to ``0'' typ. 21 mA max. 15 ms max. 25 ms According to IEC 1131, Type 2 Possible max. 4 A Input delay S S Unshielded Shielded Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C 32 24 S S S S Permitted bias current Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 32 Yes Yes 8 Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference S S Between Minternal and the inputs Between the inputs of the different groups 120 VAC 250 VAC 1500 VAC max. 16 mA typ. 4 W Insulation tested with Current consumption S From the backplane bus Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None 3-36 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.13 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0) Order Number 6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The digital output module SM 322; DO 32 salient features: S S S S 32 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Using the Module with High-Speed Counters Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters: Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a "1" signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-37 Digital Modules Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC/ 0.5 A 24 V 1 L+ 3 L+ 24 V M www..com 1M M Backplane bus interface 3M 24 V 2L+ 4 L+ 24 V M M 2M 4M Channel number Status LEDs -green Figure 3-11 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A Terminal Assignment The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses. Output byte x Output byte (x + 2) Output byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 3) Figure 3-12 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC 3-38 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 32 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 24 VDC/ 0.5 A Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage S Approx. 260 g Data for Specific Module At signal "1" min. L + (- 0.8 V) Output current S S S S At signal "1" Rated value Permitted range At signal "0" (leakage current) 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 32 max. 600 m max. 1000 m S S Unshielded Shielded Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) 24 VDC Output delay (for resistive load) From " 0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W Load resistor range Lamp load max. 4 A max. 3 A max. 2 A Connecting two outputs in parallel S S S S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C S S Yes Yes 8 75 VDC 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 110 mA max. 160 mA typ. 6.6 W For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits Triggering a digital input Switch rate S S S For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC For lamp load max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 10 Hz typ. L + (- 53 V) Yes, electronic typ. 1 A Insulation tested with Current consumption Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output S S From the backplane bus From load voltage L + (without load) S Threshold on Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-39 Digital Modules 3.14 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; (6ES7 322-1BHx1-0AA0) Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0 Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" www..com 6ES7 322-1BH81-0AA0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 322; DO 16 salient features: S S S S 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following Using the Module with High-Speed Counters Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters: Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a "1" signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry. 3-40 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A 1 L+ M 24 V www..com Backplane bus interface 1M 2 L+ M 24 V 2M Channel number Status LEDs - green Figure 3-13 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-41 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 24 VDC/0.5 A Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage S Approx. 190 g Data for Specific Module At signal "1" min. L + (- 0.8 V) Output current S S S S At signal "1" Rated value Permitted range At signal "0" (leakage current) 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 16 max. 600 m max. 1000 m S S Unshielded Shielded Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) 24 VDC Output delay (for resistive load) At " 0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W Load resistor range Lamp load max. 4 A max. 3 A max. 2 A Connecting two outputs in parallel S S S S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC Yes Yes 8 Triggering a digital input Switch rate S S S For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC For lamp load max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 10 Hz typ. L + (- 53 V) Yes, electronic typ. 1 A Insulation tested with Current consumption 500 VDC max. 80 mA max. 80 mA typ. 4.9 W Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output S S From the backplane bus From load voltage L + (without load) S Threshold on Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None 3-42 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.15 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 (6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0) 24 VDC/2 A; Order Number 6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The digital output module SM 322; DO 8 features. S S S S 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 4 2 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage 24 VDC/2 A has the following salient Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Using the Module with High-Speed Counters Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters: Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/2 A carry a "1" signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-43 Digital Modules Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/2 A 1 L+ M 24 V www..com Backplane bus interface 1M 2 L+ M 24 V 2M Channel number Status LEDs - green Figure 3-14 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/2 A 3-44 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 24 VDC/2 A Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage S Approx. 190 g Data for Specific Module At signal "1" min. L + (- 0.8 V) Output current S S S S At signal "1" Rated value Permitted range 2A 5 mA to 2.4 A max. 0.5 mA Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 8 S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m At signal "0" (leakage current) Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) 24 VDC Output delay (for resistive load) From " 0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 12 W to 4 kW max. 10 W Load resistor range Lamp load max. 4 A max. 4 A Connecting two outputs in parallel S S Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C S Yes Yes 4 Isolation For redundant triggering of a load Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible S S S Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of To increase performance Triggering a digital input Switch rate Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC S S S For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC For lamp load max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz Insulation tested with Current consumption max. 10 Hz typ. L + (- 48 V) Yes, electronic typ. 3 A S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (no load) max. 40 mA max. 60 mA typ. 6.8 W Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output Power dissipation of the module S Threshold on Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-45 Digital Modules 3.16 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/ 0.5 A; with Diagnostic Interrupt; (6ES7 322-8BFx0-0AB0) Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0 Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" www..com 6ES7 322-8BF80-0AB0 Characteristics The digital output module SM 322; DO features: S S S S S 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 0.5 A output current 24 VDC rated load voltage Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights 2 terminals per output - Output without series diode - Output with series diode (for redundant load control) S S S S S Group error display Channel-specific status and error LEDs Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output 24 VDC/0.5 A has the following salient 3-46 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Module View of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A SF F0 0 F1 1 F2 2 www..com F3 3 F4 4 F5 5 F6 6 F7 7 Channel number, channel fault (F) Status LEDs -green Fault LEDs -red Figure 3-15 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 8 Connection diagram 24 VDC/0.5 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-47 Digital Modules Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/ 0.5 A L+ Monitoring L+ Fuse Monitoring Control www..com Output Output drivers (8 x) (8x) Output M Diagnostics Status Backplane bus Logic Channel status LED (8x) green 0 to 7 Channel fault LED (8x) red F 0 to 7 Group error display (1x) red SF Figure 3-16 Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A Redundant Control of a Load The output with series diode can be used for redundant control of a load. Redundant control is possible from two different signal modules without external circuitry. Both modules must have the same reference potential, M. Note If the output with series diode is used, external short-circuits to L+ cannot be detected. 3-48 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 24 VDC/0.5 A Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Red LED (F) per channel Possible Data for Selecting an Actuator Diagnostic functions Approx. 210 g Data for Specific Module S S S Group error display Channel error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 8 S S Output voltage max. 600 m max. 1000 m Unshielded Shielded S At signal "1" Without series diode With series diode min. L + (- 0.8 V) min. L + (- 1.6 V) Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Total current of the outputs (per group) without series diode 24 VDC Output current S S S S At signal "1" Rated value Permitted range 0.5 A 10 mA to 0.6 A1) max. 0.5 mA S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 4 A max. 4 A max. 3 A At signal "0" (leakage current) Output delay (for resistive load) At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 180 ms max. 245 ms 48 W to 3 kW max. 5 W Total current of the outputs (per group) with series diode Load resistor range Lamp load max. 3 A max. 2 A max. 3 A Connecting two outputs in parallel S S S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C S For redundant triggering of a load Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Yes Output with series diode only, must have the same reference potential Not possible Possible 1 binary input according to IEC 1131-2, Type 2; Type 1 with disabled open-circuit monitoring S To increase performance Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC Triggering a digital input Insulation tested with Current consumption S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (no load) max. 70 mA max. 90 mA typ. 5 W Switch rate S S S For resistive load Inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, DC 13 For lamp load max. 100 Hz max. 2 Hz max. 10 Hz typ. L + (- 45 V) Yes, electronic typ. 0.75 to 1.5 A Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Green LEDs per channel Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output S Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be assigned S 1) Threshold on 5 mA to 0.6 A with disabled open-circuit monitoring S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-49 Digital Modules 3.16.1 Assigning Parameters to the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A Parameterization You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to digital modules in Section 3.3. Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 www..com 24 VDC/0.5 A You will find an overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings for the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A in the table below. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7. Table 3-12 Parameters of the SM 322; DO 8 Parameter 24 VDC/0.5 A Default Settings Parameter Type Dynamic Scope Value Range Enable S Diagnostic interrupt Behavior on CPU STOP Diagnostics Yes/no Apply substitute value (EWS) Hold last value (LWH) No EWS Module S S S S Wire break No load voltage L+ Short-circuit to M Short-circuit to L+ Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no Yes/no No No No No No Dynamic Channel Static Channel Apply substitute value "1" 3-50 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.16.2 Behavior and Diagnostics of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A Effect of Operating and Mode Supply Voltage on the Output Values The output values of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A depend on the operating mode of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module. Table 3-13 Dependence of the Output Values on the Operating Mode of the CPU and on the Supply Voltage L+ of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A. www..com CPU Operating State POWER ON RUN Power Supply L+ to Digital Module L+ exists L+ missing Output Value of Digital Module CPU value 0 signal Substitute value/last value (0 signal preset) 0 signal 0 signal 0 signal STOP L+ exists L+ missing POWER OFF - L+ exists L+ missing Behavior upon Failure of the Supply Voltage Failure of the supply voltage of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A is always indicated by the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module (entry in diagnosis). Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see Section 3.16.3). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-51 Digital Modules Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A The following table provides an overview of the diagnostic messages of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A. Table 3-14 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 Diagnostics Message Wire break Load voltage missing www..com 24 VDC/0.5 A Parameters can be assigned Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No LED SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF Scope of the Diagnostics Channel Channel Channel Channel Module Module Module Module Module Module Short-circuit to M Short-circuit to L+ External auxiliary supply missing Internal auxiliary power missing Fuse blown Watchdog timeout EPROM error RAM error * Open-circuit detection is performed at a current < 1 mA. When suitably parameterized, a wire break results only in the SF LED and the corresponding channel error LED lighting up. Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you have assigned parameters to the digital module accordingly in STEP 7. 3-52 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Causes of Error and Remedial Action Table 3-15 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 322; DO 8 Action Diagnostics Message Wire break Error Detection ... Only with output to "1" 24 VDC/0.5 A, Causes of Error and Remedial Possible Error Cause Open circuit between module and actuator Channel not connected (open) Remedy Close circuit Disable the "Diagnose Wire Break" parameter for the channel in STEP 7 Replace module Eliminate overload Eliminate short circuit Eliminate short circuit Feed supply L+ Feed supply L+ Replace module Replace module Eliminate interference Replace module Eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of CPU Replace module Eliminate interference and switch on/off power supply of CPU Replace module www..com No load voltage Short-circuit to M Only with output to "1" Only with output to "1" Always Always Always Defective output Overload of output Short-circuit of output to M Short-circuit at output to L+ of module supply Power supply L+ to module missing Power supply L+ to module missing Fuse in module defective Short-circuit to L+ No external auxiliary voltage No internal auxiliary voltage Fuse blown Watchdog tripped Always Always Fuse in module defective Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective EPROM error Always Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective RAM error Always Temporary high electromagnetic interference Module defective S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-53 Digital Modules 3.16.3 Interrupts of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A Introduction The SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A can trigger diagnostic interrupts. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail. www..comEnabling Interrupts The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in STEP 7 (refer to Section 3.16.1). Diagnostic Interrupt If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. The CPU interrupts the execution of the user program and processes the diagnostics interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module. 3-54 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules 3.17 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 (6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0) 48-125 VDC/1.5 A; Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" 6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The SM 322; DO 8 S S S S S 48-125 VDC/1.5 A features the following characteristics: 8 outputs, reverse polarity protection and isolated in groups of 4 1.5 A output current Rated load voltage 48 to 125 VDC Suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Group error display Using the Module with High-Speed Counters Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters: Note When connecting the power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 322; DO 8 48-125 VDC/1.5 A carry a "1" signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-55 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 48-125 VDC/1.5 A +5V SF 1 1 L+ 3 SF 5 www..com 7 9 Backplane bus interface +5V 10 1M 48 to 125 V 11 13 15 17 19 20 2 L+ 48 to 125 V 2M Channel number Status LEDs - green Fault LEDs - red Figure 3-17 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 48-125 VDC/1.5 A 3-56 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 Approx. 250 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 8 48-125 VDC/1.5 A Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage S S S S S S At " 1" signal min. L + (-1.,2 V) Output current At " 1" signal Rated value Permitted range 1.5 A 10 mA to 1.5 A max. 3 A for 10 ms max. 0.5 mA S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Permitted surge current At signal "0" (leakage current) Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 48 VDC to 125 VDC Yes, by means of fuse1) Output delay (for resistive load) From " 0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 2 ms max. 15 ms max. 15 W at 48 V max. 40 W at 125 V S Reverse polarity protection Total current of the outputs (per group) Lamp load Connecting two outputs in parallel S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 50 _C Up to 60 _C max. 6 A max. 4 A max. 3 A S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible S S S S Vertical configuration Up to 40_ max. 4 A Triggering a digital input Switch rate Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Between the different circuits 146 VDC / 132 VAC 1500 VAC Yes Yes 4 S S S For resistive load For inductive load For lamp load max. 25 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 10 Hz typ. M (-1V) Yes, electronic3) typ. 4.4 A Fuse 6.,3 A/250 V, quick blow, 5 x 20 mm SP0001.1012 194-1630-0 Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output Insulation tested with Current consumption S S S S 1) Threshold on Replacement fuses max. 100 mA max. 2 mA typ. 7.2 W Schurter Wickmann S S From the backplane bus From load voltage L+ (no load) Power dissipation of the module Fuse carrier Schurter FEK 0031.3562 Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None Red LED (SF)2) S 2) Group error display 3) The fuses on this module are merely supplementary fuses. External overcurrent protection (suitable for branch circuits conforming to the local regulations for electrical engineering) is required in the supply cables of the load circuit. Potential errors are: - No load voltage - Fuse defective - Output overloaded If an overload condition is detected, the output is inhibited for approximately 2.4 s. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-57 Digital Modules 3.18 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 (6ES7 322-1EH01-0AA0) 120 VAC/1 A; Order Number 6ES7 322-1EH01-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The SM 322; DO 16 S S S S 120 VAC/1 A features the following characteristics: 16 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8 1 A output current 120 VAC rated load voltage Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights. 3-58 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 120 VAC/1 A 5V SF SF M 1L M www..com Backplane bus interface 1N 5V 2L M M 2N Channel number Status LEDs - green Fault LEDs -red Figure 3-18 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 16 120 VAC/1 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-59 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 120 VAC/1 A Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage S Approx. 300 g Data for Specific Module At signal "1" At maximum current At minimum current min. L1 (- 1.5 V) min. L1 (- 8.5 V) Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 16 Output current S At signal "1" Rated value Permitted range for 0 _C to 40 _C Permitted range for 40 _C to 60 _C Permitted surge current (per group) 1A 10 mA to 1 A 10 mA to 0.5 A max. 10 A (not more than 1 AC scan cycle) max. 1 mA S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 120 VAC 47 Hz to 63 Hz S Permitted frequency range Total current of the outputs (per group) S S S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C S max. 4 A max. 2 A max. 2 A At signal "0" (leakage current) Output delay (for resistive load) Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference Yes Yes S S From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" 1 ms Not more than 1 AC scan cycle 10 mA Non-zero cross switch max. size 3 according to NEMA max. 25 W Minimum load current Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of motor starter 8 Lamp load 120 VAC 250 VAC 1500 VAC Connecting two outputs in parallel S S Between Minternal and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible Insulation tested with Current consumption S S Triggering a digital input max. 184 mA max. 3 mA typ. max. 9 W Switch rate From the backplane bus From load voltage L1 (without load) Power dissipation of the module S S S 1) For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 15 AC For lamp load Possible errors: - No load voltage - Fuse defective max. 10 Hz max. 0.5 Hz Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None Yes Red LED (SF) 1) max. 1 Hz S Group error display 3-60 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Short-circuit protection of the output Fuse, 8 A/250 V; per group min. 40 A max. 300 ms Replacement fuses 8 A fuse/quick-acting 194-1800-0 SP001.1013 217.008 S S Current required for fuse to blow Response time S S S S Wickmann Schurter Littelfuse Fuse carrier Wickmann 653 07 3.19 www..com Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 8 120/230 VAC/2 A; (6ES7 322-1FFx1-0AA0) Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 322-1FF01-0AA0 Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" 6ES7 322-1FF81-0AA0 Characteristics The SM 322; DO 8 S S S S S 120/230 VAC/2 A features the following characteristics: 8 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 4 2 A output current 120/230 VAC rated load voltage Suitable for AC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights Group error display S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-61 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 120/230 VAC/2 A 5V SF SF M 1L 1N * M www..com Backplane bus interface 5V 2L 2N M * M Channel number Status LEDs - green Fault LEDs -red * Zero cross inhibit voltage triac Figure 3-19 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 120/230 VAC/2 A 3-62 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 120/230 VAC/2 A Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage S Approx. 275 g Data for Specific Module At signal "1" - - At maximum current At minimum current min. L1 (- 1.5 V) min. L1 (- 8.5 V) Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 8 Output current S At signal "1" Rated value Permitted range for 0 _C to 40 _C Permitted range for 40 _C to 60 _C Permitted current surge (per group) AC 2 A 1) 10 mA to 2 A 10 mA to 1 A max. 20 A (not more than 1 AC scan cycle) max. 2 mA S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 120/230 VAC 47 Hz to 63 Hz S S Permitted frequency range Total current of the outputs (per group) Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C max. 4 A max. 2 A S S S At signal "0" (leakage current) Output delay (for resistive load) From "0" to "1" From "1" to "0" Not more than 1 AC scan cycle Not more than 1 AC scan cycle 10 mA max. 60 V max. size 5 according to NEMA max. 50 W S Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 2 A Isolation S S Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Yes Yes 4 Minimum load current Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of motor starter Lamp load Connecting two outputs in parallel Permitted potential difference S S Between Minternal and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 230 VAC 500 VAC 1500 VAC S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible Insulation tested with Current consumption Triggering a digital input max. 100 mA max. 2 mA typ. 8.6 W Switch rate S S From the backplane bus From load voltage L1 (without load) S S S 1) 2) For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 15 AC For lamp load max. 10 Hz max. 0.5 Hz Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None Yes Red LED 2) 1 Hz S The load current must not be half-wave Possible errors: - No load voltage - Fuse defective Group error display S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-63 Digital Modules Short-circuit protection of the output Fuse, 8 A/250 V; per group min. 40 A max. 300 ms 8 A fuse/quick-acting 194-1800-0 SP001.1013 217.008 S S S S S www..com Current required for fuse to blow Response time Replacement fuses Wickmann Schurter Littelfuse Fuse carrier S Wickmann 653 07 3.20 Digital Output Module SM 322; DO 32 (6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0) 120 VAC/1.0 A; Order Number 6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0 Characteristics The SM 322; DO 32 120 VAC/1.0 A features the following characteristics: S S S S S S 32 outputs, fused and isolated in groups of 8 1.0 A output current 120 VAC rated load voltage Blown fuse indicator for each group Suitable for AC solenoids, contactors, starters, fractional horsepower motors and indicator lights Group error display 3-64 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 32 120 VAC/1.0 A SF1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SF3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 www..com SF2 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X2 34 SF4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Channel numbers Status display - green Error display - red SF 1L 3L Backplane bus interface SF 1N 2L N 4L 2N N Figure 3-20 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; D0 32 120 VAC/1.0 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-65 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment The following figure shows the assignment of the channels to the addresses. Output byte x Output byte (x + 2) www..com Output byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 3) Figure 3-21 Terminal Assignment of the SM 322; DO 32 120 VAC/1.0 A 3-66 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 32 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D (in millimeters) Weight 80125120 Approx. 500 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 32 120 VAC/1.0 A Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage S S S S S S S At signal "1" min. L1 (- 1.5 V) Output current For signal "1" Rated value Permitted range Permitted current surge (per group) At "0" signal leakage current 1A 10 mA to 1 A 10 A (for 2 AC scan cycles) max. 3 mA S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L1 120 VAC 47 Hz to 63 Hz S S S S S Output delay (for resistive load) At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" 3 ms 1/2 AC scan cycle Non-zero cross switch max. size 4 according to NEMA max. 25 W Permitted frequency range Total current of the outputs (per group) Horizontal configuration Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential difference max. 3 A max. 4 A Zero cross inhibit voltage Size of motor starter Lamp load Connecting two outputs in parallel Isolation Yes Yes 8 S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible S S Between Minternal and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 120 VAC 250 VAC 1500 VAC Actuation of digital input Switch rate S S S For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 15 AC For lamp load max. 10 Hz max. 0.5 Hz Insulation tested with Current consumption S S 1 Hz No From the backplane bus From load voltage L1 (without load) max. 100 mA max. 275 mA typ. max. 25 W Short-circuit protection of the output Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel No Yes Red LED (SF) S Group error display S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-67 Digital Modules 3.21 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 16 Rel. 120 VAC; (6ES7 322-1HH00-0AA0) Order Number 6ES7 322-1HH00-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The SM 322; DO 16 S S S REL. 120 VAC features the following characteristics: 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 Load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 120 VAC Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights. Behavior upon Power down of the Supply Voltage Note When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for about 200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the user program. 3-68 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 16 Rel. 120 VAC www..com M Backplane bus interface L+ N 24 V M M N Channel number Status LEDs - green Figure 3-22 Module View and Block Diagram of SM 322; DO 16 REL. 120 VAC S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-69 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 Rel. 120 VAC Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None Approx. 250 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 16 Data for Selecting an Actuator Continuous thermal current max. 2 A 10 mA S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Minimum load current Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts Voltage, Currents, Potentials 24 VDC max. 8 A 24 VDC Yes Yes 8 60 VDC 120 VDC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 1.5 A 1.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A Power supply voltage of the relay L + Total current of the outputs (per group) Isolation S For resistive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.1 mill 0.2 mill 1.0 mill 0.2 mill 0.6 mill 1.5 mill 1.5 mill 1.0 mill 1.5 mill 2.0 mill S S Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Permitted potential differences: S S S Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 75 VDC 60 VAC 120 VAC S For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.05 mill 0.1 mill 0.5 mill 0.1 mill 0.3 mill 1 mill 1 mill 0.7 mill 1.0 mill 1.5 mill 250 VAC 24 VDC 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 1.5 A 1.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A Insulation tested with S S S S S Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 500 VDC 1500 VAC 60 VDC 120 VDC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC 1500 VAC Size of the motor starter max. 100 mA max. 250 mA typ. 4.5 W Lamp load Current consumption From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+ max. size 5 according to NEMA max. 50 W Power dissipation of the module You will achieve a longer service life of the contacts with an external suppressor circuit 3-70 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Connecting two outputs in parallel Switch rate Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance S S S S Mechanical For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC/15 AC For lamp load max. 10 Hz 1 Hz max. 0.5 Hz Triggering a digital input 1 Hz www..com 3.22 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 (6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0) Rel. 230 VAC; Order Number 6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0 Characteristics The SM 322; DO 8 S S S REL. 230 VAC features the following characteristics: 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 2 Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights. Behavior upon Power down of the Supply Voltage Note Applicable only to the SM 322; DO 8 REL. 230 VAC, product version 1: When the power supply is switched off, the capacitor still stores energy for about 200 ms. The relay can therefore still be driven briefly within this time by the user program. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-71 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC U www..com M Backplane bus interface 24 V U M M Channel number Status LEDs - green Figure 3-23 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 REL. 230 VAC 3-72 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 Rel. 230 VAC Data for Selecting an Actuator Continuous thermal current Minimum load current max. 3 A 5 mA With circuit-breaker of characteristic B for: cos f 1.0: With Diazed 8 A fuse:1000 A 600 A cos f 0.5 to 0.7: 900 A Approx. 190 Data for Specific Module Short-circuit proof according to IEC 947-5-1 2) Number of outputs Length of cable www..com 8 S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts Voltage, Currents, Potentials Power supply voltage of the relay L + Total current of the outputs (per group) Isolation 24 VDC max. 4 A S For resistive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.7 million 1.6 million 4 million 1.6 million 1.6 million 1.6 million 1.2 million 0.5 million 2) 0.7 million 2) 1.5 million 2) 0.5 million 2) 0.7 million 2) 1.5 million 24 VDC Yes Yes 2 S S S S S S S S S S Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of 60 VDC 120 VDC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC Permitted potential differences: Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 75 VDC 60 VAC 230 VAC 230 VAC 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 2.0 A 2.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A S 400 VAC For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.3 million 0.5 million 1.0 million 0.5 million 0.3 million 2) 1 million 1 million 0.2 million 0.7 million 1 million 2.0 million 0.3 million 2) 0.7 million 2) 2 million 2) Insulation tested with Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 500 VDC 1500 VAC 24 VDC 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 1.5 A 1.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.7 A 0.5 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 1500 VAC 60 VDC 120 VDC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC Current consumption From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+ max. 40 mA max. 160 mA typ. 3.5 W Contact protection (internal) 230 VAC Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None Varistor SIOV-CU4032 K275 G An external protection circuit will enhance the service life of the contacts. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-73 Digital Modules Data for Selecting an Actuator, continued Lamp load 1) max. 50 W Power No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 25000 10000 Connecting two outputs in parallel S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible Triggering a digital input Switch rate Lamp load (230 VAC) 2) Energy-saving lamps/fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast2) Fluorescent lamps, www..com conventionally compensated 2) Fluorescent lamps, non-compensated 2) 1000 W 1500 W 10 58W 25000 S S S S Mechanical For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC/15 AC For lamp load max. 10 Hz max. 2 Hz max. 0.5 Hz 1 58 W 25000 10 58W 25000 max. 2 Hz 1) 2) Product status 1 Product status 2 or later 3.23 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A; (6ES7 322-1HF10/-1HF80-0AA0) Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0 Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" 6ES7 322-1HF80-0AA0 Characteristics The SM 322; DO 8 S S S Rel. 230 VAC/5 A features the following characteristics: 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 48 VAC to 230 VAC Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights. 3-74 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Measures with Switching Currents > 3 A Note To keep the additional temperature rise of the module near the connectors as low as possible, you must select a cable cross-section of 1.5 mm2 for connecting cables with switching currents > 3 A. www..com Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A L+ L+ L+ L+ M L+ M L+ 1) Backplane bus interface 24 V M M 1) L+ L+ ^ 1) M L+ M L+ M M M M Channel number Status LEDs -green 1) Connection possibility for contact supply I aggregate current v8 A for Ta v30 degrees I aggregate current v5 A at Ta v60 degrees Figure 3-24 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-75 Digital Modules Operation with Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage When using relay output module 322-1HF10 with safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account: If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more than UC 120 V. With operation at voltages greater than UC 120 V, the creepages and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC requirements for safe electrical isolation. www..com If one of the two horizontally adjacent terminals is operated with a safe electrical extralow voltage, the adjacent terminal must be operated at not more than UC 120 V. Figure 3-25 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 Isolation Rel. 230 VAC/5 A S S Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels In groups of Yes Yes 1 Approx. 320 g Data for Specific Module Permitted potential differences: Number of outputs Length of cable 8 S S S S S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 75 VDC / 60 VAC 250 VAC Voltage, Currents, Potentials Power supply voltage of the relay L + Total current of the outputs (per group) 24 VDC 500 VAC Insulation tested with Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 500 VDC S S Horizontal configuration Up to 30 oC Up to 60 oC Vertical configuration Up to 40 oC max. 8 A max. 5 A max. 5 A S S 1500 VAC 2000 VAC 3-76 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Current consumption Data for Selecting an Actuator, continued max. 40 mA max. 125 mA typ. 4.2 W Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts S S From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+ S Power dissipation of the module For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1 13 DC/15 AC Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.3 million 0.5 million 1 million 0.5 million 1 million 0.5 mill. 0.5 million 1 million 0.3 million 1 million 0.2 million 0.3 million 0.7 million 2.0 million 0.1 million 0.3 million 0.7 million 2.0 million 30 mill. Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupt Diagnostic functions www..com Green LEDs per channel None None Data for Selecting an Actuator Continuous thermal current Minimum load current Short-circuit current according to IEC 947-5-1 max. 8 A 5 mA With circuit-breaker of characteristic B for: cos f 1.0: 600 A cos f 1.0: 900 A With Diazed 8 A fuse: 1000 A Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts 120 VAC 60 VAC 60 VDC 24 VDC 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.3 A 0.2 A 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.0 A 1.5 A 3.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 3.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 120 VDC 48 VAC S For resistive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.1 million 0.3 million 0.7 million 4.0 million 4 million 1.6 mill. 0.1 million 1.6 million 0.1 million 1.2 million 0.1 million 0.3 million 0.5 million 0.7 million 1.5 million 0.1 million 0.3 million 0.5 million 0.7 million 1.5 million 230 VAC 24 VDC 8.0 A 4.0 A 2.0 A 0.5 A 0.5 A 0.2 A 8.0 A 2.0 A 8.0 A 2.0 A 8.0 A 4.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A 8.0 A 4.0 A 2.0 A 1.0 A 0.5 A Aux. contactors Size 0 (3TH28) An external protection circuit will enhance the service life of the contacts. Power No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 25000 10000 25000 60 VDC 120 VDC 48 VAC 60 VAC 120 VAC Lamp load (230 VAC) Energy-saving lamps/fluorescent lamps with electronic ballast Fluorescent lamps, conventionally compensated Fluorescent lamps, non-compensated 1000 W 1500 W 10 58 W 1 58 W 10 58 W 25000 25000 230 VAC S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-77 Digital Modules Data for Selecting an Actuator, continued Contact protection (internal) none Connecting two outputs in parallel S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible not possible Possible Triggering a digital input Switch rate S S www..com S S Mechanical For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC/15 AC For lamp load max. 10 Hz max. 2 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 2 Hz 3.24 Relay Output Module SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A; (6ES7 322-1HF20-0AA0) Order Number 6ES7 322-1HF20-0AA0 Characteristics The SM 322; DO 8 S S S S Rel. 230 VAC/5 A features the following characteristics: 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 1 Rated load voltage 24 VDC to 120 VDC, 24 VAC to 230 VAC Suitable for AC/DC solenoid valves, contactors, motor starters, fractional h.p. motors and indicator lights. RC quenching element can be inserted for protection of the contacts by means of jumper SJ 3-78 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Protection of Contacts against Overvoltages You protect the contacts against overvoltages by inserting jumpers (SJ) on the module between terminals 3 and 4, 7 and 8, 12 and 13 etc. (refer to Figure 3-26). Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A 1L+ www..com 1L+ 1L+ 1M 2L+ 2L+ 2L+ SJ SJ 1L+ 1M SJ 2M 2L+ SJ 24V Backplane bus interface 1M 2M 24V 1L+ 2L+ SJ SJ 1L+ SJ 1M 2M 2L+ SJ 1M 1M Channel number Status LEDs -green 1M 2M 2M 2M Figure 3-26 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 322; DO 8 Rel. 230 VAC/5 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-79 Digital Modules Operation with Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage When using relay output module 322-1HF20 with safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, take the following special characteristic into account: If a terminal is operated with a safe and electrically isolated extra-low voltage, the horizontally adjacent terminal must be operated at a rated voltage of not more than UC 120 V. With operation at voltages greater than UC 120 V, the creepages and clearances of the 40-pin front connector do not meet the SIMATIC requirements for safe electrical isolation. www..com If one of the two horizontally adjacent terminals is operated with a safe electrical extralow voltage, the adjacent terminal must be operated at not more than UC 120 V. Figure 3-27 Special Characteristic for Operation with a Safe Electrical Extra-Low Voltage Technical Specifications of the SM 322; DO 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 Isolation Rel. 230 VAC/5 A S S S Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the relays Between the channels In groups of Yes Yes Yes 1 Approx. 320 g Data for Specific Module Number of outputs Length of cable 8 S S Permitted potential differences: max. 600 m max. 1000 m Unshielded Shielded S S S Voltage, Currents, Potentials Power supply voltage of the relay L + 24 VDC Yes Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 75 VDC / 60 VAC 250 VAC S S S Reverse polarity protection Total current of the outputs (per group) Horizontal configuration Up to 60 oC Vertical configuration Up to 40 oC max. 5 A max. 5 A 500 VAC 3-80 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Insulation tested with S 500 VDC For inductive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.1 million 0.25 million 0.5 million 0.1 million 0.25 million 0.5 million S S S S S Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays Between Minternal and supply voltage of the relays and the outputs Between the outputs of different groups 1500 VAC 24 VDC 5.0 A 2.5 A 1A 5.0 A 2.5 A 1A 1500 VAC 230 VAC Current consumption From the backplane bus From supply voltage L+ max. 45 mA max. 160 mA typ. 3.2 W www..com You can attain greater service life by connecting an RC quenching element (by inserting an SJ jumper) or with external protective circuitry Size of motor starter Lamp load Contact protection (internal) max. size 5 according to NEMA max. 50 W RC quenching element 330 , 0.1 F Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupt Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None Connecting two outputs in parallel Data for Selecting an Actuator Continuous thermal current Minimum load current Leakage current max. 5 A 10 mA1) 11.5 mA2) S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs with identical load voltage) Not possible Possible Triggering a digital input Switch rate Switching capacity and lifetime of the contacts S For resistive load Voltage Current No. of switching cyc. (typ.) 0.2 million 0.4 million 0.9 million 0.2 million 0.4 million 0.9 million 24 VDC 5.0 A 2.5 A 1A 5.0 A 2.5 A 1A S S S S Mechanical For resistive load For inductive load For lamp load max. 10 Hz max. 2 Hz max. 0.5 Hz max. 2 Hz 230 VAC 1) 2) Without inserted "SJ" jumper. For AC load voltage and inserted "SJ" jumper. (Without "SJ" jumper inserted there is a leakage current) Note Due to the leakage current of the RC quenching element, wrong signal states might occur when an IEC Type 1 input is connected (remove SJ jumper) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-81 Digital Modules 3.25 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0) Order Number 6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 S S S S S S 24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics: 16 inputs, isolated in groups of 16 16 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 VDC rated input voltage 24 VDC rated load voltage Inputs suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire BEROs (proximity switches). Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Using the Module with High-Speed Counters Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters: Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a "1" signal for approximately 50 ms "1" signal for reasons associated with the circuitry. 3-82 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0,5 A 2L+ 24V M www..com Backplane bus interface M 2M 3L+ 24V 1M 24V Channel number Status LEDs -green M 3M Figure 3-28 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A Terminal Assignment The figure below shows the assignment of the channels to the input and output addresses. Inputs Input byte x Outputs Output byte x Input byte (x + 1) Output byte (x + 1) Figure 3-29 Terminal assignment of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-83 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 DC 24 V/0.5 A Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None Approx. 260 g Data for Specific Module Number of inputs Number of outputs www..com Length of cable 16 16 Input voltage Data for Selecting a Sensor S S Unshielded Shielded max. 600 m max. 1000 m S S S S S S Rated value For signal "1" For signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V - 30 to + 5 V Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously 24 VDC Input current At signal "1" typ. 7 mA Input delay At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 1131, Type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C 16 16 8 Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs S Permitted bias current Total current of the outputs (per group) S S S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Up to 60 _C Vertical configuration Up to 40 _C max. 2 A max. 4 A max. 3 A Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Inputs in groups of Outputs in groups of Permitted potential difference Yes Yes 16 8 S Between the different circuits 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC Insulation tested with Current consumption S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (no load) max. 80 mA max. 80 mA typ. 6.5 W Power dissipation of the module 3-84 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage Connecting two outputs in parallel S S S www..com At signal "1" min. L + (- 0.8 V) S S For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible Output current At signal "1" Rated value Permitted range At signal "0" (leakage current) 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA Triggering a digital input Switch rate S S S For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC For lamp load max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz Output delay (for resistive load) S S At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W max. 10 Hz typ. L + (- 53 V) Yes, electronic typ. 1 A Load resistor range Lamp load Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output S Threshold on S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-85 Digital Modules 3.26 Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A; (6ES7 323-1BHx1-0AA0) Order Number: "Standard Module" 6ES7 323-1BH01-0AA0 Order Number: "SIMATIC Outdoor Module" www..com 6ES7 323-8BH81-0AA0 Characteristics The SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 S S S S S S 24 VDC/0.5 A features the following characteristics: 8 inputs, isolated in groups of 8 8 outputs, isolated in groups of 8 24 VDC rated input voltage 24 VDC rated load voltage Inputs suitable for switches and two/three/four-wire BEROs (proximity switches). Outputs suitable for solenoid valves, DC contactors and indicator lights Using the Module with High-Speed Counters Please take note of the following information on the use of the module in connection with high-speed counters: Note When connecting the 24 V power supply via a mechanical contact, the outputs of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A carry a "1" signal for approximately 50 ms for reasons associated with the circuitry. 3-86 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Digital Modules Terminal Assignment and Block Diagram of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A www..com 1M 24V 2L+ M 24V Backplane bus interface 2M Channel number Status LEDs - green Figure 3-30 Module View and Block Diagram of Digital Input/Output Module SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 3-87 Digital Modules Technical Specifications of the SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 Input voltage 24 VDC/0.5 A Data for Selecting a Sensor Approx. 200 g Data for Specific Module S S S S S S Rated value For signal "1" For signal "0" 24 VDC 13 to 30 V - 30 to 5 V Number of inputs Number of outputs www..com Length of cable 8 8 Input current At signal "1" typ. 7 mA Input delay max. 600 m max. 1000 m At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" 1.2 to 4.8 ms 1.2 to 4.8 ms According to IEC 1131, Type 1 Possible max. 1.5 mA S S Unshielded Shielded Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ Number of inputs that can be triggered simultaneously 24 VDC Input characteristic curve Connection of Two-Wire BEROs S S S 8 8 Permitted bias current Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Vertical configuration Up to 60 _C Data for Selecting an Actuator Output voltage S S At signal "1" min. L + (- 0.8 V) Output current At signal "1" Rated value max. 4 A max. 4 A Permitted range 0.5 A 5 mA to 0.6 A max. 0.5 mA Total current of the outputs (per group) S S Horizontal configuration Up to 40 _C Vertical configuration Up to 60 _C S S S At signal "0" (leakage current) Isolation Output delay (for resistive load) Yes Yes 8 8 At "0" to "1" At "1" to "0" max. 100 ms max. 500 ms 48 W to 4 kW max. 5 W S S Between channels and backplane bus Between the channels Inputs in groups of Outputs in groups of Load resistor range Lamp load Connecting two outputs in parallel Permitted potential difference S S 75 VDC / 60 VAC Between the different circuits For redundant triggering of a load To increase performance Possible (only outputs of the same group) Not possible Possible S 500 VDC Insulation tested with Current consumption Triggering a digital input Switch rate S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (no load) max. 40 mA max. 40 mA typ. 3.5 W S S S For resistive load For inductive load according to IEC 947-5-1, 13 DC For lamp load max. 100 Hz max. 0.5 Hz Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Green LEDs per channel None None max. 10 Hz typ. L + (- 53 V) Yes, electronic typ. 1 A Limit (internal) of the inductive circuit interruption voltage up Short-circuit protection of the output S Threshold on 3-88 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4 Changes and improvements since the previous version of the reference manual www..com This chapter describes all new analog modules. Furthermore, two new overview sections will make it easier for you to access the information: S the "Module Overview" section shows you the modules that are available, together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find the module suitable for your task. the section entitled "Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module" provides the answer to the question "What must I do in succession to commission the module quickly and successfully? S Structure of the chapter The present chapter is broken down into the following subjects: 1. Overview containing the modules that are available here and a description 2. Information that is generally available - in other words, affects all analog modules (such as parameter assignment and diagnostics) 3. Information specific to the different modules (for example, characteristics, diagram of connections and block diagram, technical specifications and special features of the module): a) for analog input modules b) for analog output modules c) for analog input/output modules STEP 7 blocks for analog functions You can use the blocks FC 105 "SCALE" (Scale Values) and FC 106 "UNSCALE" (Unscale Values) for reading and outputting analog values in STEP 7. You will find the FCs in the standard library of STEP 7 in the subdirectory called "TI-S7-Converting Blocks" (for a description refer to the STEP 7 online Help for the FCs). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-1 Analog Modules Additional information Appendix A describes the structure of the parameter sets (data records 0,1 and 128) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to modify the parameters of the modules in the STEP 7 user program. Appendix B describes the structure of the diagnostic data (data records 0 and 1) in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostic data of the modules in the STEP 7 user program. In this chapter www..com Section 4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 4.6 4.7 4.8 4.9 4.10 4.11 4.12 4.13 4.14 4.15 4.16 4.17 4.18 4.19 4.20 4.21 4.22 Module Overview Contents Page 4-4 4-7 4-8 4-27 4-30 4-34 4-38 4-43 4-48 4-49 4-51 4-55 4-62 4-63 4-66 4-68 4-71 12 Bit; 4-74 4-85 4-94 4-105 4-116 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module Analog Value Representation Setting the Type of Measurement and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input Channels Behavior of Analog Modules Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules Assigning Parameters to Analog Modules Connecting Sensors/Transmitters to Analog Inputs Connecting Voltage Sensors Connecting Current Sensors Connecting Resistance-TypeThermometers and Resistors Connecting Thermocouples Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Outputs Connecting Loads/Actuators to Voltage Outputs Connecting Loads/Actuators to Current Outputs Diagnostics of Analog Modules Analog Module Interrupts Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 (6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit; (6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit; (6ES7 331-7KBx2-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 (6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0) Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 (6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0) RTD TC 4-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Section 4.23 4.24 4.25 4.26 4.27 www..com Contents Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 (6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0) 12 Bit; Page 4-128 4-134 4-140 4-145 4-151 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit; (6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0) Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 (6ES7 332-7ND00-0AB0) 16 Bit; Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit; (6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0) Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit; (6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-3 Analog Modules 4.1 Module Overview Introduction The following tables summarize the most important characteristics of the analog modules. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task. Table 4-1 www..com Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit (-7KF02-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit (-7NF00-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit (-7KBx2-) 2 inputs in 1 channel group SM 331; AI 8 RTD (-7PF00-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups SM 331; AI 8 TC (-7PF10-) 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Characteristics Number of inputs Resolution adjustable for adjustable for adjustable for adjustable for adjustable for each channel each channel each channel each channel each channel group: group: group: group: group: S 9 bits + sign S 15 bits + sign S 9 bits + sign S 15 bits + sign S 15 bits + sign S 12 bits + sign S 12 bits + sign S 14 bits + sign Measuring Method S 14 bits + sign adjustable for adjustable for adjustable for adjustable for adjustable for each channel each channel each channel each channel each channel group: group: group: group: group: S Voltage S Voltage S Voltage S Resistors S Temperature S Current S Current S Current S Temperature S Resistors S Resistors S Temperature Selection of measuring range Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic Interrupt Limit value monitoring Arbitrary, per channel group Yes Adjustable Adjustable for 2 channels Adjustable No S Temperature Arbitrary, per channel group Yes Adjustable Adjustable for 1 channel Adjustable No Arbitrary, per channel group Yes Adjustable Adjustable for 2 channels Adjustable No Arbitrary, per channel group Yes Adjustable Adjustable for 8 channels Adjustable Adjustable Arbitrary, per channel group Yes Adjustable Adjustable for 8 channels Adjustable Adjustable Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Hardware interrupt at end of cycle 4-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Table 4-1 Analog Input Modules: Characteristics at a Glance, continued Module SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit (-7KF02-) Galvanic isolation to: SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit (-7NF00-) Galvanic isolation to: SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit (-7KBx2-) Galvanic isolation to: SM 331; AI 8 RTD (-7PF00-) Galvanic isolation to: SM 331; AI 8 TC (-7PF10-) Galvanic isolation to: Characteristics Potential relationships S CPU S Load www..com S CPU S CPU S Load voltage (not for 2-DMU) S CPU S CPU voltage (not for 2-DMU) Permitted potential difference between the inputs (ECM) Special Features 2-DMU 2.5 VDC 50 VDC 2.5 VDC 120 VAC 120 VAC - Two-wire transmitter - - - Table 4-2 Analog Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit (-5HD01-) 4 outputs in 4 channel groups 12 bits Channel by channel: SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit (-5HB01-) 2 output in 2 channels groups 12 bits Channel by channel: SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit (-7ND00-) 4 outputs in 4 channel groups 16 bits Channel by channel: Characteristics Number of outputs Resolution Output type S Voltage S Current Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic Interrupt Substitute value output Potential relationships Yes Adjustable Adjustable Galvanic isolation to: S Voltage S Current Yes Adjustable Adjustable Galvanic isolation to: S Voltage S Current Yes Adjustable Adjustable Galvanic isolation between: S CPU S of the load voltage S CPU S of the load voltage S S S S - CPU and channel the channels output and L+, M CPU and L+, M Special features - - S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-5 Analog Modules Table 4-3 Analog Input/Output Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 (-0CE01-) 8/8 Bit SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit (-0KE00-) 4 inputs in 2 channel groups 2 outputs in 1 channel group 12 bits + sign Adjustable per channel group: Characteristics Number of inputs 4 inputs in 1 channel group 2 outputs in 1 channel group 8 bits Adjustable per channel group: Number of outputs Resolution Measuring method www..com S Voltage S Current Output type Per channel: S Voltage S Resistors S Temperature Per channel: S Voltage S Current Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic interrupt Limit value monitoring Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Substitute value output Potential relationships No No No No No No S Voltage No No No No No No Galvanic isolation to: S Non-isolated to CPU S Galvanic isolation to load voltage Not parameterizable, setting of measurement and output type by means of wiring S CPU S of the load voltage - Special features 4-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.2 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Module Introduction The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission analog modules successfully. The sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps sooner or later (for example, assign parameters to the module) or install, commission etc. other modules in between times. www..com Sequence of steps Table 4-4 Sequence of Steps from Choosing to Commissioning the Analog Module Step 1. 2. Procedure Select the module With some analog input modules: set the measuring method and measuring range by means of the measuring range module Install the module in the SIMATIC S7 network Refer To... Section 4.1 and specific module section from Section 4.18 Section 4.4 3. "Installation" section in the manual for the programmable logic controller being used: S S7-300, M7-300, S7-400 or M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation or S ET 200M Distributed I/O Device 4. 5. 6. Assign parameters to module Connect measuring sensor or loads to module Commission configuration Section 4.7 Sections 4.8 to 4.15 "Commissioning" section in the manual for the programmable logic controller being used: S S7-300, M7-300, S7-400 or M7-400 Programmable Controller, Hardware and Installation or S ET 200M Distributed I/O Device 7. If commissioning was not successful, diagnose configuration Section 4.16 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-7 Analog Modules 4.3 Analog Value Representation Introduction This section describes the analog values for all the measuring ranges and output ranges which you can use with the analog modules. Converting analog values www..com The CPU processes the analog values in binary form only. Analog input modules convert the analog process signal into digital form. Analog output modules convert the digital output value into an analog signal. Analog value representation with 16-bit resolution The digitized analog value is the same for both input and output values having the same nominal range. The analog values are represented as a fixed-point number in two's complement. The resulting assignment is as follows: Bit Value of bits 15 215 14 214 13 213 12 212 11 211 10 210 9 29 8 28 7 27 6 26 5 25 4 24 3 23 2 22 1 21 0 20 Sign The sign of the analog value is always contained in bit number 15: S S "0" ) "1" * Resolution less than 16 bits If the resolution of an analog module has fewer than 16 bits, the analog value is stored left-justified on the module. The lower-order bit positions not used are padded with zeros ("0"). 4-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Example In the following example you can see how the positions not padded with "0" are written for low resolution. Table 4-5 Example: Bit Pattern of a 16-Bit and a 13-Bit Analog Value Analog Value 15 0 0 14 1 1 13 0 0 12 0 0 11 0 0 10 1 1 9 1 1 8 0 0 7 0 0 6 1 1 5 1 1 4 1 1 3 0 0 2 0 0 1 1 0 0 1 0 Resolution Bit 16-bit analog value www..com 13-bit analog value 4.3.1 Analog Value Representation for Analog Input Channels Introduction The tables in this chapter contain the measured value representations for the various measuring ranges of the analog input modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding measuring ranges. Notes for readers of the tables Tables 4-7 to 4-8 contain the binary representation of the measured values. Since the binary representation of the measured values is always the same, starting at 4-9 these tables only contain the measured values and the units. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-9 Analog Modules Measured value resolution The resolution of the analog values can vary depending upon the analog module and its parameterization. With resolutions < 15 bit all bits identified with "x" will be set to "0". Note: This resolution does not apply to temperature values. The transformed temperature values are the result of a conversion within the analog module (see tables 4-15 through 4-29). Table 4-6 www..com Possible Resolutions of the Analog Values Units decimal 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 hexadecimal 80H 40H 20H 10H 8H 4H 2H 1H High Byte VZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 VZ 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Analog value Low Byte 1xxxxxxx 01xxxxxx 001xxxxx 0001xxxx 00001xxx 000001xx 0000001x 00000001 Resolution in bits (+sign) 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 4-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Binary representation of the input ranges The input ranges shown in Tables 4-7 to 4-8 are defined in two's complement representation: Table 4-7 Units Bipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % u118.515 117.589 u100.004 100.000 0.003617 0.000 - 0.003617 - 100.000 Data Word 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Range 32767 www..com 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Overflow Overrange 32511 27649 27648 1 0 -1 - 27648 - 27649 - 32512 - 32768 Rated range v- 100.004 1 - 117.593 1 v- 117.596 1 Underrange Underflow Table 4-8 Units Unipolar Input Ranges Measured Value in % w118.515 117.589 w100.004 100.000 0.003617 0.000 - 0.003617 - 17.593 v- 17.596 Data Word 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Range 32767 32511 27649 27648 1 0 -1 - 4864 - 32768 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 Overflow Overrange Rated range Underrange Underflow S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-11 Analog Modules Analog value representation in voltage measuring ranges Table 4-9 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 10 V to 1 V System Dec. 118.515 % 32767 117.593 % 32512 117.589 % 32511 www..com Voltage Measuring Range Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 - 11.851 V - 5.926 V - 2.963 V - 1.185 V - 11.759 V - 5.879 V - 2.940 V - 1.176 V Underflow - 7.5 V - 10 V - 3.75 V -5V - 1.875 V - 2.5 V - 0.75 V -1V Underrange 10 V 7.5 V 361.7 mV 0V 5V 3.75 V 180.8 mV 0V 2.5 V 1.875 V 90.4 mV 0V 1V 0.75 V 36.17 mV 0V Rated range 11.759 V 5.879 V 2.940 V 1.176 V Overrange 10 V 11.851 V 5V 5.926 V 2.5 V 2.963 V 1V 1.185 V Overflow 27649 100.000 % 27648 75.000 % 20736 0.003617 % 1 0% 0 -1 - 75.000 % - 20736 - 100.000 % - 27648 - 27649 - 117.593 % - 32512 - 117.596 % - 32513 - 118.519 % - 32768 4-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Table 4-10 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 500 mV to 80 mV System Dec. 118.515 % 117.593 % 117.589 % 32767 32512 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 587.9 mV 294.0 mV 94.1 mV Overrange 500 mV 592.6 mV Voltage Measuring Range 250 mV 296.3 mV 80 mV 94.8 mV Overflow 32511 7EFF 27649 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 100.000 % www..com 27648 20763 1 0 500 mV 375 mV 18.08 mV 0 mV 250 mV 187.5 mV 9.04 mV 0 mV 80 mV 60 mV 2.89 mV 0 mV Rated range 75.00 % 0.003617 % 0% - 1 FFFF - 75.00 % - 100.000 % - 20763 - 27648 - 27649 - 117.593 % - 117.596 % - 118.519 % - 32512 - 32513 - 32768 AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 - 592.6 mV - 296.3 mV - 94.8 mV - 587.9 mV - 294.0 mV - 94.1 mV Underflow - 375 mV - 187.5 mV - 500 mV - 250 mV - 60 mV - 80 mV Underrange Table 4-11 Analog Value Representation in Voltage Measuring Ranges 1 to 5 V and 0 to 10 V System Dec. 118.515 % 32767 117.593 % 32512 117.589 % 32511 27649 100.000 % 27648 75 % 20736 0.003617 % 1 0% 0 -1 - 17.593 % - 4864 - 4865 v-17.596 % - 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF ED00 ECFF 8000 0.296 V No negative values possible 5V 3.75 V 1 V + 144.7 mV 1V 10 V 7.5 V 0 V + 361.7 mV 0V Underrange Rated range 5.704 V 11.759 V Overrange 1 to 5 V 5.741 V Voltage Measuring Range 0 to 10 V 11.852 V Overflow Underflow S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-13 Analog Modules Analog value representation in current measuring ranges Table 4-12 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 20 mA to 3.2 mA System Dec. 118.515 % 32767 117.593 % 32512 117.589 % 32511 www..com Current Measuring Range Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 -23.70 mA -11.85 mA -3.79 mA -23.52 mA -11.76 mA -3.76 mA Underflow - 15 mA -20 mA - 7.5 mA -10 mA - 2.4 mA -3.2 mA Underrange 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 10 mA 7.5 mA 361.7 nA 0 mA 3.2 mA 2.4 mA 115.7 nA 0 mA Rated range 23.52 mA 11.76 mA 3.76 mA Overrange 20 mA 23.70 mA 10 mA 11.85 mA 3.2 mA 3.79 mA Overflow 27649 100.000 % 27648 75 % 20736 0.003617 % 1 0% 0 -1 - 75 % -5100 - 100.000 % - 27648 - 27649 - 117.593 % - 32512 - 117.596 % - 32513 - 118.519 % - 32768 Table 4-13 Analog Value Representation in Current Measuring Ranges 0 to 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA System Dec. 118.515 % 32767 117.593 % 32512 117.589 % 32511 27649 100.000 % 27648 75 % 20736 0.003617 % 1 0% 0 -1 - 17.593 % - 4864 - 4865 v -17.596 % - 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF ED00 ECFF 8000 - 3.52 mA 1.185 mA Underflow 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 20 mA 15 mA 4 mA + 578.7 nA 4 mA Underrange Rated range 23.52 mA 22.81 mA Overrange 0 to 20 mA 23.70 mA Current Measuring Range 4 to 20 mA 22.96 mA Overflow 4-14 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Analog value representation for resistance-type transmitters Table 4-14 Analog Value Representation for Resistance-Type Transmitters 10 kW and from 150 to 600 W System Dec. 118.515 % 32767 117.593 % 32512 117.589 % 32511 www..com Resistance-Type Transmitter Range Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 10 kW 7.5 kW 361.7 mW 0W 150 W 112.5 W 5.43 mW 0W 300 W 225 W 10.85 mW 0W 600 W 450 W 21.70 mW 0W Underrange (negative values physically not possible) 11.759 kW 176.38 W 10 kW 11.852 kW 150 W 177.77W 300 W 355.54 W 600 W 711.09 W Overflow 352.77 W 705.53 W Overrange 27649 100.000 % 27648 75 % 20736 0.003617 % 1 0% 0 Rated range Analog value representation for RTD resistance temperature detectors Pt x00 standard Table 4-15 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors PT 100, 200, 500,1000 Units dec. 32767 10000 : 8501 8500 : -2000 -2001 : -2430 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 2710H : 2135H 2134H : F830H F82FH : F682H 8000H Pt x00 standard in 5 5F (1 digit = 0.1 5F) > 1832.0 1832.0 : 1562.1 1562.0 : -328.0 -328.1 : -405.4 < - 405.4 Units dec. 32767 18320 : 15621 15620 : -3280 -3281 : -4054 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 4790H : 3D05H 3D04H : F330H F32FH : F02AH 8000H Pt x00 standard in K (1 digit = 0.1 K) > 1273.2 1273.2 : 1123.3 1123.2 : 73.2 73.1 : 30.2 < 30.2 Units dec. 32767 12732 : 11233 11232 : 732 731 : 302 32768 hex. 7FFFH 31BCH : 2BE1H 2BE0H : 2DCH 2DBH : 12EH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range Pt x00 standard in 5C 5 (1 digit = 0.15C) > 1000.0 1000.0 : 850.1 850.0 : -200.0 -200.1 : -243.0 < - 243.0 Overflow S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-15 Analog Modules Analog value representation for RTD resistance temperature detectors Pt x00 climate Table 4-16 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Pt 100. 200, 500,1000 Units dec. 32767 15500 : 13001 13000 : -12000 -12001 : -14500 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 3C8CH : 32C9H 32C8H : D120H D11FH : C75CH 8000H Pt x00 Klima in 5 5F (1 digit = 0.01 5F) > 311.00 311.00 : 266.01 266.00 : -184.00 -184.01 : -229.00 < - 229.00 Units dec. 32767 31100 : 26601 26600 : -18400 -18401 : -22900 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 797CH : 67E9H 67E8H : B820H B81FH : A68CH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range Pt x00 climate in 5C 5 (1 digit = 0.015C) www..com > 155.00 155.00 : 130.01 130.00 : -120.00 -120.01 : -145.00 < - 145.00 Analog value representation for RTD resistance temperature detectors Ni x00 standard Table 4-17 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 Units dec. 32767 2950 : 2501 2500 : -600 -601 : -1050 -32768 hex. 7FFFH B86H : 9C5H 9C4H : FDA8H FDA7H : FBE6H 8000H Ni x00 standard in 5 5F (1 digit = 0.1 5F) > 563.0 563.0 : 482.1 482.0 : -76.0 -76.1 : -157.0 < -157.0 Units dec. 32767 5630 : 4821 4820 : -760 -761 : -1570 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 15FEH : 12D5H 12D4H : FD08H FD07H : F9DEH 8000H Ni x00 standard in K (1 digit = 0.1 K) > 568.2 568.2 : 523.3 523.2 : 213.2 213.1 : 168.2 < 168.2 Units dec. 32767 5682 : 5233 5232 : 2132 2131 : 1682 32768 hex. 7FFFH 1632H : 1471H 1470H : 854H 853H : 692H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range Ni x00 standard in 5C 5 (1 digit = 0.15C) > 295.0 295.0 : 250.1 250.0 : -60.0 -60.1 : -105.0 < -105.0 Overflow 4-16 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Analog value representation for RTD resistance temperature detectors Ni x00 climate Table 4-18 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Ni 100, 120, 200, 500, 1000 Units dec. 32767 29500 : 25001 25000 : -6000 -6001 : -10500 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 733CH : 61A9H 61A8H : E890H E88FH : D6FCH 8000H Ni x00 climate in 5 5F (1 digit = 0.01 5F) > 325.11 327.66 : 280.01 280.00 : -76.00 -76.01 : -157.00 < - 157.00 Units dec. 32767 32766 : 28001 28000 : -7600 -7601 : -15700 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6D61H 6D60H : E250H E24FH : C2ACH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range Ni x00 climate in 5C 5 (1 digit = 0.015C) www..com > 295.00 295.00 : 250.01 250.00 : -60.00 -60.01 : -105.00 < - 105.00 Analog value representation for RTD resistance temperature detectors Cu 10 standard Table 4-19 Cu 10 standard in 5 5C (1 digit = 0.015C) > 312.0 312.0 : 260.1 260.0 : -200.0 -200.1 : -240.0 < - 240.0 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 Units dec. 32767 3120 : 2601 2600 : -2000 -2001 : -2400 -32768 hex. 7FFFH C30H : A29H A28H : F830H F82FH : F6A0H 8000H Cu 10 standard in 5 5F (1 digit = 0.01 5F) > 593.6 593.6 : 500.1 500.0 : -328.0 -328.1 : -400.0 < - 400.0 Units dec. 32767 5936 : 5001 5000 : -3280 -3281 : -4000 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 1730H : 12D5H 1389H : F330H F32FH : F060H 8000H Cu 10 standard in K (1 digit = 0.01 K) > 585.2 585.2 : 533.3 533.2 : 73.2 73.1 : 33.2 < 33.2 Units dec. 32767 5852 : 5333 5332 : 732 731 : 332 32768 hex. 7FFFH 16DCH : 14D5H 14D4H : 2DCH 2DBH : 14CH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range Overflow S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-17 Analog Modules Analog value representation for RTD resistance temperature detectors Cu 10 climate Table 4-20 Cu 10 climate in 5 5C (1 digit = 0.015C) > 180.00 www..com 180.00 : 150.01 150.00 : -50.00 -50.01 : -60.00 < - 60.00 Analog Value Representation for RTD Resistance Temperature Detectors Cu 10 Units dec. 32767 18000 : 15001 15000 : -5000 -5001 : -6000 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 4650H : 3A99H 3A98H : EC78H EC77H : E890H 8000H Cu 10 climate in 5 5F (1 digit = 0.01 5F) > 325.11 327.66 : 280.01 280.00 : -58.00 -58.01 : -76.00 < - 76.00 Units dec. 32767 32766 : 28001 280.00 : -5800 -5801 : -7600 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6D61AH 6D60H : E958H E957H : E250H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Overflow Range Analog value representation for Thermocouple temperature detectors type B Table 4-21 Type B in 5C > 2070.0 2070.0 : 1821.0 1820.0 : 0.0 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type B Units dec. 32767 20700 : 18210 18200 : 0 hex. 7FFFH 50DCH : 4722H 4718H : 0000H : FB50H 8000H Type B in 5F > 3276.6 3276.6 : 2786.6 2786.5 : -32.0 dec. 32767 32766 : 27866 27865 : -320 Units hex. 7FFFH 7FFEH : 6CDAH 6CD9H : FEC0H : F8D0H 8000H Type B in K > 2343.2 2343.2 : 2094.2 2093.2 : 273.2 dec. 32767 23432 : 20942 20932 : 2732 Units hex. 7FFFH 5B88H : 51CEH 51C4H : 0AACH : 05FCH 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range Overflow : -120.0 < -120.0 : -1200 -32768 : -184.0 < -184.0 : -1840 -32768 : 153.2 < 153.2 : 1532 32768 4-18 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Analog value representation for Thermocouple temperature detectors type E Table 4-22 Type E in 5 5C > 1200.0 1200.0 : 1000.1 www..com 1000.0 : -270.0 < -270.0 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type E Units dec. 32767 12000 : 10001 10000 : -2700 < -2700 hex. 7FFFH 2EE0H : 2711H 2710H : F574H < F574H Type E in 5 5F > 2192.0 2192.0 : 1833.8 1832.0 : -454.0 < -454.0 Units dec. 32767 21920 : 18338 18320 : -4540 < -4540 hex. 7FFFH 55A0H : 47A2H 4790H : EE44H In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e.g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow below ... ... F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... FB70H and outputs 8000H. ... E5D4H and outputs 8000H. Analog value representation for Thermocouple temperature detectors type J Table 4-23 Type J in 5C > 1450.0 1450.0 : 1201.0 1200.0 : -210.0 < -210.0 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type J Units dec. 32767 14500 : 12010 12000 : -2100 < -2100 hex. 7FFFH 38A4H : 2EEAH 2EE0H : F7CCH In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e.g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow below ... ... F31CH and outputs 8000H. ... EA0CH and outputs 8000H. ... FDC8H and outputs 8000H. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-19 Analog Modules Analog value representation for Thermocouple temperature detectors type K Table 4-24 Type K in 5C > 1622.0 1622.0 : 1373.0 www..com 1372.0 : -270.0 < -270.0 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type K Units dec. 32767 16220 : 13730 13720 : -2700 < -2700 hex. 7FFFH 3F5CH : 35A2H 3598H : F574H < F574H Type K in 5F > 2951.6 2951.6 : 2503.4 2501.6 : -454.0 < -454.0 dec. 32767 29516 : 25034 25061 : -4540 < -4540 Units hex. 7FFFH 734CH : 61CAH 61B8H : EE44H In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e.g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow below ... ... F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... FB70H and outputs 8000H. Analog value representation for Thermocouple temperature detectors type L Table 4-25 Type L in 5C > 1150.0 1150.0 : 901.0 900.0 : -200.0 < -200.0 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type L Units dec. 32767 11500 : 9010 9000 : -2000 < -2000 hex. 7FFFH 2CECH : 2332H 2328H : F830H < F830H Type L in 5F > 2102.0 2102.0 : 1653.8 1652.0 : -328.0 < -328.0 dec. 32767 21020 : 16538 16520 : -3280 < -3280 Units hex. 7FFFH 521CH : 409AH 4088H : F330H In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e.g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow below ... ... F380H and outputs 8000H. ... EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... FE2CH and outputs 8000H. 4-20 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Analog value representation for Thermocouple temperature detectors type N Table 4-26 Type N in 5C > 1550.0 1550.0 : 1300.1 www..com 1300.0 : -270.0 < -270.0 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type N Units dec. 32767 15500 : 13001 13000 : -2700 < -2700 hex. 7FFFH 3C8CH : 32C9H 32C8H : F574H < F574H Type N in 5F > 2822.0 2822.0 : 2373.8 2372.0 : -454.0 < -454.0 dec. 32767 28220 : 23738 23720 : -4540 < -4540 Units hex. 7FFFH 6E3CH : 5CBAH 5CA8H : EE44H In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e.g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow below ... ... F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... FB70H and outputs 8000H. Analog value representation for Thermocouple temperature detectors type R, S Table 4-27 Type R, S in 5C > 2019.0 2019.0 : 1770.0 1769.0 : -50.0 -51.0 : -170.0 < -170.0 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type R, S Units dec. 32767 20190 : 17770 17690 : -500 -510 : -1700 -32768 hex. 7FFFH 4EDEH : 4524H 451AH : FE0CH FE02H : F95CH 8000H Type R, S in 5F > 3276.6 3276.6 : 3218.0 3216.2 : -58.0 -59.8 : -274.0 < -274.0 dec. 32767 32766 : 32180 32162 : -580 -598 : -2740 -32768 Units hex. 7FFFH 7FFEH : 7DB4H 7DA2H : FDBCH FDAAH : F54CH 8000H Type R, S in K > 2292.2 2292.2 : 2043.2 2042.2 : 223.2 222.2 : 103.2 < 103-2 dec. 32767 22922 : 20432 20422 : 2232 2222 : 1032 < 1032 Units hex. 7FFFH 598AH : 4FD0H 4FC6H : 08B8H 08AEH : 0408H 8000H Underflow Underrange Rated range Overrange Range Overflow S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-21 Analog Modules Analog value representation for Thermocouple temperature detectors type T Table 4-28 Type T in 5C > 540.0 540.0 : 401.0 www..com 400.0 : -270.0 < -270.0 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type T Units dec. 32767 5400 : 4010 4000 : -2700 < -2700 hex. 7FFFH 1518H : 0FAAH 0FA0H : F574H In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e.g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow below ... ... F0C4H and outputs 8000H. ... E5D4H and outputs 8000H. ... FB70H and outputs 8000H. Analog value representation for Thermocouple temperature detectors type U Table 4-29 Type U in 5C > 850.0 850.0 : 601.0 600.0 : -200.0 < -200.0 Analog Value Representation for Thermocouple Temperature Detectors Type U Units dec. 32767 8500 : 6010 6000 : -2000 < -2000 hex. 7FFFH 2134H : 177AH 1770H : F830H In the case of incorrect wiring (e.g. polarity reversal or open inputs) or of a sensor error in the negative range (e.g. incorrect thermocouple type), the analog input module signals underflow below ... ... F380H and outputs 8000H. ... EAC0H and outputs 8000H. ... FE2CH and outputs 8000H. 4-22 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.3.2 Analog Value Representation for Analog Output Channels Introduction The tables in this chapter contain the analog value representation for output channels of the analog output modules. The values in the tables apply to all modules with the corresponding output ranges. Notes for readers of the tables www..com Tables 4-30 to 4-31 contain the binary representation of the output values. Since the binary representation of the output values is always the same, starting at 4-32 these tables only contain the output ranges and the units. Output ranges for the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit The analog input/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit has output ranges from 0 to 10 V and from 0 to 20 mA. Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution, however. Please note that the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit with product status 1 does not have overranges. Binary representation of the output ranges The output ranges shown in Tables 4-30 to 4-31 are defined in two's complement representation: S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-23 Analog Modules Table 4-30 Bipolar Output Ranges Units Output Value in % Data Word 215 214 213 212 211 210 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 Range w32512 0 % 32511 117.589 27649 w100.004 27648 100.000 1 0.003617 www..com 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 1 0 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 x x 1 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 x Overflow Overrange 0 0.000 - 1 - 0.003617 - 27648 - 100.000 - 27649 v100.004 - 32512 - 117.593 v32513 0 % Rated range Underrange Underflow Table 4-31 Unipolar Output Ranges Units Output Value in % Data Word 215 214 213 212 211 210 2 9 Range 2 6 2 8 2 7 2 5 2 4 2 3 2 2 2 1 2 0 w32512 0 % 32511 117.589 27649 w100.004 27648 100.000 1 0.003617 0 0.000 - 1 0.000 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 0 0 0 0 1 x 1 1 0 1 0 1 Overflow Overrange Rated range - 32512 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Limited to rated range lower limit 0 V and 0 mA Underflow v32513 0 % 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 x x x x x x x x 4-24 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Analog value representation in voltage output ranges Table 4-32 Analog Value Representation in Output Range 10 V System Dec. 118.5149 % 32767 32512 117.589 % 32511 www..com Voltage Output Range Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 V - 11.76 V Underflow, off circuit and de-energized 10 V 7.5 V 361.7 V 0V - 361.7 V - 7.5 V - 10 V Underrange Rated range 11.76 V Overrange 10 V 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and de-energized 27649 100 % 27648 75 % 20736 0.003617 % 1 0% 0 -1 - 75 % - 20736 - 100 % - 27648 - 27649 - 117.593 % - 32512 - 32513 - 118.519 % - 32768 Table 4-33 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 to 10 V and 1 to 5 V System Dec. 118.5149 % 32767 32512 117.589 % 32511 27649 100 % 27648 75 % 20736 0.003617 % 1 0% 0 -1 - 25 % - 6912 - 6913 - 117.593 % - 32512 - 32513 - 118.519 % - 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF E500 E4FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 V 0.00 V 0V Not possible. The output value is limited to 0 V. Underflow, off circuit and de-energized 10 V 7.5 V 361.7V 0V 5V 3.75 V 1V+144.7V Rated range 1V Underrange 11.76 V 5.70 V 0 to 10 V 0.00 V Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0.00 V Overflow, off circuit and deenergized Overrange S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-25 Analog Modules Analog value representation in current output ranges Table 4-34 Analog Value Representation in Output Range 20 mA System Dec. 118.5149 % 32767 32512 117.589 % 32511 www..com Current Output Range Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF AF00 9400 93FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 mA - 23.52 mA Underflow, off circuit and de-energized 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA - 723.4 nA - 15 mA - 20 mA Underrange Rated range 23.52 mA Overrange 20 mA 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and de-energized 27649 100 % 27648 75 % 20736 0.003617 % 1 0% 0 -1 - 75 % - 20736 - 100 % - 27648 - 27649 - 117.593 % - 32512 - 32513 - 118.519 % - 32768 Table 4-35 Analog Value Representation in Output Ranges 0 and 20 mA and 4 to 20 mA System Dec. 118.5149 % 32767 32512 117.589 % 32511 27649 100 % 27648 75 % 20736 0.003617 % 1 0% 0 -1 - 25 % - 6912 - 6913 - 117.593 % - 32512 - 32513 - 118.519 % - 32768 Hex. 7FFF 7F00 7EFF 6C01 6C00 5100 1 0 FFFF E500 E4FF 8100 80FF 8000 0.00 mA 0.00 mA 0 mA Not possible. The output value is limited to 0 mA. Underflow, off circuit and de-energized 20 mA 15 mA 723.4 nA 0 mA 20 mA 15 mA 4mA+578.7 nA 4 mA Underrange Rated range 23.52 mA 22.81 mA 0 to 20 mA 0.00 mA Current Output Range 4 to 20 mA: 0.00 mA Overflow, off circuit and de-energized Overrange 4-26 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.4 Setting the Measuring Method and Measuring Ranges of Analog Input Channels Two procedures There are two procedures for setting the measuring method and the measuring ranges of the analog input channels of the analog modules: S www..com With measuring range module and STEP 7 By means of wiring the analog input channel and STEP 7 S Which of these two methods is used for the individual analog modules depends on the module and is described in detail in the specific module sections. The procedure for setting the measuring method and measuring range of the module in STEP 7 is described in Section 4.7. The following section describes how you set the measuring method and the measuring range by means of measuring range modules. Setting the measuring method and the measuring ranges with measuring range modules If the analog modules haves measuring range modules, they are supplied with the measuring range modules plugged in. If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. Note Make sure that the measuring range modules are on the side of the analog input module. Before installing the analog input module, therefore, check whether the measuring range modules have to be set to another measuring method and another measuring range. Possible settings for the measuring range modules The measuring range modules can be set to the following positions: "A", "B", "C" and "D". Which measuring range module positions you must select for the individual measuring methods and measuring ranges is described in detail in the specific module section. The settings for the various types of measurement and measuring ranges are also printed on the analog module. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-27 Analog Modules Replugging measuring range modules If you want to replug a measuring range module, perform the following steps: 1. Use a screwdriver to ease the measuring range module out of the analog input module. 2 www..com 1 Figure 4-1 Easing Measuring Range Modules from the Analog Input Module 4-28 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 2. Insert the measuring range module (correctly positioned (1)) into the analog input module. The measuring range selected is the one that points to the marker point on module (2). 1 www..com 2 Figure 4-2 Inserting Measuring Range Modules into the Analog Input Module Perform the same steps for all other measuring range modules. The next step is to install the module. Caution If you have not set the measuring range modules correctly, the module may be destroyed. Make sure that the measuring range module is in the correct position before connecting a sensor to the module. ! S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-29 Analog Modules 4.5 Behavior of the Analog Modules Introduction In this section, you will find information on: S S www..com How the analog input and output values depend on the operating states of the CPU and the supply voltage of the analog module The behavior of the analog modules depending on where the analog values lie within the value range The effect of the operational limit of the analog module on the analog input and output value, as illustrated by an example S 4.5.1 Effect of Supply Voltage and Operating Mode Effect of supply voltage and operating mode on the modules The input and output values of the analog modules depend on the operating state of the CPU and on the supply voltage of the module. Table 4-36 Dependencies of the Analog Input/Output Values on the Operating State of the CPU and the Supply Voltage L+ CPU Operating State Supply Voltage L+ at Analog Module L+ present Input Value of the Analog Input Module Output Value of the Analog Output Module POWER RUN ON Measured value 7FFFH until first conversion following power-up or after parameter assignment of the module has been completed CPU values Until the first conversion... S after power-up has been completed, a signal of 0 mA or 0 V is output. S after parameter assignment has been completed, the previous value is output. L+ missing POWER STOP ON L+ present Overflow value Measured value 7FFFH until first conversion following power-up or after parameter assignment of the module has been completed L+ missing POWER - OFF L+ present L+ missing Overflow value - - 0 mA/0 V Substitute value/last value (default values: 0 mA/0 V) 0 mA/0 V 0 mA/0 V 0 mA/0 V 4-30 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Behavior on failure of the supply voltage Failure of the supply voltage of the analog modules is always indicated by the SF LED on the module. Furthermore, this information is made available on the module (entry in diagnostic buffer). Triggering of the diagnostic interrupt depends on the parameter assignment (see Section 4.7). 4.5.2 www..com Effect of Range of Values of the Analog Values Effect of errors on analog modules with diagnostics capability Any errors that occur can lead to a diagnostics entry and a diagnostic interrupt with analog modules with diagnostics capability and corresponding parameter assignment. You will find the errors that might be involved in Section 4.16. Effect of range of values on the analog input module The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the input values lie within the range of values. Table 4-37 Behavior of the Analog Input Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value within the Range of Values Measured Value Within Rated range Overrange/ underrange Overflow Underflow Beyond the programmed limit 1 Input Value Measured value Measured value 7FFFH 8000H Measured value SF LED - - Flashes1 Flashes1 - Diagnostics - - Entered1 Entered1 - Interrupt - - Diagnostic interrupt1 Diagnostic interrupt1 Process interrupt1 Only for modules with diagnostics capability and depending on parameter assignment S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-31 Analog Modules Effect of range of values on the analog output module The behavior of the analog modules depends on where the output values lie within the value range. Table 4-38 Behavior of the Analog Output Modules as a Function of the Position of the Analog Value within the Range of Values Process Value Lies Within Rated range www..com Output Value CPU value CPU value 0 signal 0 signal SF LED - - - - Diagnostics - - - - Interrupt - - - - Overrange/ underrange Overflow Underflow 4-32 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.5.3 Effect of Operational Limit and Basic Error Limit Operational limit The operational limit is the measuring error or output error of the analog module over the entire temperature range authorized for the module, referred to the rated range of the module. www..com Basic error limit The basic error limit is the operational limit at 25 C, referred to the rated range of the module. Note The percentage details of operational and basic error limits in the technical specifications of the module always refer to the highest possible input and output value in the rated range of the module. Example of determination of the output error of a module An analog output module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit is being used for voltage output. The output range from "0 to 10 V" is being used. The module is operating at an ambient temperature of 30 C. Thus the operational limit applies. The technical specifications of the module state: S Operational limit for voltage output: "0.5 % An output error, therefore, of "0.05 V ("0.5 % of 10 V) over the whole rated range of the module must be expected. This means that with an actual voltage of, say, 1 V, a value in the range from 0.95 V to 1.05 V is output by the module. The relative error is "5 % in this case. The figure below shows for the example how the relative error becomes increasingly less the more the output value approximates to the end of the rated range of 10 V. "0.05 V ( "5 %) "0.05 V ( "0.625 %) "0.05 V ( "0.5 %*) Output Value 10 V * Operational limit -1V Figure 4-3 0V 1V 8V Example of the Relative Error of an Analog Output Module S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-33 Analog Modules 4.6 Conversion, Cycle, Setting and Response Time of Analog Modules Conversion time of analog input channels The conversion time consists of a basic conversion time and additional processing times of the module for: S www..com Resistance test Wire-break monitoring S The basic conversion time depends directly on the conversion method of the analog input channel (integrating method, instantaneous value conversion). In the case of integrating conversion methods, the integration time has a direct influence on the conversion time. The integration time depends on the interference frequency suppression that you set in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7.1). For the basic conversion times and additional processing times of the different analog modules refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at Section 4.18. Scan time of analog input channels Analog-to-digital conversion and the transfer of the digitized measured values to the memory and/or to the bus backplane are performed sequentially - in other words, the analog input channels are converted one after the other. The scan time - in other words, the time elapsing until an analog input value is again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog input channels of the analog input module. The following figure illustrates the components of the scan time for an n-channel analog module. Conversion time, channel 1 Conversion time, channel 2 Cycle time Conversion time, channel n Figure 4-4 Scan Time of an Analog Input or Output Module 4-34 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Conversion and scan times for analog input channels in channel groups When the analog input channels are grouped in channel groups, you must take into account the conversion time channel group by channel group. Example Two analog input channels channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit are combined to form a channel group. You must therefore grade the cycle time in steps of 2. www..com Setting smoothing of analog values You can set the smoothing of the analog values in STEP 7 for some analog input modules. Using smoothing Smoothing of analog values ensures a stable analog signal for further processing. It makes sense to smooth the analog values with slow variations of measured values - for example, with temperature measurements. Smoothing principle The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. Smoothing is accomplished by the module calculating average values from a defined number of converted (digitized) analog values. The user assigns parameters to smoothing at not more than four levels (none, low, average, high). The level determines the number of analog signals used for averaging. The higher the smoothing level chosen, the more stable is the smoothed analog value and the longer it takes until the smoothed analog signal is applied after a step response (refer to the following example) Example. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-35 Analog Modules Example The following figure shows the number of module cycles for a step response after which the smoothed analog value is approximately 100 % applied, as a function of the smoothing that has been set. The figure applies to every change of signal at the analog input. Signal variation in percent 100 www..com Step response for any analog input signal 63 50 0 Smoothing: low: average: high: 50 100 150 200 Module cycles Figure 4-5 Example of the Influence of Smoothing on the Step Response Additional information on smoothing Refer to the specific section on the analog input module (from Section 4.18) to determine whether smoothing can be set for the specific module and for any special features that have to be taken into account. Conversion time of the analog output channels The conversion time of the analog output channels comprises the transfer of the digitized output values from the internal memory and the digital-to-analog conversion. Scan time of analog output channels The analog output channels are converted sequentially - in other words, the analog output channels are converted one after the other. The scan time - in other words, the time elapsing until an analog output value is again converted, is the sum of the conversion times of all activated analog output channels (refer to 4-4). 4-36 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Tip You should disable any analog channels that are not being used to reduce the scan time in STEP 7. Overview of the settling time and response time of the analog output modules tA www..com tE tZ t1 tA = Response time tZ = Cycle time corresponds to n tE = Settling time t1 = New digitized output value is present t2 = Output value transferred and converted t3 = Specified output value reached conversion time (n = activated channels) t2 t3 Figure 4-6 Settling and Response times of the Analog Output Channels Settling time The settling time (t2 to t3) - in other words, the time elapsing from application the converted value until the specified value is reached at the analog output - is load-dependent. A distinction is made between resistive, capacitive and inductive loads. For the settling times of the different analog output modules as a function of load refer to the technical specifications of the module concerned, starting at Section 4.23. Response time The response time (t1 to t3) - in other words, the time elapsing from application of the digital output values in the internal memory until the specified value is reached at the analog output - in a worst case scenario is the sum of the scan time and the settling time. You have a worst case situation, if, shortly prior to the transfer of a new output value, the analog channel has been converted and is not converted again until all other channels are converted (cycle time). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-37 Analog Modules 4.7 Analog Module Parameter Assignment Introduction Analog modules can have different characteristics. You can set the characteristics of the modules by means of parameter assignment. Tools for parameter assignment www..com You assign parameters to analog modules with STEP 7. You must perform parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU. When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to RUN mode, the CPU then transfers the parameters to the individual analog modules. In addition, if necessary you must place the measuring range modules of the module in the necessary position (refer to Section 4.4). Static and dynamic parameters The parameters are divided into static and dynamic parameters. Set the static parameters in STOP mode of the CPU, as described above. You can similarly modify the dynamic parameters in the current user program by means of SFCs. Note, however, that after a change from RUN STOP, STOP RUN of the CPU, the parameters set in STEP 7 apply again. You will find a description of the parameter assignment of modules in the user program in Appendix A. Parameter Static Dynamic Settable with Programming device Programming device SFC 55 in the user program CPU Operating State STOP STOP RUN 4-38 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.7.1 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules The analog input modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the module concerned, starting from Section 4.18, for the subset "mastered" by the specific analog modules. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7. www..com Table 4-39 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope Enable S Diagnostics Yes/no interrupt S Hardware Yes/no interrupt upon limit violation Yes/no S Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Trigger for hardware interrupt Constraint possible due to measuring range 32511 to - 32512 - 32512 to 32511 No No Dynamic No Module S Upper limit value S Lower limit value Diagnostics S Group diagnostics - Dynamic Channel or Channel group Channel or Channel group Yes/no No No Static S With wire-break check Yes/no S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-39 Analog Modules Table 4-39 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued Parameter Value Range Default Settings Parameter Type Scope Measurement S Measuring method www..com deactivated U Voltage 4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistance (four-wire connection) R-3L Resistance, (three-wire connection) RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) RTD-3L Bulb resistor (linear, three-conductor terminal) TC-I1) Thermocouple (internal comparison) Thermocouple TC-E1) (external comparison) TC-IL2) Thermocouple (linear, internal comparison) TC-EL2) Thermocouple (linear, external comparison) TC-L00C2) Thermocouple (linear, reference temp.0C) TC-L50C2) Thermocouple (linear, reference temp.50C) For the settable measuring ranges of the input channels, please refer to the individual module description. Overflow; underflow U Dynamic Channel or Channel group S Measuring range S Reaction with open thermocouple "10 V Overflow S Temperature unit3 Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit; Kelvin 8 channels, hardware filter 8 channels, software filter 4 channels, hardware filter Platinum (Pt) 0.00385 W/W/C 0.003916 W/W/C 0.003902 W/W/C 0.003920 W/W/C 0.003851 W/W/C Nickel (Ni) 0.00618 W/W/C 0.00672 W/W/C Copper (Cu) 0.00472 W/W/C Degrees Celsius Dynamic Module S Module filtering mode 8 channels, Dynamic hardware filter 0.00385 Dynamic Module S Temperature coefficient for temperature measurement with bulb resistor (RTD) Channel or Channel group 4-40 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Table 4-39 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules, continued Parameter Value Range Default Settings 50 Hz Parameter Type Dynamic Scope S Interference frequency suppression 400/60/50 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz Channel or Channel group Channel or Channel group S Smoothing www..com None Low Average High None Dynamic 1) The module supplies a decimal value of the measured thermal voltage to the CPU - for example, 27648 at 80 mV (refer to Table 4-10) 2) The module supplies a temperature value to the CPU - for example, 120C (refer to Table 4-16) 3) 1 digit = 0.1C; 1 digit = 0.1F 4.7.2 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules The analog output modules use a subset of the parameters and ranges of values listed in the table below, depending on the functionality. Refer to the section on the module concerned, starting from Section 4.23, for the subset "mastered" by the specific analog modules. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7. Table 4-40 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameter Enable S Diagnostics interrupt Diagnostics S Group diagnostics Output S Output type Value Range Default Settings No Parameter Type Dynamic Scope Yes/no Module Yes/no deactivated Voltage Current For the settable measuring ranges of the output channels, please refer to the individual module description. ASS LWH EWS Outputs de-energized Hold last value Apply substitute value No U Static Channel Dynamic "10 V Channel S Output range Response with CPU-STOP ASS Dynamic Channel S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-41 Analog Modules 4.7.3 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules The analog input/output modules make available the parameters contained in the following table. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7. Table 4-41 SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 Bit: Parameters Parameter www..com Value Range Default Setting Parameter Type Scope Input Measurement S Measuring method deactivated U Voltage R-4L Resistance (four-conductor terminal) RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) 0 to 10 V 10000 W Pt 100 climate 20 ms; 16.6 ms deactivated Voltage 0 to 10 V RTD-4L Dynamic Channel S Measuring range S Integration time Output S Output type Pt 100 climate 20 ms U Dynamic 0 to 10 V Channel S Output range 4-42 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.8 Connecting Sensors to Analog Inputs Introduction You can connect different sensors to the analog input modules depending on the measuring method; voltage and current sensors, and resistors. This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for sensors described in the sections that follow. www..com Cables for analog signals To reduce electrical interference, you should use twisted-pair shielded cables for the analog signals. The shield of the analog signal cables should be grounded at both cable ends. If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current can flow over the shield, which leads to an interference of the analog signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only. Isolated analog input modules With the isolated analog input modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. You must use isolated analog input modules if a potential difference EISO can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. By means of a equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the CPU, make sure that EISO does not exceed the permitted value. Non-isolated analog input modules With the non-isolated analog input modules, you must establish a connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. Establish IM 153. For this purpose, connect the MANA terminal with the M terminal of the CPU and IM 153. A potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the CPU and the IM 153 can result in corruption of the analog signal. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-43 Analog Modules Limited potential difference ECM Only a limited potential difference ECM (common mode voltage) may occur between the measuring lines M- of the input channels and the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA. In order to prevent the permissible value from being exceeded, you must take different actions, described below, depending on the potential connection of the sensors. Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below www..com The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: M +: M -: MANA: M: L +: ECM: EISO: Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Potential difference between inputs and reference potential of the MANA measuring circuit Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU Connecting isolated sensors The isolated sensors are not connected with the local ground potential (local ground). They can be operated free of potential. With isolated sensors, potential differences might arise between the different sensors. These potential differences can arise as a result of interference or the local distribution of the sensors. In order to prevent the permissible value for ECM from being exceeded when operating in areas with heavy EMC interference, we recommend you to connect M- with MANA. 4-44 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules You can operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or Ungrounded mode. L+ M M+ M- Isolated sensors www..com M+ M- MANA ADC Logic Backplane bus Recommended connection CPU EISO Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-7 Connecting Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI L+ M M+ M- M+ M- MANA ADC Logic Backplane bus Isolated sensors Recommended connection CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-8 Connecting Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-45 Analog Modules Note Do not connect M- to MANA when connecting two-wire transmitters for current measurement and resistance-type sensors. This also applies to inputs which are not used. Non-isolated sensors www..com The non-isolated sensors are connected with the local ground potential (local ground). When using non-isolated sensors, you must connect MANA to the local ground. Connecting non-isolated sensors Caused by local conditions or interferences potential differences ECM (static or dynamic) can occur between the locally distributed individual measuring points. If the potential difference ECM exceeds the permissible value, you must provide equipotential bonding conductors between the measuring points. When connecting non-isolated sensors to optically isolated modules, you can operate the CPU in Grounded mode (refer to the figure below) or Ungrounded mode. L+ M M+ M- M+ M- ECM MANA ADC Logic Backplane bus Non-isolated sensors Equipotential bonding conductor CPU EISO Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-9 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to an Isolated AI 4-46 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules When connecting non-isolated sensors to non-isolated modules, you can operate the CPU only in Grounded mode. L+ M M+ M- M+ M- ECM MANA ADC Logic Backplane bus CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus Non-isolated sensors www..com Equipotential bonding conductor Figure 4-10 Connecting Non-Isolated Sensors to a Non-Isolated AI Note Non-isolated 2-wire transmitters and non-isolated resistance-type sensors may not be used with non-isolated AI! S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-47 Analog Modules 4.9 Connecting Voltage Sensors Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors. www..com Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figure below have the following meanings: M +: M -: MANA: M: L +: Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Connection of voltage sensors L+ M + U U - + M+ M- M+ M- MANA ADC Logic Backplane bus - Figure 4-11 Connecting Voltage Sensors to an Isolated AI 4-48 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.10 Connecting Current Sensors Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors. www..com Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: M +: M -: MANA: M: L +: Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Supply voltage of the sensors The two-wire transmitter receives its short-circuit-proof power supply via the terminals of the analog input module. This transmitter then converts the measured variable into a current. Two-wire transmitters must be isolated sensors. Four-wire transmitters have separate power supplies. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-49 Analog Modules Connecting two-wire transmitters L+ M Two-wire transmitter + - Two-wire + transmitter - M+ M- M+ M- MANA Sensor, for example, pressure gauge P P www..com ADC Logic Backplane bus Figure 4-12 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI When the supply voltage L+ is fed from the module, you must assign parameters to the two-wire transmitter as a four-wire transmitter in STEP 7. L+ M Two-wire + transmitter - M+ M- MANA ADC Logic Backplane bus M Figure 4-13 Connecting Two-Wire Transmitters Supplied from L+ to an Isolated AI 4-50 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Connecting four-wire transmitters L+ M Four-wire transmitter M+ M- M+ M- MANA ADC Logic Backplane bus Sensor, for example, pressure gauge P P www..com + - + - L+ M Figure 4-14 Connecting Four-Wire Transmitters to an Isolated AI 4.11 Connecting Resistance Thermometers and Resistors Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors. Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: IC+: IC-: M+: M-: MANA: M: L+: Constant-current lead (positive) Constant-current lead (negative) Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-51 Analog Modules Connecting resistance thermometers and resistors The resistance thermometers/resistors are wired in a four-wire, three-wire or two-conductor terminal. With four-wire and four-conductor terminals, the module supplies a constant current via terminals IC + and IC - so that the potential drop occurring on the measuring cables is compensated. It is important that the connected constant current cables are directly connected to the resistance thermometer/resistor. Measurements with four-wire or three-conductor terminals supply a more precise measuring result due to compensation than measurements with a two-conductor terminal. www..com Four-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer The voltage generated at the resistance-type thermometer is measured via the M+ and M- terminals. When you connect, watch out for the polarity of the connected cable (connect IC + and M+ as well as IC - and M- to the resistance thermometer). When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ and the cables IC - and M- are connected directly to the resistance thermometer. L+ M M+ M- IC+ IC IC- MANA Figure 4-15 Four-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI ADC Logic Backplane bus 4-52 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Three-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer With a three-conductor terminal on modules with four terminals, you must normally insert a jumper between M- and IC- (refer to Figure 4-16). Take note of the exception for the SM 331; AI 8 RTD (refer to Figure 4-17). When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC + and M+ are connected directly to the resistance thermometer. L+ M www..com M+ M- IC+ IC IC- MANA Figure 4-16 Three-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI ADC Logic Backplane bus Three-conductor connection to the SM 331; AI 8 RTD RTD, you must insert a With a three-conductor terminal to the SM 331; AI 8 jumper between M+ and IC+ (refer to Figure 4-17). When connecting, make sure that the connected cables IC - and M- are connected directly to the resistance thermometer. L+ M M+ M- IC+ IC IC- MANA Figure 4-17 Three-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to the SM 331; AI 8 RTD ADC Logic Backplane bus S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-53 Analog Modules ! Caution Incorrect wiring of the three-conductor terminal can lead to unforeseen operation of the module and dangerous conditions in the system. Two-conductor connection of a resistance thermometer With a two-conductor terminal, you must insert jumpers on the module between M+ and IC+ and between M- and IC-. www..com L+ M M+ M- IC+ IC- MANA ADC Logic Backplane bus Figure 4-18 Two-Wire Connection of Resistance Thermometers to an Isolated AI 4-54 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.12 Connecting Thermocouples Design of thermocouples A thermocouple consists of a pair of sensors and the necessary installation and connecting parts. The thermocouple consists of two wires of dissimilar metals or metal alloys soldered or welded together at the ends. There are different types of thermocouple, depending on the composition of the material used - for example, K, J, N thermocouples. The measuring principle of all thermocouples is the same, irrespective of their type. Measuring junction Thermocouple with positive or negative limbs Connecting point Compensating leads Reference junction Leads www..com Point at which thermo-e. m. f. is measured C Figure 4-19 Design of Thermocouples Principle of operation of thermocouples If the measuring point is subjected to a temperature different from that of the free ends of the thermocouple (point of connection), a voltage, the thermo-e.m.f., occurs at the free ends. The magnitude of the thermo-e.m.f. generated depends on the difference between the temperature at the measuring junction and the temperature at the free ends, as well as on the material combination used for the thermocouple. Since a thermocouple always measures a temperature difference, the free ends must be kept at a known temperature at a reference junction in order to determine the temperature of the measuring junction. The thermocouples can be extended from their point of connection to the reference junction by means of compensating wires. These compensating wires consist of the same material as the thermocouple wires. The supply leads are copper wire. Note: Make sure these wires are connected with the correct polarity, otherwise there will be considerable measuring errors. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-55 Analog Modules Compensation of the reference junction temperature You can compensate for the effects of temperature fluctuations at the reference junction by means of compensating leads. There are several options for you to choose from for acquiring the reference junction temperature in order to obtain an absolute temperature value from the difference in temperature between the reference junction and measuring point. You can use internal or external compensation, depending on where you want the reference junction to be. www..com Table 4-42 Options for Compensation of the Reference Junction Temperature Option No compensation Explanation When you want to acquire only the difference in temperature between the measuring point and the reference junction If you employ internal compensation, the internal temperature (thermocouple internal comparison) of the module is used for comparison purposes. You have already acquired and compensated the reference junction temperature (thermocouple external comparison) using a compensating box, which you have looped into an individual thermocouple. No further processing is necessary owing to the module. Only for SM 331; AI 8 TC: External compensation with resistance thermometer for acquisition of the reference junction temperature (refer to Figure 4-23 for connection) You can acquire the reference temperature by means of a resistance thermometer (platinum or nickel) and have it calculated by the module for any thermocouple. Internal compensation (refer to Figure 4-20 for connection) External compensation with compensating box in the leads of an individual thermocouple (refer to Figures 4-21 and 4-22 for its connection) Theory of operation of internal compensation With internal compensation, you can establish the reference point across the terminals of the analog input modules. In this case, you must run the compensating lines right up to the analog module. The internal temperature sensor acquires the temperature of the module and supplies a compensation voltage. Note that internal compensation is not as accurate as external compensation. 4-56 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Theory of operation of external compensation with compensating box If you employ external compensation, the temperature of the reference junction of the thermocouples is taken into account via a compensating box, for example. The compensating box contains a bridge circuit calibrated for a definite reference junction temperature. The reference junction is formed by the connections for the ends of the thermocouple's compensating leads. If the actual temperature deviates from the compensating temperature, the temperature-sensitive bridge resistance changes. This results in a positive or negative compensating voltage, which is added to the thermo-e.m.f. www..com Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: M +: M -: Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) COMP+: Compensating terminal (positive) COMP-: Compensating terminal (negative) MANA: M: L +: Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Ground terminal Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog input module and the sensors, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.8 with its generally valid information for connecting sensors. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-57 Analog Modules Connection of thermocouples with internal compensation Connect the thermocouples to the inputs of the module, either directly or by means of compensating lines. Each channel group can use a thermocouple type supported by the analog module independently of the other channel groups. L+ M M+ M- M+ M- ADC Logic Backplane bus www..com Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) COMP+ COMP-/MANA Figure 4-20 Connection of Thermocouples with Internal Compensation to an Isolated AI Connecting the compensating box Connect the compensating box to the COMP terminals of the module, locating the compensating box at the reference junction of the thermocouples. The compensating box must have an isolated supply. The power supply must have adequate filtering, for example by means of a grounded shielding winding. The terminals for connecting the thermocouple to the compensating box are not required and must therefore be shorted (refer to Figure 4-22 for an example). The following constraints apply: S S The parameters of a channel group are general valid for all channels of that group (for example, input voltage, integrating time etc.) External compensation with connection of the compensating box to the COMP terminals of the module can be performed only for one thermocouple type. In other words, all channels operating with external compensation must use the same type. 4-58 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Connecting thermocouples with compensating box If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same reference junction, you compensate as follows: Copper wire L+ M M+ M- M+ M- ADC Logic Backplane bus www..com Thermocouples Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) L+ M Comp. Box Ref. junction COMP+ COMP-/MANA Figure 4-21 Connection of Thermocouples with Compensation Box to an Isolated AI Note Use compensating boxes with a reference junction temperature of 0_C for analog input modules. Recommended compensating box We recommend that you use a reference junction (with integrated power supply unit) from Siemens as a compensating box. You will find the necessary ordering data in the table below. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-59 Analog Modules Table 4-43 Ordering Data of the Comparison Point Recommended Compensating Box Reference junction with integrated power supply unit, for rail mounting Auxiliary power 220 VAC 110 VAC 24 VAC 24 VDC www..com Order Number M72166-VVVVV B1 B2 B3 B4 1 Connection to thermocouple Fe-CuNi Fe/Cu Ni Ni Cr/Ni Type L Type J Type K 2 3 4 5 6 7 00 Pt 10 % Rh/Pt Type S Pt 13 % Rh/Pt Type R Cu-CuNi Cu/Cu Ni Reference temperature 0_C Type U Type T Connecting to the reference junction (Order No. M72166-xxx00) If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same reference junction, you compensate as follows: Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) Copper wire L+ M M+ M- M+ M- ADC Logic Backplane bus Thermocouples Auxiliary power + 3 1 - COMP+ COMP-/MANA The terminals for the compensating wire must be shortcircuited. SIEMENS M72166- 12 11 9 8 + - Output (Cu wires) Figure 4-22 Connection of Thermocouples with Comparison Point (Order No. M72166-xxx00) to an Isolated AI S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-60 Analog Modules Connecting thermocouples with resistance thermometer to the SM 331; AI 8 TC 24 Bit Connect the resistance thermometer to the special KV input of the SM 331; AI 8 TC 24 Bit. If all thermocouples connected to the inputs of the module have the same reference junction, you compensate as follows: Copper wire www..com L+ M M+ M- M+ M- ADC Logic Backplane bus Thermocouples Compensating leads (same material as thermocouple) RTD at KV input KV+ KV- IC+ IC- Ref. junction KV+: KV-: IC+: IC-: Figure 4-23 Cold junction (positive) Cold junction (negative) Constant-current lead (positive) Constant-current lead (negative) SM 331; AI 8 TC 24 Bit: Connection of Thermocouples of the Same Type with External Compensation by Means of a Resistance Thermometer S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-61 Analog Modules 4.13 Connecting Loads/Actuators to Analog Output Introduction You can use the analog output modules to supply loads and actuators with current and voltage. This section contains general information that is generally applicable to all the connection options for loads and actuators described in the sections that follow. www..com Cables for analog signals For the analog signals, you should use shielded and twisted pair cables. The cables QV and S+ and M and S-, respectively, are to be twisted together. This reduces the interference. Ground the screen of the analog cables at both ends of the cables. If there are potential differences between the cable ends, an equipotential bonding current, which can flow over the shield, can cause interference of the analog signals. In such a case, you should ground the shield at one end of the cable only. Isolated analog output modules With the isolated analog output modules there is no electrical connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. You must use isolated analog output modules if a potential difference EISO can occur between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. By means of a equipotential bonding conductor between the MANA terminal and the M terminal of the CPU, make sure that EISO does not exceed the permitted value. Non-Isolated analog output modules With the non-isolated analog output modules, you must establish a connection between the reference point of the measuring circuit MANA and the M terminal of the CPU. Therefore, connect the MANA terminal with the M terminal of the CPU. A potential difference between MANA and the M terminal of the CPU can lead to a corruption of the analog signal. 4-62 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.14 Connecting Loads and Actuators to Voltage Outputs Connecting loads to a voltage output Connecting loads to a voltage output is possible both in a four-wire and a two-wire circuit. However, not all analog output modules allow both types of connection. Note www..com The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators. Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: QV: S +: S -: MANA: RL: L +: M: EISO: Analog output voltage Detector lead (positive) Detector lead (negative) Reference potential of analog circuit Load impedance Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Ground terminal Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-63 Analog Modules Connecting loads to a voltage output of an isolated module over a four-wire circuit A high accuracy at the load can be achieved through the four-wire circuit. You must therefore connect the sensor leads (S- and S+) directly to the load. The voltage is thus measured and corrected directly at the load. Interferences or a voltage drop can result in a potential difference between the sensor lead S- and the reference circuit of the analog circuit MANA. This potential difference must not exceed the permissible value. If the permissible potential difference is exceeded, the accuracy of the analog signal is impaired. www..com L+ M QV Logic Backplane bus S- MANA CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus EISO RL DAC S+ Figure 4-24 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of an Isolated AO over a Four-Wire Circuit 4-64 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Connecting loads to a voltage output of a non-isolated module over a two-wire circuit With a two-wire circuit, the S+ and S- terminals can be left open. However, you will not achieve the accuracy of a four-wire circuit. Connect the load to terminals QV and the reference point of the measuring circuit, MANA. L+ M www..com QV Logic Backplane bus RL MANA CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus DAC Figure 4-25 Connecting Loads to a Voltage Output of a Non-Isolated AO over a Two-Wire Circuit S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-65 Analog Modules 4.15 Connecting Loads and Actuators to Current Outputs Note The necessary connecting cables, which result from the potential connection of the analog output module, are not drawn in the figures shown below. In other words, you must continue to take note of and implement Section 4.13 with its generally valid information for connecting loads and actuators. www..com Abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below The abbreviations and mnemonics used in the figures below have the following meanings: QI: MANA: RL: L +: M: EISO: Analog output current Reference potential of analog circuit Load impedance Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Ground terminal Potential difference between MANA and M terminal of CPU. Connecting loads to a current output You must connect loads to QI and the reference point of the analog circuit MANA of a current output. L+ M QI Logic Backplane bus RL MANA CPU Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-26 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of an Isolated AO EISO DAC 4-66 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules L+ M QI Logic Backplane bus RL CPU www..com DAC MANA Minternal L+ M Ground bus Figure 4-27 Connecting Loads to a Current Output of a Non-Isolated AO S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-67 Analog Modules 4.16 Diagnostics of the Analog Modules Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages. You obtain programmable diagnostic messages only if you have enabled diagnostics by parameter assignment. You perform parameter assignment in the "Diagnostics" parameter field in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7). www..com Non-programmable diagnostic messages are always made available by the analog module irrespective of diagnostics being enabled. Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7 Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: S S S The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the analog module and forwarded to the CPU. The error LED on the analog module lights. If you have programmed "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" with STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called (refer to Section 4.17). Reading out diagnostic messages You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program (refer to the Appendix "Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules"). You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to online Help for STEP 7). Diagnostic message in the measured value of analog input modules Every analog input module supplies the measured value 7FFFH irrespective of the parameter assignment when an error is detected. This measured value means either Overflow, Malfunction or a channel is disabled. Diagnostic message by means of SF LED Every analog module indicates errors for you by means of your SF LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the analog module. It goes out when all errors have been rectified. 4-68 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Diagnostic messages of the analog input modules The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog input modules. Table 4-44 Diagnostic Messages of the Analog Input Modules Diagnostics Message External auxiliary supply missing www..com LED SF SF SF SF SF SF Diagnostics Effective for Module Channel Channel Channel Channel Channel Parameterizable No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Configuring/parameter assignment error Common-mode error Wire break Underflow Overflow Diagnostic messages of the analog output modules The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the analog output modules. Table 4-45 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules Diagnostics Message External auxiliary supply missing Configuring/parameter assignment error Short-circuit to M Wire break LED SF SF SF SF Diagnostics Effective for Module Channel Channel Channel Parameterizable No Yes Yes Yes Note A prerequisite for detecting the errors indicated by programmable diagnostic messages is that you have assigned parameters to the analog module accordingly in STEP 7. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-69 Analog Modules Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog input modules Table 4-46 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Input Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures Diagnostics Message External load voltage missing Configuring/parameter assignment error www..com Possible Error Cause Load voltage L+ of module missing Illegal parameters transferred to module Feed supply L+ Remedy Check measuring range module Reassign module parameter Common-mode error Potential difference ECM between Connect M- with MANA the inputs (M-) and reference potential of measuring circuit (MANA) too high Resistance too high in the sensor connection Open circuit between module and sensor Channel not connected (open) Use different type of sensor or connection, e.g. use conductors with a larger cross-sectional core area Close circuit Disable channel group ("measuring procedure" parameter) Connect channel Wire break Underflow Input value underflows underrange, error may be caused: Wrong measuring range selected With the measuring ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V, if necessary by polarity reversal of sensor connection Configure other measuring range Check terminals Overflow Input value overflows overrange Configure other measuring range 4-70 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Causes of errors and remedial measures for analog output modules Table 4-47 Diagnostics Messages of the Analog Output Modules, Causes of Errors and Remedial Measures Diagnostics Message External load voltage missing Configuring/parameter assignment error www..com Possible Error Cause Load voltage L+ of module missing Illegal parameters transferred to module Overload of output Short-circuit of output QV after MANA Feed supply L+ Remedy Reassign module parameter Short-circuit after M Eliminate overload Eliminate short circuit Use different type of actuator or connection, e.g. use conductors with a larger cross-sectional core area Close circuit Disable channel group ("output type" parameter) Wire break Actuator resistance too high Open circuit between module and actuator Channel not used (open) 4.17 Interrupts of the Analog Modules Introduction In this Section, the interrupt behavior of the analog modules is described. The following interrupts exist: S S Diagnostic Interrupt Process interrupt Note that not all analog modules have interrupt capability or they are only capable of a subset of the interrupts described here Refer to the technical specifications of the modules, starting at Section 4.18, to determine which analog modules have interrupt capability. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-71 Analog Modules Enabling interrupts The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in STEP 7 (refer to Section 4.7). Diagnostic interrupt If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. www..com The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostics alarm block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module. Hardware interrupt with trigger "Upper or lower limit exceeded" Define a working range by setting parameters for an upper and lower limit value. If the process signal (for example, the temperature) leaves this working range, the module triggers a process interrupt, provided the interrupt is enabled. The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the hardware interrupt block (OB 40). In the user program of OB 40, you can set how the programmable logic controller is required to react to a limit value being surpassed or not being reached. When OB 40 is exited, the hardware interrupt is acknowledged on the module. Note Note that a hardware interrupt is not triggered if you have set the upper limit above the overrange or the lower limit below the underrange. 4-72 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Structure of the start information tag OB40_POINT_ADDR of OB 40 The limit values exceeded by the different channels are entered in the start information of OB 40 in the tag OB40_POINT_ADDR. The following figure shows the assignment to the bits of local data double word 8. LB 8 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 11 LB 9 .1 .0 17 16 11 LB 11 10 Bit no. LD 8 www..com Value falls below lower limit in channel 0 Value falls below lower limit in channel 1 Value exceeds upper limit in channel 0 Value exceeds upper limit in channel 1 Figure 4-28 Start Information of OB 40: Which Event Has Triggered the Hardware Interrupt at the Limit Value Hardware interrupt upon trigger "Reached end of scan cycle" By parameterizing the hardware interrupt a the end of the scan cycle, you have the option of synchronizing a process with the scan cycle of the analog input module. A scan cycle includes the conversion of the measured values of all enabled channels of the analog input module. The module processes the channels one after the other. After all the measured values have been converted, the module of the CPU reports by means of an interrupt that there are new measured values on all channels. You can use the interrupt to load the currently converted analog values. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-73 Analog Modules 4.18 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 (6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0) 12 Bit; Order number 6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0 Characteristics www..com The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 features: S S 8 inputs in 4 channel groups 12 Bit has the following characteristic Measured-value resolution; settable per group (depending on the integration time set) - 9 bits + sign - 12 Bit + sign - 14 Bit + sign S Measuring method selectable per channel group: - Voltage - Current - Resistors - Temperature S S S S S S S Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Two channels with limit monitoring Programmable limit interrupt Galvanic isolation to the backplane bus interface Galvanic isolation to load voltage (not for two-wire transmitter) Resolution The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel, the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical Specifications of the module and Table 4-5 on page 4-9). 4-74 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 Thermocouples, Voltage measurement Current measurement L+ Internal supply Current Multisource plexer Meas. range module 12 Bit Resistance test Fault indicator - red SF 24V www..com Int. Comp. Ext. compensation None Comp T M0 + M0* M1 + M1* M2 + M2 * M3 + M3* CH0 M0 + CH0 M0* CH1 IC0 + IC0* CH2 M1 + CH2 M1* CH3 IC1 + IC1* + Comp + ADC Galvanic Isolation Backplane bus interface SF Comp - / Mana M4 + CH4 M2 + CH4 M4* M2* M5 + CH5 IC2 + M5* IC2* M6 + CH6 M3 + CH6 M3* M6 * M7 + CH7 IC3 + IC3* M7* M M Figure 4-29 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (see Technical Specifications). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-75 Analog Modules Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight Approx. 250 g Module-Specific Data Number of inputs 8 4 max. 200 m max. 50 m at 80 mV and thermocouples Voltage, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L + 24 VDC H D 40 125 120 12 Bit typ. 1 W Power dissipation of the module Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Integrating S www..com For resistance-type sensor S S S Parameters can be assigned Integration time in ms Basic conversion time including Integration time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms or Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms or Yes 2.5 3 162/3 17 20 22 100 102 Lenght of cable S Shielded 1 1 1 1 S Reverse polarity protection Yes 10 10 10 10 Power supply of the transmitters S S Supply current Short-circuit-proof max. 60 mA (per channel) Yes typ. 1.67 mA Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Isolation Additional conversion time for measuring resistance and open-circuit monitoring, in ms 16 16 16 16 S Yes Yes S S Resolution in bits including sign Suppression of interference voltage for interference frequency f1 in Hertz Basic response time of module, in ms (all channels enabled) 9 bits 400 12 bits 60 12 bits 50 14 bits 10 Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics S Permitted potential difference S 2.5 VDC 24 136 176 816 S Between inputs and MANA (ECM) - - At signal = 0 V Not for two-wire transmitter Smoothing of the measured values None S S Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (EISO) 2.5 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC Insulation tested with Current consumption S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ max. 50 mA max. 30 mA (without two-wire transmitter) 4-76 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 " 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) Repeatability (in steady " 0.05 % state at 25 _C with reference to the input range) Temperature error of the internal compensation "1% S S Common-mode interference (ECM < 2.5 V) Series-mode interference (peak value of the interference < rated value of the input range) > 70 dB Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics > 40 dB Interrupts S S Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be assigned Channels 0 and 2 Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible www..com Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dB Diagnostic functions Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) S Voltage input 80 mV 250 to 1000 mV 2.5 to 10 V "1% " 0.6 % " 0.8 % " 0.7 % " 0.7 % " 1, 1 % " 0.7 % " 0.8 % S S Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/ Input resistance S S S S Current input Resistor Thermocouple Resistance thermometer 3.2 to 20 mA 150; 300; 600 Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100/ Ni 100 Pt 100 climate S Voltage " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1000 mV " 2.5 V; " 5 V; 1 to 5 V; " 10 V; /10 M /10 M /10 M /10 M /100k /100k /100k /100k /25 /25 /25 /25 /25 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C with reference to the input range) S " 0.7 % " 0.4 % " 0.6 % " 0.5 % " 0.5 % " 0.7 % " 0.5 % " 0.6 % Current " 3.2 mA " 10 mA " 20 mA 0 to 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA: S Voltage input 80 mV 250 to 1000 mV 2.5 to 10 V S S S Resistor 150 300 600 S S S S Current input Resistor Thermocouple Resistance thermometer 3.2 to 20 mA 150; 300; 600 Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100/ Ni 100 Pt 100 climate Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100, Ni 100 Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) 20 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) 40 mA Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) " 0.005 %/K " 0.05 % S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-77 Analog Modules Connection of the sensor Characteristic linearization Possible S S S Parameters can be assigned Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100 (standard, climate range) Ni 100 (standard, climate range) Parameters can be assigned Possible Possible For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter For measuring resistance With two-conductor terminal Possible Possible S S For thermocouples For RTD Resistance Temperarture Detector Temperature compensation Possible S Possible Possible max. 820 www..com With three-conductor terminal With four-conductor terminal Internal temperature compensation External temperature compensation with compensating box Compensation for 0 _C reference junction temperature Technical unit for measuring temperature S S S S Load of the two-wire transmitter Possible Degrees Celsius 4-78 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.18.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit by means of measuring range modules on the module and in STEP 7. Meas. range module If necessary, the measuring range modules must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in Section 4.4. www..com The corresponding table in Section 4.18.2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module. Default settings for measuring range module The measuring range modules are preset to "B" (voltage; " 10 V) when the module is supplied. To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting. Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary. Table 4-48 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 8 Measuring Range Module Setting A B C D 12 Bit Using Measuring Range Modules Measuring Range " 1000 mV " 10 V 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Measuring Method Voltage Voltage Current, four-wire transmitter Current, two-wire transmitter S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-79 Analog Modules Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. Table 4-49 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter www..com 12 Bit Default Settings No No Parameter Type Dynamic Scope Value Range Enable S Diagnostic interrupt S Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Trigger for hardware interrupt Yes/no Yes/no Module S Upper limit value S Lower limit value Diagnostics S Group diagnostics Constraint possible due to measuring range. 32511 to - 32512 - 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no - Dynamic Channel No Static No S With wire-break check Measurement S Measuring Method Channel group Deactivated U Voltage 4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistance (four-conductor terminal) RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) TC-I Thermocouple (internal comparison) TC-E Thermocouple (external comparison) TC-IL Thermocouple (linear, internal comparison) TC-EL Thermocouple (linear, external comparison) Refer to Section 4.18.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz U Dynamic Channel or Channel group S Measuring Range S Interference Suppression "10 V 50 Hz 4-80 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Channel groups The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit are arranged in four groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 each channel group. 12 Bit has a measuring range module for The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC. www..com Table 4-50 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 Channels ... Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 12 Bit to Channel Groups ... form one Channel Group each Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement If you use the resistance measurement method, there is only one channel per channel group. The "2nd" channel of each group is used for current injection (IC). The measured value is obtained by accessing the "1st" channel of the group. The "2nd" channel of the group has the default carry value "7FFFH". Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case - in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2 Diagnostics You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the "group diagnosis" parameter in Table 4-44, on page 4-69. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-81 Analog Modules 4.18.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit Measuring methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: S S www..com Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance test Temperature measurement S S You perform the setting by means of the measuring range modules on the module and with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7. Unused channels You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the "measuring method" parameter for unused channels to "disabled". In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also. Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels. S S Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group. Current measurement, two-wire transmitter: There are two ways to use the channels: a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this channel group. With enabled diagnostics, the analog module will otherwise trigger a diagnostic interrupt once and the group error LED on the analog module lights up. b) Connect a 1.5 to 3.3 kW resistor to the unused input. You may then enable diagnostics for this channel group. S Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, four-wire transmitter: Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group. 4-82 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Special characteristic when all channels are disabled If you disable all input channels of the module and enable diagnostics when parameterizing the analog input module SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit, the module does not indicate that the "external auxiliary voltage" is missing. Measuring ranges You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range modules on the module and with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7. www..com Table 4-51 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 Method Selected U: voltage Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV " 1000 mV " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V " 10 V TC-I:thermocouple (internal compensation) (thermovoltage measurement) TC-E:thermocouple (external compensation) (thermovoltage measurement) 2DMU: current (two-wire transmitter) 4DMU: current (four-wire transmitter) 4 to 20 mA " 3.2 mA " 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA R-4L: resistor (four-wire circuit) 150 W 300 W 600 W Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] Type E [NiCr-CuNi] Type J [Fe-CuNi] Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [Fe-CuNi] 12 Bit Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the voltage measuring range B A You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in " 80 mV the voltage measuring range D C You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the current measuring range A You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the resistance measuring range S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-83 Analog Modules Table 4-51 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 Method Selected TC-IL: thermocouple (linear, internal compensation) (temperature measurement) TC-EL: thermocouple (linear, external www..com compensation) (temperature measurement) RTD-4L: bulb resistor linear, four-conductor terminal (temperature measurement) Pt 100 climate Ni 100 climate Pt 100 standard Ni 100 standard Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] Type E [NiCr-CuNi] Type J [Fe-CuNi] Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [ [Fe-CuNi] ] 12 Bit, continued Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range The characteristics are linearized: S Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751 S Ni 100 according to IEC DIN 43760 S Thermocouple to DIN 584, type L to DIN 43710. A Default settings The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the "voltage" measuring method und the "" 10 V" measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit in STEP 7. Wire-break check The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (thermocouples and bulb Resistors). Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring range With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters wire break in the diagnosis when a current falls below 3.6 mA. If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If no diagnostics interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only indication of the wire break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached. 4-84 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.19 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 (6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0) 16 Bit; Order Number 6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0 Characteristics www..com The analog input module SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit has the following characteristic features: S S S 8 inputs in 4 channel groups Measured-value resolution 15 Bit + sign (independent of integration time) Measurement mode selectable per channel group: - Voltage - Current S S S S S S S Arbitrary measuring range and filter/update rate selection per channel group Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Two channels with limit monitoring Programmable limit interrupt Galvanic isolation to the backplane bus interface Permissible common mode voltage between channels of 50 VDC maximum S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-85 Analog Modules Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit 1 2 A 250 OHM 3 4 250 OHM 5 21 22 23 24 25 A/D1 26 27 Galvanic isolation 28 29 30 31 SF 32 33 34 35 A/D2 36 37 38 39 40 V V V V V V V + - CHO Fault indicator - red + - CH1 www..com SF 6 250 OHM 7 + - CH2 8 250 OHM 9 10 11 12 250 OHM 13 14 250 OHM 15 16 250 OHM 17 18 250 OHM 19 20 Backplane bus interface module + - CH3 + - + - + - + - CH4 CH5 CH6 CH7 Figure 4-30 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit Note that Channel 0 is configured for current and Channel 7 is configured for voltage. Note An external protective network is required in the signal leads conforming according to IEC 61000-4-5 (150 V/14 mm MOV across each + and - input to chassis ground) 4-86 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Wiring of the module for measuring current Current measurements are made by paralleling a channel's voltage input terminals with its respective current sense resistor. This is accomplished by jumpering the channels input terminals to the adjacent terminals on the field connector. For example, to configure channel 0 for current mode, you must jumper terminal 22 to 2 and terminal 23 to 3. The channel being configured for current measurements must be paired with the sense resistor connected to the channel's adjacent terminals in order to achieve the specified accuracy. www..com Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 16 Bit Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Integrating Approx. 272 g Module-Specific Data S S S Number of inputs Lenght of cable 8 Parameters can be assigned Integration time in ms Basic conversion time per channel group when more than one channel group is active Channel conversion time per channel group if only channel group 0 or 1 is enabled Yes 10 35 16.7 55 20 65 100 305 S Shielded max. 200 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials Isolation S Between channels and backplane bus Yes S 10 16.7 20 100 Permitted potential difference S S Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (EISO) 50 VDC, 35 VAC 50 VDC / 35 VAC 500 VDC Channel integration time (1/f1) in ms 10 16.7 20 100 S S Resolution including sign Suppression of interference voltage for interference f1 in Hertz 15 bits + sign 100 60 50 10 Insulation tested with Current consumption S From the backplane bus max. 130 mA typ. 0.6 W Power dissipation of the module Basic response time of module, in ms (all channels enabled) 140 220 260 1220 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-87 Analog Modules Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency); n = 1, 2, etc. Interrupts Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics S S S S Common-mode interference (Ucm < 50 V) Series-mode interference (peak value of the interference < rated value of the input range) > 100 dB > 90 dB Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be assigned, channels 0 and 2 Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible Diagnostic functions > 100 dB ECM = 0 / ECM = 50 V Crosstalk between the inputs www..com Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) S S Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Data for Selecting a Sensor 0.1 % / 0.7 % 0.3 % / 0.9 % Input range (rated values)/ Input resistance S S Voltage input Current input S S Voltage 5V 1 to 5 V 10 V / 2 M / 2 M / 2 M / 250 / 250 / 250 Basic error (operational limit at 25 C with reference to the input range) S S Voltage input Current input 0.05 % 0.05 % 0.005 %/K 0.03 % 0.025 % Current 0 to 20 mA 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C, with reference to the input range) Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensors max. 50 V continuous S S S For voltage measurement For current measurement As a two-wire transmitter As a four-wire transmitter Load of the two-wire transmitter Possible Possible Possible max. 820 4-88 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.19.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit in STEP 7. Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. Table 4-52 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter Enable S Diagnostic interrupt S Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Trigger for hardware interrupt 16 Bit Default Settings No No Parameter Type Dynamic Scope www..com Value Range Yes/no Yes/no Module Constraint possible due to measuring range. 32511 to - 32512 - 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no No Static No - Dynamic Channel S Upper limit value S Lower limit value Diagnostics S Group diagnostics S With wire-break check Measurement S Measuring method Channel group deactivated U Voltage 4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter) Refer to Section 4.19.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz U S Measuring range S Interference suppression "10 V Dynamic Channel group 50 Hz S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-89 Analog Modules Channel groups The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit are arranged in four groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC. Table 4-53 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 Channels ... www..com 16 Bit to Channel Groups ... form one Channel Group each Channel group 0 Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel group 3 Channel group 2 Channel group 1 High speed update mode In the high speed update mode, updates for the two channels in the group occur three times faster than with multiple channel groups enabled. For example, if channels 0 and 1 are enabled with 2.5 ms filtering, data updates for both channels will be available to the PLC every 10 msec. (For other filter settings, the filter setting equals the update rate.) The high speed update mode is only available when both channels are enabled on channel group 0 or 1, in other words, the "measuring method" parameter is set. However, only channel group 0 or only channel 1 (in other words, not both together) must be enabled. Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts You can set hardware interrupts in STEP 7 for the channel groups 0 and 1. Note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case - in other words, for channel 0 or channel 2 Diagnostics You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the "group diagnosis" parameter in Table 4-44, on page 4-69. 4-90 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.19.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit Measuring methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: S S www..com Voltage measurement Current measurement You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7. Unused channels Set the "measuring method" parameter for unused channels to "disabled". In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels. S S Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group. Current measurement 4 to 20 mA: Connect the unused input in series to an input of the same channel group. Ensure that a current sense resistor is connected for each active and unused channel. Other ranges: Short the positive to the negative input of the channel. S Measuring ranges You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the "measuring range" parameter in STEP 7. Table 4-54 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 Method Selected U: voltage Measuring Range 5V 1 to 5 V 10 V 0 to 20 mA 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 16 Bit Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the voltage measuring range You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the current measuring range 4DMU: current (four-wire transmitter) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-91 Analog Modules Default settings The default settings of the module are "voltage" for the measuring method "" 10 V" for the measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit in STEP 7. Measuring errors with common-mode voltages The SM 331; AI 8 x 16 Bit can make measurements in the presence of AC or DC common mode voltage. www..com For AC common mode voltages at multiples of the filter frequency setting, the rejection is accomplished by the integration period of the A/D converter and by the common mode rejection of the input amplifiers. For AC common mode voltages < 35 VRMS, the rejection ratio of > 100 dB results in negligible measurement error. For DC common mode voltages, only the rejection of the input amplifier stage is available to minimize the effect of the common mode voltage. Therefore, some accuracy degradation occurs in proportion to the common mode voltage. The worst case error occurs with 50 VDC between one channel and the other seven channels. The calculated worst case error is 0.7 % from 0 to 60 degrees C, and measured error is typically 3 0.1 % @ 25 degrees C. Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values The parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the SM 331; AI 8 x 16 Bit from the range of values contained in Table 4-52. The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and can vary between the lower limits shown in the Table below and 32511 (7EFFH). Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit values shown in the table below. Table 4-55 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of 16 Bit SM 331; AI 8 Measuring Range 10 V Minimum Possible Upper Limit Value 11.368 V 31430 7AC6H 5.684 V 31430 7AC6H Minimum Possible Lower Limit Value - 11.369 V - 31433 8537H - 5.684 V - 31430 853AH 5V 4-92 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Table 4-55 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 16 Bit, continued Measuring Range 1 to 5 V Minimum Possible Upper Limit Value 5.84 V 32376 7E78H 22.37 mA 31432 7AC8H 22.37 mA 32378 7E7AH 22.737 mA 31432 7AC8H Minimum Possible Lower Limit Value 0.96 V - 4864 ED00H - 3.19 mA - 4864 ED00H 1.185 mA - 4864 ED00H - 22.737 mA - 31432 8538H 0 to 20 mA www..com 4 to 20 mA 20 mA Wire-break check The wire-break check is available for the 1 to 5 V voltage range and the 4 to 20 mA current range. The following applies to both measuring ranges: Enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters a wire break in the diagnosis if a current falls below 3.6 mA (0.9 V). If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If no diagnostics interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only indication of the wire break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. With a disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-93 Analog Modules 4.20 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 (6ES7 331-7KBx2-0AB0) 12 Bit; Order number: "Standard module" 6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0 Order number: "SIMATIC Outdoor module" www..com 6ES7 331-7KB82-0AB0 Characteristics The analog input module SM 331; AI 2 features: S S Two inputs in one channel group Measured-value resolution (depending on the integration time set) - 9 bits + sign - 12 bits + sign - 14 bits + sign S Measuring method selectable per channel group: - Voltage - Current - Resistor - Temperature S S S S S S S Arbitrary measuring range selection per channel group Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt One channel with limit monitoring Programmable limit interrupt Galvanic isolation to the backplane bus interface Galvanic isolation to load voltage (not for two-wire transmitter) 12 Bit has the following characteristic Resolution The resolution of the measured value is a direct function of the integration time selected. In other words the longer the integration time for an analog input channel, the more accurate the resolution of the measured value will be (see Technical Specifications of the module and Table 4-5 on page 4-9). 4-94 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 2 Thermocouples, Voltage measurement Current measurement L+ Internal supply Current Multisource plexer Meas. range module 12 Bit Resistance test Fault indicator - red SF 24V M0 + CH0 M0 + CH0 M0* M0* M1 + CH1 IC0 + M1* www..com Internal compensation External compensation None Comp IC0* T + Comp + Comp - / Mana ADC Galvanic Isolation Backplane bus interface SF M M Figure 4-31 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit The input resistances depend on the measuring range selected (refer to the technical specifications for the module). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-95 Analog Modules Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 2 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 12 Bit Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Integrating Approx. 250 g Module-Specific Data S S S Number of inputs 2 1 max. 200 m max. 50 m at 80 mV and thermocouples Parameters can be assigned Integration time in ms Basic conversion time including integration time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms or Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms or Additional conversion time for measuring resistance and open-circuit monitoring, in ms Yes 2.5 3 162/3 17 20 22 100 102 S www..com For resistance-type sensor Lenght of cable S Shielded 1 1 1 1 Voltage, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L + 24 VDC Yes S 10 10 10 10 Reverse polarity protection Power supply of the transmitters 16 16 16 16 S S Supply current Short-circuit-proof max. 60 mA (per channel) Yes typ. 1.67 mA Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Isolation S S Resolution in bits (incl.) overrange) Suppression of interference voltage for interference frequency f1 in Hertz Basic response time of module, in ms (all channels enabled) 9 bits 400 12 bits 60 12 bits 50 14 bits 10 S S Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Yes Yes S 24 136 176 816 Permitted potential difference S Between inputs and MANA (ECM) - - At signal = 0 V Not for two-wire transmitter 2.5 VDC Smoothing of the measured values None S Between MANA and Minternal (EISO) 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC Insulation tested with Current consumption S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ max. 50 mA max. 30 mA (without two-wire transmitter) typ. 1.3 W Power dissipation of the module 4-96 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 " 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) Repeatability (in steady " 0.05 % state at 25 _C with reference to the input range) Temperature error of the internal compensation "1% S S Common-mode interference (ECM < 2.5 V) Series-mode interference (peak value of the interference < rated value of the input range) > 70 dB Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics > 40 dB Interrupts S S Hardware interrupt when limit has been exceeded Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be assigned Channel 0 Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible www..com Crosstalk between the inputs > 50 dB Diagnostic functions Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) S Voltage input 80 mV 250 to 1000 mV 2.5 to 10 V "1% " 0.6 % " 0.8 % " 0.7 % " 0.7 % " 1, 1 % " 0.7 % " 0.8 % S S Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/ Input resistance S S S S Current input Resistor Thermocouple Resistance thermometer 3.2 to 20 mA 150; 300; 600 Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100/ Ni 100 Pt 100 climate S Voltage " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1000 mV " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V " 10 V /10 M /10 M /10 M /10 M /100k /100k /100k /100k /25 /25 /25 /25 /25 /10 /10 /10 /10 /10 Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C with reference to the input range) S Current " 3.2 mA " 10 mA " 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA S Voltage input 80 mV 250 to 1000 mV 2.5 to 10 V " 0.6 % " 0.4 % S " 0.6 % " 0.5 % " 0.5 % " 0.7 % " 0.5 % " 0.6 % Resistor 150 300 600 S S S S Current input Resistor Thermocouple Resistance thermometer 3.2 to 20 mA 150; 300; 600 Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100/ Ni 100 Pt 100 climate S S Thermocouple Resistance thermometer Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100, Ni 100 Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) 20 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) 40 mA Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) " 0.005 %/K " 0.05 % S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-97 Analog Modules Connection of the sensor Characteristic linearization Possible S S Parameters can be assigned Type E, N, J, K, L Pt 100 (standard, climate range) Ni 100 (standard, climate range) Parameters can be assigned Possible Possible For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter S S For thermocouples For RTD Resistance Temperature Detector Possible Possible Temperature compensation S For measuring resistance www..com With two-conductor terminal With three-conductor terminal With four-conductor terminal Possible Possible Possible S S S max. 820 Internal temperature compensation External temperature compensation with compensating box Compensation for 0 _C reference junction temperature Technical unit for measuring temperature Possible S Load of the two-wire transmitter S Degrees Celsius 4-98 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.20.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit by means of a measuring range module on the module and in STEP 7. Measuring range module If necessary, the measuring range module must be replugged to change the measuring method and the measuring range. The steps you have to perform to do this are described in detail in Section 4.4. www..com The corresponding table in Section 4.20.2 tells you which assignment you have to select for which measuring method and measuring range. In addition, the necessary settings are embossed on the module. Default settings for measuring range module The measuring range module is preset to "B" (voltage; " 10 V) when the module is supplied. To use the following preset measuring methods and measuring ranges, you only have to change the measuring range module to the corresponding setting. Parameter assignment in STEP 7 is not necessary. Table 4-56 Default Settings of the SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit Using Measuring Range Module Measuring Range Module Setting A B C D Measuring Method Voltage Voltage Current, four-wire transmitter Current, two-wire transmitter Measuring Range "1000 mV "10 V 4 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-99 Analog Modules Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. Table 4-57 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 2 Parameter www..com 12 Bit Default Settings No No Parameter Type Dynamic Scope Value Range Enable S Diagnostic interrupt S Hardware interrupt upon limit violation Trigger for hardware interrupt Yes/no Yes/no Module S Upper limit value S Lower limit value Diagnostics S Group diagnostics 32511 to - 32512 - 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no - Dynamic Channel No Static No S With wire-break check Measurement S Measuring Method Channel group Deactivated U Voltage 4DMU Current (four-wire transmitter) 2DMU Current (two-wire transmitter) R-4L Resistance (four-wire connection) RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) TC-I Thermocouple (internal comparison) TC-E Thermocouple (external comparison) TC-IL Thermocouple (linear, internal comparison) TC-EL Thermocouple (linear, external comparison) Refer to Section 4.20.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz U Dynamic Channel or Channel group S Measuring Range S Interference Suppression "10 V 50 Hz 4-100 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Channel groups The two channels of the analog input module SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit are combined to a channel group. You can only ever assign parameters to the channel group. The SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit has a measuring range module for this channel group. Special characteristic of channel groups with resistance measurement If you use the resistance measurement method, the analog input module has only one channel. The "2nd" channel is used for current injection (IC). www..com The measured value is obtained by accessing the "1st" channel. The "2nd" channel has the default carry value "7FFFH". Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts You can set a process interrupt in STEP 7 for the channel group. Note, however, that a hardware interrupt is set only for the first channel in the channel group in each case - in other words, for channel 0. Diagnostics You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the "group diagnosis" parameter in Table 4-44, on page 4-69. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-101 Analog Modules 4.20.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit Measuring methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: S S www..com Voltage measurement Current measurement Resistance test Temperature measurement S S You perform the setting by means of the measuring range module on the module and with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7. Unused channels You must short-circuit unused channels and connect them to MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. Set the "measuring method" parameter for unused channels to "disabled". In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. If you do not use the COMP input, you must short-circuit it also. Special characteristics of unused channels for some measuring ranges Since configured inputs can remain unused because of the channel group generation, you must take note of the following special characteristics of these inputs to enable the diagnostic functions on the used channels. S S Measuring range 1 to 5 V: Connect the unused input in parallel with a used input of the same channel group. Current measurement, two-wire transmitter: There are two ways to use the channels: a) Leave the unused input open and do not enable diagnostics for this channel group. With enabled diagnostics, the analog module will otherwise trigger a diagnostic interrupt once and the group error LED on the analog module lights up. b) Connect a 1.5 to 3.3 kW resistor to the unused input. You may then enable diagnostics for this channel group. S Current measurement 4 to 20 mA, four-wire transmitter: Connect the unused input in series with an input of the same channel group. 4-102 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Measuring ranges You perform the setting of the measuring ranges by means of the measuring range module on the module and with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7. Table 4-58 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 Method Selected U: voltage www..com 12 Bit Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the voltage measuring range Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV " 1000 mV " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V " 10 V B TC-I: thermocouple (internal compensation) (thermovoltage measurement) TC-E: thermocouples (external compensation) (thermovoltage measurement) 2DMU: current (two-wire transmitter) 4DMU: current (four-wire transmitter) Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] Type E [NiCr-CuNi] Type J [Fe-CuNi] Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [Fe-CuNi] A You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in " 80 mV the voltage measuring range 4 to 20 mA " 3.2 mA " 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA D C You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the current measuring range R-4L: resistor (four-wire circuit) 150 W 300 W 600 W A You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the resistance measuring range S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-103 Analog Modules Table 4-58 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 2 Method Selected Measuring Range (Type of Sensor) 12 Bit, continued Measuring Range Module Setting A Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range The characteristics are linearized: TC-IL: thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] (linear, internal Type E [NiCr-CuNi] compensation) Type J [Fe-CuNi] (temperature measurement) Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [Fe-CuNi] TC-EL: thermocouples Type N [NiCrSi-NiSi] A S Pt 100 to DIN IEC 751 S Ni 100 according to IEC DIN 43760 Type E [NiCr-CuNi] www..com (linear, external compensation) Type J [Fe-CuNi] (temperature measurement) Type K [NiCr-Ni] Type L [Fe-CuNi] RTD-4L: bulb resistor linear, four-conductor terminal (temperature measurement) Pt 100 climate Ni 100 climate Pt 100 standard Ni 100 standard A S Thermocouple to DIN 584, type L to DIN 43710. Default settings The default settings of the module in STEP 7 are the "voltage" measuring method und the "" 10 V" measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit in STEP 7. Wire-break check The wire-break check is intended primarily for temperature measurements (thermocouples and bulb resistors). Special characteristics of the wire-break check for the 4 to 20 mA measuring range With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and enabled wire-break check, the analog input module enters wire break in the diagnosis when a current falls below 3.6 mA. If you have enabled diagnostics interrupt during configuration, the module additionally triggers a diagnostic interrupt. If no diagnostics interrupt has been enabled, the illuminated SF LED is the only indication of the wire break and you must evaluate the diagnostic bytes in the user program. With a parameterized measuring range of 4 to 20 mA and disabled wire-break check and enabled diagnostic interrupt, the module triggers a diagnostic interrupt when the underflow is reached. 4-104 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.21 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 (6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0) RTD Order Number 6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0 Characteristics www..com The SM 331; AI 8 RTD, 16 Bit (internal 24 bits by the sigma delta method) features the following characteristics: S S S S S S S S S S 8 differential inputs for RTD resistance temperature detector in 4 channel groups Optional setting of the resistance thermometer type per channel group Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels Measured-value resolution 23 Bit + sign (independent of integration time) Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt 8 channels with limit monitoring Programmable limit interrupt Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt Galvanic isolation to the backplane bus interface S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-105 Analog Modules Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD 1 M0+ M0K0 Ic0+ Ic02 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 DAC 10 11 ADC 12 13 14 15 M3K3 Ic3+ Ic316 17 18 19 20 DAC ADC L M 21 22 ADC 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 DAC 30 31 ADC 32 33 34 35 36 37 DAC 38 39 40 L+ M4+ M4Ic4+ Ic4M5+ M5Ic5+ Ic5M6+ M6Ic6+ Ic6M7+ M7Ic7+ Ic7K7 K6 K5 K4 DC to DC www..com K1 M1+ M1Ic1+ Ic1M2+ M2K2 Ic2+ Ic2M3+ Backplane bus IM M Figure 4-32 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD 4-106 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 RTD Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Operating mode Integrating 8 channels, Hardware Approx. 272 g Module-Specific Data Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Number of inputs Lenght of cable www..com 8 S S S S S Yes Parameters can be assigned Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution (including overrange) Suppression of interference voltage for interference interference frequency f1 in Hz 80 185* S Shielded max. 200 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L+ 24 VDC Yes max. 5 mA S Reverse polarity protection 100 Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Isolation 24 bits 400 / 60 / 50 S S S Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels In groups of Yes Yes S Yes 2 Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) None / low/ average/ high 200 ms 8 channels, Software Permitted potential difference S S Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (EISO) 60 VAC/75 VDC 60 VAC/75 VDC 500 VAC Operating mode Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) Insulation tested with Curr ent consumption S S S S S S Yes Parameters can be assigned Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution (including overrange) Suppression of interference voltage for interference interference frequency f1 in Hz 8 / 25 / 30 45 / 79 / 89* S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ max. 100 mA max. 240 mA typ. 4.6 W Power dissipation of the module 20 / 37 / 42 24 bits 400 / 60 / 50 Smoothing of the measured values None / low/ average/ high S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-107 Analog Modules Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) Operating mode Integration time/conversion time/ resolution (per channel) 40 / 79 / 84 ms 4 channels, Hardware Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C, with reference to the input range) " 0.02 % " 0.01 % S S S www..com Yes Interrupts 3.3 185* Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Parameters can be assigned Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution (including overrange) Suppression of interference voltage for interference interference frequency f1 in Hz S S Hardware interrupt Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible S S S Diagnostic functions 85** 24 bits 400 / 60 / 50 S S Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values) input resistance Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) None / low/ average/ high 10 ms S Resistance-type thermometer Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni 1000, Cu 10 150, 300, 600 W 35 VDC continuous 75 VDC for no more than 1 s (pulse duty factor 1 : 20) S Resistor Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 "1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1,2 , etc. Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) S S Common-mode interference (ECM < 60 VAC/75 VDC) Series-mode interference (peak value of the interference < rated value of the input range) > 100 dB Connection of the sensor S > 90 dB For measuring resistance With two-conductor terminal Possible (without resistance correction) With three-conductor terminal Possible Possible Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to 0 to 60 _C input range) With four-conductor terminal Characteristic linearization S S S S Resistance thermometer Resistance input " 1.0C " 0.1 % S Resistance thermometer Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, with reference to the input range) Resistance thermometer Resistance input " 0.5C " 0.05 % " 0.005 %/K Pt 100, Pt 200, Pt 500, Pt 1000, Ni 100, Ni 120, Ni 200, Ni 500, Ni 1000, Cu 10 (standard and climatic range) Degrees C; degrees Fahrenheit S Technical unit for measuring temperature Temperature error (with reference to the input range) * The resistance measurement for a three-conductor terminal is performed every 5 minutes. ** Open-circuit monitoring in operating mode 4 Channels, Hardware is performed every 3 seconds. 4-108 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.21.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 RTD RTD in STEP 7. You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. Table 4-59 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter Enable S Diagnostic interrupt S Hardware interrupt upon limit violation S Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Trigger for hardware interrupt RTD Default Settings No No Parameter Type Scope www..com Value Range Yes/no Yes/no Dynamic Module Yes/no No S Upper limit value S Lower limit value Diagnostics S Group diagnostics 32511 to - 32512 - 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no - Dynamic Channel No Static No S With wire-break check Measurement S Measuring method Channel group deactivated R-4L Resistance (four-conductor terminal) R-3L Resistance, (three-conductor terminal) RTD-4L Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) RTD-3L Bulb resistor (linear, three-conductor terminal) Refer to Section 4.21.2 for the measuring ranges of the input channels that you can set. Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit 8 channels, hardware filter 8 channels, software filter 4 channels, hardware filter RTD-4L Dynamic Channel group S Measuring range S Temperature unit S Operating mode Pt 100 climate Degrees Celsius 8 channels, hardware filter Dynamic Dynamic Module Module S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-109 Analog Modules Table 4-59 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter RTD, continued Default Settings 0.00385 Parameter Type Scope Value Range Platinum (Pt) 0.00385 W/W/C 0.003916 W/W/C 0.003902 W/W/C 0.003920 W/W/C 0.003851 W/W/C Nickel (Ni) 0.00618 W/W/C 0.00672 W/W/C Copper (Cu) 0.00472 W/W/C 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz S Temperature coefficient for temperature measurement with bulb resistor (RTD) Dynamic Channel group www..com S Interference suppression* 50/60/400 Hz None Dynamic Channel group Channel group S Smoothing None Low Average High Dynamic * 50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes; 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode Channel groups The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD are arranged in four groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC. Table 4-60 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 Channels ... Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel group 3 Channel group 2 Channel group 1 Channel group 0 RTD to Channel Groups ... form one Channel Group each 4-110 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit violation You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in STEP 7. Operating mode The SM 331; AI 8 S www..com RTD operates in one of the following modes: "Hardware Filter, 8 Channels" "Software Filter, 8 Channels" "Hardware Filter, 4 Channels" S S The operating mode affects the scan time of the module. High speed update mode With high speed updating, updating of not more than 4 channels is performed in only 10 ms. High speed updating is possible only in "Hardware Filter, 4 Channels" mode. In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different groups. You must only use the channels with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6) on the module. Scan time in "Hardware Filter, 8 Channels" mode In "Hardware Filter, 8 Channels" mode, the module always converts the analog values simultaneously, first for the channels with even numbers, followed the channels with odd numbers. The scan time for the module results in: Scan time = (tK + tU) 2 2 Scan time = (85 ms + 12 ms) Scan time = 194 ms tK: tU: channel conversion time for one channel time for switching to the other channel in the channel group S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-111 Analog Modules Scan time in "Software Filter, 8 Channels" mode In "Software Filter, 8 Channels" mode, analog-to-digital conversion is performed in exactly the same manner as in "Hardware Filter, 8 Channels" mode. In other words, the analog values are always converted simultaneously, first for the channels with even numbers and then for the channels with odd numbers. The channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference frequency suppression. This relationship is shown in the table that follows. Table 4-61 Scan Times in "Software Filter, 8 Channels" Mode www..com Programmed Interference Frequency Suppression 50 Hz 60 Hz 400 Hz * Channel Scan Time* 42 ms 37 ms 20 ms Module Scan Time (All Channels) 84 ms 74 ms 40 ms Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 12 ms switching time to the other channel in the channel group Scan time in "Hardware Filter, 4 Channels" mode In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different groups. The module converts the channels with even numbers simultaneously. This results for the scan time in: Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all operating modes. In the 8-Channel Hardware and Software Filter operating modes, the scan time of the module is doubled, irrespective of the number of channels for which Wire Break has been enabled. In the 4-Channel Hardware Filter operating mode, the module interrupts processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 170 ms. Smoothing of the measured values You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 4.6. Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage. The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported. 4-112 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Diagnostics You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the "group diagnosis" parameter in Table 4-44, on page 4-69. 4.21.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD www..com Measuring methods You can set the following measuring methods for the input channels: S S Resistance test Temperature measurement You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7. Unused channels Set the "measuring method" parameter for unused channels to "disabled". In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. You must terminate an unused channel of an enabled channel group with a nominal resistance in order to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel (refer to the block diagram, Figure 4-32, for the connection). In the "4-Channel Hardware Filter" operating mode, termination is not necessary provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are not monitored in this mode. Measuring ranges You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the "measuring range" parameter in STEP 7. Table 4-62 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 Method Selected R-3L: resistor (three-conductor terminal) R-4L: resistor (four-conductor terminal) Measuring Range 150 W 300 W 600 W RTD Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the resistance measuring range S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-113 Analog Modules Table 4-62 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 Method Selected RTD-3L: bulb resistor linear, three-conductor terminal (temperature measurement) Measuring Range Pt 100 climate Pt 200 climate Pt 500 climate Pt 1000 climate Ni 100 climate Ni 120 climate Ni 200 climate www..com RTD, continued Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range Ni 500 climate Ni 1000 climate Cu 10 climate RTD-4L: bulb resistor linear, four-conductor terminal (temperature measurement) Pt 100 standard Pt 200 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 100 standard Ni 120 standard Ni 200 standard Ni 500 standard Ni 1000 standard Cu 10 standard Default settings The default settings of the module are the "Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal)" measuring method and the "Pt 100 climate" measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 RTD in STEP 7. Measuring errors with common-mode voltages The SM 331; AI 8 RTD can perform measurements even when there are AC or DC common-mode voltages. For AC and DC common-mode voltages, common-mode rejection is performed by the input amplifiers. For common mode voltages < 120 Vr.m.s and 120 VDC, the rejection ratio of > 100 dB results in negligible measurement error. 4-114 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values The parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the AI 8 RTD from the range of values shown in Table 4-59. The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or Overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and can vary between the lower limits shown in the Table below and 32511 (7EFFH). www..com Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit values shown in the table below. Table 4-63 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 Measuring Range 150 W 300 W 600 W Pt 100 climate Pt 200 climate Pt 500 climate Pt 1000 climate Ni 100 climate Ni 120 climate Ni 200 climate Ni 500 climate Ni 1000 climate Cu 10 climate Pt 100 standard Pt 200 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 100 standard Ni 120 standard Ni 200 standard Ni 500 standard Ni 1000 standard Cu 10 standard 312.1 C - 240.1 C 295.1 C - 105.1 C 180.01 C 1000.1 C - 60.01 C - 243.1 C 295.01 C - 105.01 C Minimum Possible Upper Limit Value 176.384 W 352.768 W 705.535 W 155.01 C - - - - 145.01 C RTD Minimum Possible Lower Limit Value S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-115 Analog Modules 4.22 Analog Input Module SM 331; AI 8 (6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0) TC Order number 6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0 Characteristics www..com The SM 331; AI 8 TC, 16 Bit (internal 24 bits by the sigma delta method) features the following characteristics: S S S S S S S S S S S 8 differential inputs for thermocouples (TC) in 4 channel groups Optional setting of the thermocouple type per channel group Rapid measured value updating for up to 4 channels Measured-value resolution 23 Bit + sign (independent of integration time) Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt 8 channels with limit monitoring Programmable limit interrupt Programmable end-of-scan-cycle interrupt Programmable reaction to open thermocouple Galvanic isolation to the backplane bus interface 4-116 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 TC 1 2 3 4 L M 21 22 23 L+ DC to DC 24 25 26 27 28 29 TC+4 TC-4 TC+5 Ch4 www..com Channel 0 TC+0 TC-0 TC+1 TC-1 TC+2 Channel 2 Channel 3 TC-2 TC+3 TC-3 5 6 7 8 9 ADC 10 11 ADC 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Ext KV ADC ADC Channel 1 30 31 32 TC-5 TC+6 TC-6 TC+7 Ch5 Ch6 Backplane bus IM 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 M TC-7 KV+ KVlc+ lcExt KV Ch7 Channel number Figure 4-33 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 331; AI 8 TC S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-117 Analog Modules Technical specifications of the SM 331; AI 8 TC Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 Approx. 270 g Module-Specific Data Number of inputs Lenght of cable www..com 8 Analog Value Generation Measuring principle Operating mode Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Integrating 8 channels, Hardware S S S S S Parameters can be assigned Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution including sign Noise suppression for interference frequency f1 in Hz Yes 95 4 S Shielded max. 100 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials Power rated voltage of the electronics L+ 24 VDC Yes typ. 0.7 mA S Reverse polarity protection 24 bits 400/60/50 Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor Isolation S S S Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels In groups of Yes Yes Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) Operating mode None / low/ average/ high 190 ms 8 channels, Software Yes 2 Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Permitted potential difference S 60 VAC/75 VDC 60 VAC/75 VDC 500 VAC S S Parameters can be assigned Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution including sign Suppression of interference voltage for interference frequency f1 in Hertz Yes 23/72/83 4 Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (EISO) S S S S Insulation tested with Current consumption S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ max. 100 mA max. 240 mA typ. 3.0 W 24 bits 400/60/50 Power dissipation of the module Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) None / low/ average/ high 46/144/166 ms 4-118 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Analog Value Generation (Cont'd) Measuring principle Operating mode Integration time/conversion time/resolution (per channel) Integrating 4 channels, Hardware Interrupts Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics S S Hardware interrupt Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible S S www..com Parameters can be assigned Basic conversion time in ms Additional conversion time for open-circuit monitoring, in ms Resolution including sign Suppression of interference voltage for interference interference frequency f1 in Hertz Yes 3.30 93 1) Diagnostic functions S S S S S Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Data for Selecting a Sensor 24 bits 400/60/50 Input range (rated values)/ Input resistance S Thermocouples Types B, N, E, R, S, J, L, T, K, U 20 V continuous; 75 VDC for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Possible Possible Possible Smoothing of the measured values Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) None / low / average / high 10 ms Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) S S S S S S Characteristic linearization Temperature compensation Internal temperature compensation External temperature compensation with Pt 100 Compensation for temperature of 0 C at reference junction Compensation for temperature of 50 C at reference junction Technical unit for measuring temperature Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 1 %), (f1 = interference frequency) n = 1,2 , etc. S S Common-mode interference (Ucm < 60 VAC/75 VDC) Series-mode interference (peak value of the interference < rated value of the input range) > 100 dB > 90 dB 2) Possible Crosstalk between the inputs > 100 dB Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) (0 to 60C) S Degrees C/ degrees F S S Thermocouple 1.0 C 3) Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, with reference to the input range) Thermocouple 0.05 % 4), 5) 0.005 %/K 0.02 % 0.01 % Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C, with reference to the input range) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-119 Analog Modules Footnotes to technical specifications 1 Open-circuit monitoring in 4 Channels, Hardware operating mode is performed every 3 seconds. Series-mode rejection in 8 Channels, Software mode is reduced as follows: 50 Hz > 70 db 60 Hz > 70 db 400 Hz > 80 db The operating limit with internal compensation is derived from: Basic error of the analog input for the type of thermocouple used Accuracy of the temperature of the internal reference junction 1.5 C Temperature error in module temperature, TA The operating limit with external compensation is derived from: Basic error of the analog input for the type of thermocouple used Accuracy of the external PT 100 bulb resistor used Temperature error in module temperature, TA The operating limit with compensation of the external reference junction of 0 C/50 C is derived from: Basic error of the analog input for the type of thermocouple used Accuracy of the reference junction temperature Temperature error in module temperature, TA 2 3 www..com 4 The basic error includes the linearization error of the conversion from voltage into temperature and the basic error of the analog-to-digital conversion at TA=25 C. Type T Type U Type E Type J Type L Type K Type N Type R Type S Type B - 200 C - 270 C - 150 C - 200 C - 200 C - 270 C - 150 C - 210C - 150 C - 200 C - 200 C - 270 C - 200 C - 270 C +100 C - 50 C +100 C - 50 C +200 C +45 C to +400 C to - 200 C to +400 C to - 150 C to +1000 C to - 200 C to +1200 C to - 150 C to +900 C to - 150 C to +1372 C to - 200 C to 1300 C to - 200 C to 1768 C to +100 C to 1768 C to +100 C to +1802 C to +200 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 1.0 C 0.2 C 1.0 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.2 C 0.5 C 0.3 C 0.5 C 5 Owing to the slight rise over the range of approximately 0 C to 85 C, the lack of compensation of the reference junction temperature has only a negligible effect on a type B thermocouple. If there is no compensation and the measuring method "Compensation to 0 C" is set, the deviation for a type B thermocouple during temperature measurement is 200 C to 1802 C <0.5 C 4-120 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.22.1 Commissioning the SM 331; AI 8 TC TC Bit in STEP 7. You set the mode of operation of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. An overview of the parameters that you can set and their default settings are shown in the table below. Table 4-64 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter Enable S Diagnostic interrupt S Hardware interrupt upon limit violation S Hardware interrupt at end of cycle Trigger for hardware interrupt TC Default Settings No No Parameter Type Scope www..com Value Range Yes/no Yes/no Dynamic Module Yes/no No S Upper limit value S Lower limit value Diagnostics S Group diagnostics 32511 to - 32512 - 32512 to 32511 Yes/no Yes/no - Dynamic Channel No Static No S With wire-break check Measurement S Measuring method Channel group deactivated TC-IL TC-IL Thermocouple (linear, internal comparison) TC-EL Thermocouple (linear, external comparison) TC-L00C thermocouple (linear, ref. temperature 0C) TC-L50C thermocouple (linear, ref. temperature 50C) For the settable measuring ranges of the input channels, please refer to the individual module description. Overflow; underflow Degrees Celsius; degrees Fahrenheit Type K Dynamic Channel group S Measuring range S Reaction to open thermocouple Overflow Degrees Celsius Dynamic Module S Temperature unit S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-121 Analog Modules Table 4-64 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter TC, continued Default Settings 8 channels, hardware filter 50/60/400 Hz None Parameter Type Dynamic Scope Module Value Range 8 channels. hardware filter 8 channels. software filter 4 channels. hardware filter 50/60/400 Hz; 400 Hz; 60 Hz; 50 Hz; 10 Hz None Low Average High S Operating mode S Interference suppression* Dynamic Dynamic Channel group Channel group S Smoothing www..com * 50/60/400 Hz programmable only for modes 8 or 4-Channel Hardware Filter Modes; 50 Hz, 60 Hz or 400 Hz programmable only for mode 8-Channel Hardware Filter Mode Channel groups The channels of the SM 331; AI 8 TC are arranged in four groups of two. You can only ever assign parameters to one channel group. The table below shows which channels are parameterized as a channel group in each case. You will need the channel group number to set the parameters in the user program with an SFC. Table 4-65 Assignment of Channels of the SM 331; AI 8 Channels ... Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 Channel 4 Channel 5 Channel 6 Channel 7 Channel group 3 Channel group 2 Channel group 1 Channel group 0 TC to Channel Groups ... form one Channel Group each Special characteristic of channel groups for hardware interrupts upon limit violation You can set the upper and lower limits for each channel with hardware interrupts in STEP 7. 4-122 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Reaction to open thermocouple You can assign parameters to "Overflow" or "Underflow" as a function of the process you want to control. You should program "Overflow" for heat-producing processes. When a thermocouple opens, 7FFFH is the value supplied by the module. The control loop then shuts down the production of heat automatically. You should program "Underflow" for refrigeration processes. When a thermocouple opens, 8000H is the value supplied by the module. The control loop then shuts down the refrigeration automatically. www..com Operating mode The SM 331; AI 8 TC operates in one of the following modes: S S S "Hardware Filter, 8 Channels" "Software Filter, 8 Channels" "Hardware Filter, 4 Channels" The operating mode affects the scan time of the module. High speed update mode With high speed updating, updating of not more than 4 channels is performed in only 10 ms. High speed updating is possible only in "Hardware Filter, 4 Channels" mode. In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different groups. You must only use the channels with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6) on the module. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-123 Analog Modules Scan time in "Hardware Filter, 8 Channels" mode In "Hardware Filter, 8 Channels" mode, the module always converts the analog values simultaneously, first for the channels with even numbers, followed the channels with odd numbers. The scan time for the module results in: Scan time = (tK + tU) 2 2 Scan time = (91 ms + 7 ms) Scan time = 196 ms www..com tK: tU: channel conversion time for one channel time for switching to the other channel in the channel group Scan time in "Software Filter, 8 Channels" mode In "Software Filter, 8 Channels" mode, analog-to-digital conversion is performed in exactly the same manner as in "Hardware Filter, 8 Channels" mode. In other words, the analog values are always converted simultaneously, first for the channels with even numbers and then for the channels with odd numbers. The channel conversion time depends, however, on the programmed interference frequency suppression. This relationship is shown in the table that follows. Table 4-66 Scan Times in "Software Filter, 8 Channels" Mode Programmed Interference Frequency Suppression 50 Hz 60 Hz 400 Hz * Channel Scan Time* 83 ms 72 ms 23 ms Module Scan Time (All Channels) 166 ms 144 ms 46 ms Channel scan time = channel conversion time + 7 ms switching time to the other channel in the channel group Scan time in "Hardware Filter, 4 Channels" mode In this mode, the module does not switch between the channels of the different groups. The module converts the channels with even numbers simultaneously. This results for the scan time in: Channel conversion time = channel scan time = module scan time = 10 ms 4-124 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Prolongation of the scan time with a wire-break check The wire-break check is a software function of the module that is available in all operating modes. The 8-Channel Hardware and Software Filter operating modes prolong the scan time of the module by 4 ms, irrespective of the number of channels for which Wire Break has been enabled. In the 4-Channel Hardware Filter operating mode, the module interrupts processing of the input data 170 ms and performs a wire-break check. In other words, each wire-break check prolongs the scan time of the module by 93 ms. www..com Smoothing of the measured values You fill find information that is generally applicable to the smoothing of analog values in Section 4.6. Special characteristic with short-circuit to M or L If you short an input channel to M or L, the module does not suffer any damage. The channel continues to issue valid data; neither is a diagnosis reported. Diagnostics You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the "group diagnosis" parameter in Table 4-44, on page 4-69. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-125 Analog Modules 4.22.2 Measuring Methods and Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 TC Measuring methods As the measuring method for the input channels, you can set the temperature measurement with different thermocouples. You perform the setting with the "measuring method" parameter in STEP 7. www..com Unused channels Set the "measuring method" parameter for unused channels to "disabled". In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. You must terminate an unused channel in an enabled channel group to avoid diagnostic errors for the unused channel. To do this, short the Plus input and Minus input of the channel. In the "4-Channel Hardware Filter" operating mode, termination is not necessary provided that you have disabled the unused channel groups. Channels 1, 3, 5 and 7 are not monitored in this mode. Measuring ranges You perform setting of the measuring ranges with the "measuring range" parameter in STEP 7. Table 4-67 Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 Method Selected TC-L00C: (thermocouple, linear, reference temperature 0 C) TC-L50C: (thermocouple, linear, reference temperature 50 C) TC-IL: (thermocouple, linear, internal compensation) TC-EL: (thermocouple, linear, external compensation) Measuring Range Type B Type E Type J Type K Type L Type N Type R Type S Type T Type U TC Description You will find the digitized analog values in Section 4.3.1 in the temperature range 4-126 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Default settings The default settings of the module are the "Thermocouple (linear, internal compensation)" measuring method and the "Type K" measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 331; AI 8 TC 24 Bit in STEP 7. Measuring errors with common-mode voltages The SM 331; AI 8 TC can perform measurements even when there are AC or DC common-mode voltages. www..com For AC and DC common-mode voltages, common-mode rejection is performed by the input amplifiers. For common mode voltages < 120 Vr.m.s and 120 VDC, the rejection ratio of > 100 dB results in negligible measurement error. Special characteristic of parameter assignment to upper and lower limit values The parameterizable limit values (triggers for hardware interrupt) differ for the AI 8 TC from the range of values shown in Table 4-64. The reason for this is that numerical methods in the module software for evaluating the process variables prevent values up to 32511 from being reported in some cases. The process input value at which a hardware interrupt for an underflow or Overflow occurs depends on the calibration factors for an individual channel and can vary between the lower limits shown in the Table below and 32511 (7EFFH). Limit values should not be set at values higher than the minimum potential limit values shown in the table below. Table 4-68 Minimum Possible Upper and Lower Limit Values of SM 331; AI 8 Measuring Range Type B Type E Type J Type K Type L Type N Type R Type S Type T Type U Minimum Possible Upper Limit Value 1802.1 C 1000.1 C 1200.1 C 1372.1 C 900.1 C 1300.1 C 1768.1 C 1768.1 C 400.1 C 600.1 C TC Minimum Possible Lower Limit Value 45.1 C - 270.1 C - 210.1 C - 270.1 C - 200.1 C - 270.1 C - 50.1 C - 50.1 C - 270.1 C - 200.1 C S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-127 Analog Modules 4.23 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 (6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0) 12 Bit; Order number 6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0 Characteristics www..com The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 features: S S 4 outputs in 4 channel groups 12 Bit has the following characteristic The individual output channels can be programmed as - voltage outputs - current outputs S S S S S Resolution 12 bits Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output Isolated to backplane bus interface and load voltage 4-128 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit Fault indicator - red Current output L+ Internal supply DAC Voltage outputs SF 24V QI0 CH0 MANA QI1 CH1 MANA QV0 S0 + S0* CH0 MANA QV1 S1 + S1* CH1 MANA www..com Galvanic Isolation QI2 Backplane bus interface SF CH2 MANA QI3 CH3 MANA QV2 S2 + S2* CH2 MANA QV3 S3 + S3* CH3 MANA M M Figure 4-34 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-129 Analog Modules Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 12 Bit Analog Value Generation Resolution including sign Approx. 220 g Module-Specific Data S S " 10 V; " 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA 11 bits + sign 12 bits max. 0.8 ms Number of outputs Lenght of cable www..com 4 Conversion time (per channel) Settling time S Shielded max. 200 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Yes S S S S S S S S For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load 0.1 ms 3.3 ms 0.5 ms Reverse polarity protection Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes Yes Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range) S S S S Voltage outputs Current outputs " 0.5 % " 0.6 % No Yes Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, with reference to the output range) Voltage outputs Current outputs " 0.2 % " 0.3 % " 0.02 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 % Permitted potential difference S S S Between outputs and MANA (ECM) Between S- and MANA (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (EISO) 3 VDC 3 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 600 VDC Temperature error (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C, with reference to the output range) Output ripple; band width 0 to 50 kHz (with reference to the output range) Insulation tested with Current consumption " 0.05 % S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (without load) max. 60 mA max. 240 mA typ. 3 W Interrupts Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics S Diagnostic Interrupt Power dissipation of the module Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible Parameters can be assigned Diagnostic functions S S Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Substitute value can be applied 4-130 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (nominal values) Destruction limit against voltages/currents applied from outside S S Voltage 10 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA S S S Voltage to the outputs against MANA Current max 18 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) max. DC 50 mA Current Connection of actuators For voltage output - Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) Possible Load resistance (in the nominal range of the output) www..com S S For voltage outputs - Capacitive load min. 1 k max. 1 F max. 500 max. 600 W max. 10 mH For current outputs - - At ECM < 1V Inductive load S For current output - Two-conductor connection Possible Voltage outputs S S S Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current Yes max. 25 mA Current outputs No-load voltage max. 18 V 4.23.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit Note When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms. Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 4-40, on page 4-41. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-131 Analog Modules Assigning parameters to channels You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit individually. You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel. When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit is assigned to a channel group in this instance - in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0. www..com Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output. Diagnostics You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the "group diagnosis" parameter in Table 4-45, on page 4-69. 4.23.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit Connecting the analog outputs You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You perform connection of the outputs with the "output type" parameter in STEP 7. Unused channels So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit remain de-energized, you must set the "output type" parameter to "disabled" and leave the terminal open. 4-132 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Output ranges You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7. Table 4-69 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA 12 Bit Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.2 in the voltage and current output ranges Current www..com Default settings The default settings of the module are "Voltage" for the output type and "" 10 V" for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit in STEP 7. Wire-break check The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 only for current outputs. 12 Bit carries out a wire-break check Short-circuit test The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 only for voltage outputs. 12 Bit carries out a short-circuit test Substitute values You can configure the SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit for the CPU operating mode STOP as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range. Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA The following special characteristic applies to output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA: You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to become de-energized (refer to Tables 4-33 and 4-35 on pages 4-25 and 4-26). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-133 Analog Modules 4.24 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 (6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0) 12 Bit; Order number 6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0 Characteristics www..com The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 features: S S 2 outputs in 2 channel groups 12 Bit has the following characteristic The individual output channels can be programmed as - voltage outputs - current outputs S S S S S Resolution 12 bits Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output Isolated to backplane bus interface and load voltage 4-134 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Terminal connection diagram and block diagram of the SM 332; AO 2 Fault indicator - red 12 Bit Current output L+ Internal supply DAC 24V QI0 CH0 Voltage outputs SF www..com Galvanic isolation MANA QI1 CH1 MANA QV0 S0 + S0* CH0 MANA QV1 S1 + S1* CH1 MANA Backplane bus interface SF M M Figure 4-35 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-135 Analog Modules Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W Weight H D 40 125 120 Analog Value Generation Resolution including sign Approx. 220 g Module-Specific Data S S " 10 V; " 20 mA; 4 to 20 mA; 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V; 0 to 20 mA 11 bits + sign 12 bits max. 0.8 ms Number of outputs Lenght of cable 2 Conversion time (per channel) max. 200 m Settling time S www..com Shielded Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Yes S S S S S Reverse polarity protection S S S For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load 0.1 ms 3.3 ms 0.5 ms Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes Yes Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range) S S S S Voltage outputs Current outputs " 0.5 % " 0.6 % No Yes Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, with reference to the output range) Voltage outputs Current outputs " 0.2 % " 0.3 % " 0.02 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 % Permitted potential difference S S S Between outputs and MANA (ECM) Between S- and MANA (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (EISO) 3 VDC 3 VDC 75 VDC / 60 VAC 600 VDC Temperature error (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C, with reference to the output range) Output ripple; band width 0 to 50 kHz (with reference to the output range) Insulation tested with Current consumption " 0.05 % S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (without load) max. 60 mA Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics max. 135 mA typ. 3 W Interrupts Power dissipation of the module S Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible Parameters can be assigned Diagnostic functions S S Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Substitute value can be applied 4-136 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (nominal values) Destruction limit against voltages/currents applied from outside S S Voltage 10 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA S S S Voltage to the outputs against MANA Current max 18 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) max. DC 50 mA Current Connection of actuators For voltage output - Two-wire circuit Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) Possible Possible - Load resistance (in the nominal range of the output) www..com S S For voltage outputs - capacitive load min. 1 k max. 1 F max. 500 max. 600 W max. 10 mH For current outputs - - At ECM < 1V Inductive load S For current output - Two-conductor circuit Possible Voltage outputs S S S Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current Yes max. 25 mA Current outputs No-load voltage max. 18 V 4.24.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit Note When switching on and off the rated load voltage (L+), wrong intermediate values can occur across the output for approximately 10 ms. Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 4-40, on page 4-41. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-137 Analog Modules Assigning parameters to channels You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit individually. You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel. When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit is assigned to a channel group in this instance - in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0. www..com Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit is in operation, incorrect intermediate values can arise across the output. Diagnostics You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the "group diagnosis" parameter in Table 4-45, on page 4-69. 4.24.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit Connecting the analog outputs You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You perform connection of the outputs with the "output type" parameter in STEP 7. Unused channels So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit remain de-energized, you must set the "output type" parameter to "disabled" and leave the terminal open. 4-138 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Output ranges You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7. Table 4-70 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 2 Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA 12 Bit Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.2 in the voltage and Current Output Range Current www..com Default settings The default settings of the module are "Voltage" for the output type and "" 10 V" for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit in STEP 7. Wire-break check The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 only for current outputs. 12 Bit carries out a wire-break check Short-circuit test The analog output module SM 332; AO 2 only for voltage outputs. 12 Bit carries out a short-circuit check Substitute values You can configure the SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit for the CPU operating mode STOP as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range. Special characteristic of substitute values for output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA The following special characteristic applies to output ranges 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA: You have to set the substitute value E500H for the output to remain de-energized (refer to Tables 4-33 and 4-35 on pages 4-25 and 4-26). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-139 Analog Modules 4.25 Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 (6ES7 332-7ND00-0AB0) 16 Bit; Order number 6ES7 332-7ND00-0AB0 Characteristics www..com The analog output module SM 332; AO 4 features: S S 4 outputs in 4 channel groups 16 Bit has the following characteristic The individual output channels can be programmed as - voltage outputs - current outputs S S S S S Resolution of 16 bits Programmable diagnostics Programmable diagnostic interrupt Programmable substitute value output Galvanic isolation between: - backplane bus interface and analog output channel - the different analog output channels - analog output and L+, M - backplane bus interface and L+, M 4-140 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Terminal connection and block diagram of analog output module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit Fault indicator - red 1 SF Galvanic isolation 3 4 www..com 5 6 7 8 9 10 MANA 1 MANA 0 QI1 QI0 QV 0 S 0+ CH0 S 0 - CH0 L+ 24 V Current Outputs Voltage Outputs MANA 0 QV 1 S 1+ CH1 S 1 - CH1 MANA 1 11 12 Backplane bus IM 13 14 15 16 17 18 QI2 QV 2 S 2+ CH2 S 2 - CH2 MANA 2 QI3 MANA 2 QV 3 S 3+ CH3 S 3 - MANA 3 CH3 MANA 3 20 M Figure 4-36 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-141 Analog Modules Technical specifications of the SM 332; AO 4 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 16 Bit Analog Value Generation Resolution including sign 15 bits + sign 13 bits 14 bits max. 1.5 ms Approx. 220 g Module-Specific Data S S 1 to 5 V 4 to 20 mA Conversion time (per channel) Number of outputs Lenght of cable www..com 4 Settling time S Shielded max. 200 m Voltages, Currents, and Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC Yes S S S For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load 0.2 ms 1.0 ms 0.2 ms Suppression of Interference, Limits of Error Crosstalk between outputs > 100 dB S S S S S Reverse polarity protection Isolation Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels Between channels and load voltage L+ Yes Yes Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range) S S Voltage outputs Current outputs 0.12 % 0.18 % Yes Yes Basic error (operational limit at 25 C, with reference to the output range) Permitted potential difference S S Voltage outputs Current outputs 0.01 % 0.01 % 0.001 % 0.004 % 0.002 % S S Between the outputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal (EISO) 200 VDC / 120 VAC 200 VDC / 120 VAC 1500 VAC Temperature errror (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C, with reference to the output range) Output ripple; bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz (with reference to the output range) Insulation tested with Current consumption S S From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (without load) max. 60 mA max. 240 mA typ. 3 W 0.05 % Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts S Diagnostic interrupt Parameters can be assigned Parameters can be assigned Red LED (SF) Possible Parameters can be assigned Diagnostic functions S S Group error display Diagnostic information can be displayed Substitute value can be applied 4-142 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (nominal values) Current outputs S 10 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V 20 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA No-load voltage max. 18 V S S Voltage Destruction limit against voltages/currents applied from outside Current S Voltage to the outputs against MANA max. 15 V continuous 75 VDC for no more than 0.1 s (pulse duty factor 1 : 20) max. DC 50 mA Load resistance (in the nominal range of the output) www..com S min. 1 k max. 1 F max. 500 max. 1 mH Current S S S S For voltage outputs - capacitive load Connection of actuators S For voltage output - Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) Possible For current outputs - inductive load Voltage outputs Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current Yes max. 40 mA S For current output - Four-conductor connection Possible 4.25.1 Commissioning the SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit Parameter You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 4-40, on page 4-41. Assigning parameters to channels You can configure each output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit individually. You can thus assign separate parameters for each output channel. When you set the parameters with SFCs in the user program, the parameters are assigned to channel groups. Every output channel of the SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit is assigned to a channel group in this instance - in other words, for example output channel 0 = channel group 0. Note If you modify output ranges when the analog output module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit is in operation, incorrect intermediate values may arise across the output. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-143 Analog Modules Diagnostics You will find the diagnostic messages that are grouped under the "group diagnosis" parameter in Table 4-45, on page 4-69. 4.25.2 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit www..com Connecting the analog outputs You can connect the outputs as voltage or current outputs, or disable them. You perform connection of the outputs with the "output type" parameter in STEP 7. Unused channels So that unused output channels of the SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit remain de-energized, you must set the "output type" parameter to "disabled" and leave the terminal open. Output ranges You program the output ranges for voltage and current outputs in STEP 7. Table 4-71 Output Ranges of the Analog Output Module SM 332; AO 4 Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA 16 Bit Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.2 in the voltage and Current Output Range Current Default settings The default settings of the module are "Voltage" for the output type and "" 10 V" for the output range. You can use this combination of output type and output range without parameterizing the SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit in STEP 7. Substitute values You can configure the SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit for the CPU operating mode STOP as follows: Outputs De-energized, Hold Last Value or Inject Substitute Values. If you inject substitute values, they must be within the output range. 4-144 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.26 Analog Input/Output Module SM334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit; (6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0) Order number 6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The analog input/output module SM 334: AI 4/AO 2 characteristic features: S S S S S S S S Four input and two output channels Resolution 8 bits 8/8 Bit has the following Not parameterizable, setting of measurement and output type by means of wiring Measuring range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA Output range of 0 to 10 V or 0 to 20 mA Both voltage and current output options Isolated from the backplane bus interface Non-isolated to load voltage S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-145 Analog Modules Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit Select the measuring method of the input channels and the output type of the output channels via the wiring. L+ Internal supply 24V A ADC www..com A V A V M1* CH1 MI1 + MV2 + M2* CH2 MI2 + V Backplane bus interface A DAC MANA V A V MV3 + M3* MI3 + CH3 QV0 MANA CH0 QI0 QV1 MANA CH1 QI1 Voltage current outputs MANA M M A Figure 4-37 Module View and Block Diagram of the Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit 4-146 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Voltage current measurement V MV0 + M0* CH0 MI0 + MV1 + Analog Modules Technical specifications of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 8/8 Bit max. 0.8 ms max. 5 ms Time constant of the input filter Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) Approx. 285 g Module-Specific Data Analog Value Generation for the Outputs Resolution including sign Conversion time (per channel) Settling time 8 bits max. 500 ms 0.3 ms 3.0 ms 0.3 ms Number of inputs Number of outputs www..com Lenght of cable 4 2 S Shielded max. 200 m Voltage, Currents, Potentials S S S For resistive load For capacitive load For inductive load Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Suppression of interference, Limits of Error Suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 " 1 %) (f1 = interference frequency) Power rated voltage of the rated 24 VDC electronics voltage and rated load voltage L+ Isolation S S S Common mode interference (Upp < 1 V) > 60 dB > 50 dB Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels No Yes Crosstalk between the outputs Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) No S S S S Voltage input Current input " 0.9 % " 0.8 % Permitted potential difference S S Basic error (operational limit at 25 C , with reference to the input range) 1 VDC 1 VDC 500 VDC Voltage input Current input " 0.7 % " 0.6 % " 0.005 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 % Between inputs and MANA (ECM) Between the inputs (ECM) Insulation tested with Current consumption Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 C with reference to the input range) Output ripple; band width 0 to 50 kHz (with reference to the output range) S S From the backplane bus From power supply and load voltage L+ (no load) max. 55 mA max. 110 mA typ. 3 W Power dissipation of the module Analog Value Generation for the Inputs Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time (per channel) Instantaneous value conversion " 0.05 % S S S S Parameters can be assigned Integration time in milliseconds Basic conversion time including Integration time in s Resolution including sign No 500 100 8 bits S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-147 Analog Modules Interference Suppression, Error Limits for the Outputs Crosstalk between the outputs > 40 dB Data for Selecting an Actuator Output ranges (nominal values) Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range) S S S S S S S Voltage Current 0 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA S S S www..com S Voltage outputs Current outputs "0.6 % "1.0 % Load resistance (in the nominal range of the output) For voltage outputs - - capacitive load inductive load For current outputs min. 5 kW max. 1 mF max. 300 W max. 1 mH Basic error (operational limit at 25 _C with reference to the output range) Voltage outputs Current outputs "0.5 % "0.5 % "0.02 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 % Voltage outputs Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current Yes max. 11 mA Temperature error (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C with reference to the output range) Output ripple (bandwidth with reference to the output range) Current outputs No-load voltage max. 15 V " 0.05 % Destruction limit against voltages/currents applied from outside S S S Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts Diagnostic functions None None Voltage to the outputs against MANA Current max. 15 V continuous; max. 50 mA DC Connection of actuators For voltage output Two-conductor connection Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) Possible Not possible Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/ Input resistance S S Voltage Current 0 to 10 V/100 k W 0 to 20 mA/50 W 20 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) 40 mA Connection of the sensor S For measuring current Two-conductor connection Possible Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Maximum input current for current input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensor S S For measuring voltage For measuring current As two-wire transmitter As four-wire transmitter Possible Not possible Possible 4-148 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.26.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit The analog/output module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 Bit is a non-isolated module. You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit. Important information on connecting the module Note Note when connecting the SM 334 that: www..com S the analog chassis ground MANA (terminal 15 or 18) is connected to the chassis ground M of the CPU and/or the interface module (IM). Use a wire with a minimum cross-section of 1 mm2 for this. If there is no ground connection between MANA and M, the module switches off. Inputs are read with 7FFFH; outputs return a value of 0. If the module is run without a ground connection for some time, it may be destroyed. S the supply voltage for the CPU and/or the interface module (IM) must not be connected with reversed polarity. Reverse polarity causes the destruction of the module because MANA is subjected to an unauthorized high potential (+24 V). Addressing The inputs and outputs of the module are addressed as of the initial module address. The address of a channel is obtained from the module start address and an address offset. Input addresses The following addresses apply to the inputs: Channel 0 1 2 3 Initial module address Module start address + 2 bytes address offset Module start address + 4 bytes address offset Module start address + 6 bytes address offset Address S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-149 Analog Modules Output addresses The following channel addresses apply to the module outputs: Channel 0 1 Initial module address Module start address + 2 bytes address offset Address www..com 4.26.2 Measuring/Output Method and Measuring/Output Range of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit You cannot program the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit. Selecting the measurement method and the type of output Select the measuring method of an input channel (voltage, current) by wiring the input channel appropriately. Select the type of output of an output channel (voltage, current) by wiring the output channel appropriately. Unused channels You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum noise immunity for the analog module. Unused output channels must be left open. Measuring ranges The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 20 mA. 8/8 Bit has the measuring ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution and no negative measuring ranges. Take this into account when you read measured value tables 4-11 and 4-13 on pages 4-13 and 4-14. Output ranges The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit has the output ranges 0 to 10 V and 0 to 20 mA. Unlike the other analog modules, the SM 334 has a lower resolution the analog outputs do not have underranges. Take this into account when you read tables 4-33 and 4-35 on pages 4-25 and 4-26. 4-150 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.27 Analog Input/Output Module SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit; (6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0) Order number 6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0 www..com Characteristics The SM 334 has the following characteristic features: S S S S 4 inputs in two groups 2 outputs (voltage outputs) Resolution of 12 bits + sign Measuring method selectable - Voltage - Resistors - Temperature S S Isolated to the backplane bus interface Isolated to load voltage S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-151 Analog Modules Terminal connection and block diagram of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2 Voltage input 12 Bit Resistance test L+ 24V Current source Internal supply IC01+ M0 + M0* CH0 Multiplexer www..com Backplane bus interface MANA M2+ M1 + CH1 M1* IC01* IC23+ CH2 M2 + M2* M3 + M3* MANA DAC M2* M3 + M3* IC23* CH0 CH1 CH3 MANA MANA M V V M QV0 MANA QV1 MANA Voltage outputs Figure 4-38 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit 4-152 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Technical specifications of the SM334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 mm Analog Value Generation for the Inputs Measuring principle Integration time/conversion time (per channel) Integrating Approx. 200 g Module-Specific Data S S S S S S Number of inputs 4 4 2 max. 100 m Parameters can be assigned Integration time in ms Basic conversion time including Integration time in ms Additional conversion time for measuring resistance, in ms Resolution in bits including sign Suppression of interference voltage for interference frequency f1 in Hertz Yes 162/3 72 20 85 S www..com For resistance-type sensor Number of outputs Shielded line length Voltage, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L + 24 VDC Yes 24 VDC 72 85 S Reverse polarity protection 12 bits 60 12 bits 50 Supply voltage of the rated electronics voltage and rated load voltage L+ Power supply of the transmitters S S S S S Short-circuit-proof Yes Smoothing of the measured values Time constant of the input filter Parameters can be assigned in 2 stages 0.9 ms 350 ms Constant measured current for resistance-type sensor For PT 100 At 10 kW Between channels and backplane bus Between channels and power supply of the electronics Between the channels Permitted potential difference typ. 490 mA typ. 105 mA Yes Yes Basic response time of module (all channels enabled) Analog Value Generation for the Outputs Resolution including sign Conversion time (per channel) Settling time 12 bits 500 ms Isolation S S For resistive load For capacitive load max. 0.8 ms max. 0.8 ms No S S S Between inputs and MANA (ECM) Between the inputs (ECM) Between MANA and Minternal-(EISO) 1V 1V 75 VDC / 60 VAC 500 VDC max. 60 mA max. 80 mA typ. 2 W Insulation tested with Current consumption S S From the backplane bus From power supply and load voltage L+ (no load) Power dissipation of the module S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-153 Analog Modules Interference Suppression, Error Limits for Inputs Suppression of interference for f = nx (f1 " 1 %) (f1 = interference frequency) Interrupts Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics None None S S Diagnostic functions Common-mode interference (Upp < 1 V) Series-mode interference (peak value of the interference < rated value of the input range) > 38 dB Data for Selecting a Sensor Input range (rated values)/ Input resistance > 36 dB Crosstalk between the inputs www..com > 88 dB S S S Voltage Resistor Temperature 0 to 10 V 10 kW PT 100 100 kW 10 mW 10 mW Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the input range) Maximum input voltage for voltage input (destruction limit) Connection of the sensor S S S S S S 20 V continuous; 75 V for max. 1 s (pulse duty factor 1:20) Voltage input Resistor input Temperature input 0 to 10 V 10 k W Pt 100 "0.7 % " 3.5 % "1% Basic error limit (operational limit at 25 _C, with reference to the input range) Voltage input Resistor input Temperature input 0 to 10 V 10 k W Pt 100 "0.01 %/K " 0.05 % " 0.05 % "0.5 % "2.8 % "0.8 % S S For measuring voltage For measuring resistance Possible With two-conductor terminal Possible With three-conductor terminal With four-conductor terminal Characteristic linearization Possible Possible Parameters can be assigned PT 100 (climate range) Degrees Celsius Temperature error (with reference to the input range) Linearity error (with reference to the input range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C with reference to the input range) S For RTD Resistance Temperature Detector User data in engineering format Data for Selecting an Actuator Output range (rated value) Interference Suppression, Error Limits for Outputs Crosstalk between the outputs > 88 dB S S S S S Voltage 0 to 10 V Operational limit (in the entire temperature range, with reference to the output range) Load resistance (in the nominal range of the output) For voltage outputs Capacitive load min. 2.5 kW max. 1.0 mF S S Voltage outputs "1.0 % Basic error limit (operational error limit at 25 _C, with reference to the output range) Voltage outputs "0.85 % "0.01 %/K " 0.01 % " 0.01 % Voltage outputs Short-circuit protection Short-circuit current Yes max. 10 mA Temperature error (with reference to the output range) Linearity error (with reference to the output range) Repeatability (in steady state at 25 _C, with reference to the output range) Output ripple; bandwidth 0 to 50 kHz (with reference to the output range) Destruction limit against voltages/ currents applied from outside S S Voltage to the outputs against MANA max. 15 V continuous Connection of actuators " 0.1 % For voltage output Two-conductor connection Four-conductor connection (measuring circuit) Possible Not possible 4-154 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules 4.27.1 Commissioning the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit Note Below the rated load voltage range, incorrect intermediate values occur at the output when the rated load voltage supply (L+) is switched on/off. www..com Tool for parameter assignment STEP 7 V 4.0 The SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 or higher. 12 Bit is contained in the module catalog in STEP 7 V.4.0 Parameters You will find a description of the general procedure for assigning parameters to analog modules in Section 4.7. You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values in Table 4-41, on page 4-42. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-155 Analog Modules 4.27.2 Measuring/output method and measuring/output range of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit Connecting the inputs and outputs You can connect the inputs as voltage, resistance or temperature measurement inputs, or deactivate them. You can connect the outputs as voltage, or disable them. www..com Perform connection of the inputs and outputs with the parameters "measuring method" and "output method" in STEP 7. Connection options for the input channels You can connect the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit in the following combinations: Channel Channels 0 and 1 Channels 2 and 3 Wiring Versions S S S S S S S 2 x temperature or 2 x resistance 2 x voltage, 2 x resistance, 2 x temperature, 1 x temperature and 1 x voltage, or 1 x resistance and 1 x voltage Note Simultaneous connection of a temperature sensor and a resistor to channels 0 and 1 and 2 and 3 is not allowed. Reason: common current source for both channels. Unused channels Set the "measuring method" parameter for unused input channels to "disabled". In this way you shorten the scan time of the module. You must short-circuit unused input channels and you should connect them to MANA. In this way, you obtain an optimum interference immunity for the analog input module. So that unused output channels of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit remain de-energized, you must set the "output type" parameter to "disabled" and leave the terminal open. 4-156 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Analog Modules Measuring ranges Use STEP 7 for programming the measuring ranges. Table 4-72 Measuring Ranges of the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 Method Selected U: voltage R-4L: resistor (four-conductor terminal) www..com 12 Bit Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.1 Measuring Range 0 to 10 V 10 kW Pt 100 climate RTD-4L: bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal) (temperature measurement) Default settings of inputs The default settings of the module are the "Bulb resistor (linear, four-conductor terminal)" measuring method and the "Pt 100 climate" measuring range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit in STEP 7. Output ranges Use STEP 7 for programming the output ranges. Table 4-73 Output Ranges of the SM SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 Selected Type of Output Voltage Output Range 0 to 10 V 12 Bit Description You will find the digital analog values in Section 4.3.2 in the voltage output range Default settings of outputs The default settings of the module are "Voltage" for the output type and "0 to 10 V" for the output range. You can use this combination of measuring method and measuring range without parameterizing the SM 334; AI4/AO 2 2 Bit in STEP 7. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 4-157 Analog Modules www..com 4-158 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules 5 Changes and improvements since the previous version of the reference manual www..com A new overview section will make it easier for you to access the information: S The "Module Overview"section shows you the modules that are available, together with their most important characteristics, and helps you quickly to find the module suitable for your task. In this Chapter Section 5.1 5.2 5.3 5.4 Module Overview Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16; (6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0) Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0) Position Detection Module SM 338; POS-INPUT; (6ES7 338-4BC00-0AB0) Contents Page 5-2 5-3 5-5 5-7 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-1 Other Signal Modules 5.1 Module Overview Introduction The following table summarizes the most important characteristics of the signal modules described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task. Table 5-1 www..com Other Signal Modules Characteristics at a Glance Module Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 Dummy Module DM 370 Position Detection Module SM 338; POS-INPUT Characteristics Number of inputs/outputs S Up to 16 inputs or outputs Reserves one slot for one non-programmed module S 3 inputs for connection of encoders absolute (SSI) S 2 digital inputs for freezing encoder values Suitable for... Simulation of: Dummy for: S 16 inputs or S 16 outputs or S 8 input and 8 outputs S Interface Modules S Non-programmed signal modules Position detection with up to 3 encoders absolute (SSI) Encoder types: Encoder absolute (SSI) with 13 bit, 21 bit or 25 bit message frame length Data formats: Gray code or binary code S Modules occupying two slots Programmable diagnostics Diagnostic Interrupt Special Features No No The function can be set using screwdriver No No When replacing the DM 370 with anther module, the mechanical configuration and the address assignment of the overall configuration remain unchanged No Adjustable Encoders absolute with a monoflop time of more than 64 ms must not be used on the SM 338 5-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules 5.2 Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16; (6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0) Order number 6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0 Characteristics www..com The simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 has the following salient features: S Simulation of: - 16 inputs or - 16 outputs or - 8 inputs and 8 outputs (with the same start addresses each!) S S Status displays for simulation of inputs and outputs The function can be set using screwdriver Note Do not actuate the switch for setting the mode when the CPU is in the RUN mode! Configuration with STEP 7 Simulator module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 is not included in the module catalog of STEP 7. In other words, the Order Number of SM 374 is not detected by STEP 7. You must therefore "simulate" the desired function of the simulator module for configuration in the following manner: S If you want to use the SM 374 with 16 inputs, enter the Order Number of a digital input module with 16 inputs in STEP 7; Example: 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0 S If you want to use the SM 374 with 16 outputs, enter the Order Number of a digital input module with 16 outputs in STEP 7; Example: 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0 S If you want to use SM 374 with 8 inputs and 8 outputs, enter the Order Number of a digital input/output module with 8 inputs and 8 outputs in STEP 7; Example: 6ES7 323-1BH00-0AA0 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-3 Other Signal Modules Module view (without front door) Switch for input status www..com Switch for setting the function Channel number Status display - green Figure 5-1 Module View of Simulator Module SM 374; IN/OUT 16 Technical specifications of the SM 374; IN/OUT 16 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight Data for Specific Module Simulation either of 16 inputs 16 outputs 8 input and outputs H D 40 125 110 Voltages, Currents, Potentials Current consumption from the backplane bus Power dissipation of the module Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Status display Interrupts Diagnostic functions Yes, green LED per channel No No max. 80 mA typ. 0.35 W Approx. 190 g 5-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules 5.3 Dummy Module DM 370; (6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0) Order number 6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0 Characteristics www..com Dummy module DM 370 reserves a slot for an unprogrammed module. It can be a dummy for: S S S Interface modules (without reserving address space) Unprogrammed signal modules (with reservation address area) Modules occupying 2 slots (with reservation of address area) When replacing the dummy module with another module from the S7-300, the mechanical configuration and the address assignment remain unchanged. Configuration with STEP 7 Use STEP 7 to configure the dummy module only if you are using the module to reserve the slot for a parameterized signal module. If the module is reserving the slot for an interface module, there is no need to configure with STEP 7. Modules occupying two slots For modules that occupy two slots, you must plug in two dummy modules. In doing so, you reserve the address area only with the dummy module at slot "x" (not with the dummy module at "x + 1"; for the steps you need to perform refer to Table 5-2). Not more than 8 modules must be inserted in a mounting rack (SM/FM/CP). If, for example, you reserve one slot for an 80 mm module with two dummy modules, you may only insert seven more modules (SM/FM/CP) since the dummy module only occupies the address area for one module. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-5 Other Signal Modules Module view www..com NA A Switch for address assignment Front View Figure 5-2 Rear view Module View of Dummy Module DM 370 Switch settings for address assignment The table below shows how you have to set the switch on the back of the module to match the module type. Table 5-2 Meaning of the Switch Positions of the Dummy Module DM 370 Meaning Use in an ET 200M configuration with active bus modules (Insert and Remove) No Switch Position NA A Dummy module reserves the slot for an interface module (NA = No Address, that is no address space reserved) Dummy module reserves the slot for a signal module (A = Address, that is address space reserved) NA A Dummy module reserves the slot for a signal module. If you use the dummy module for an "empty slot", you must configure the "empty slot" with 0 bytes input/output addresses. 5-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules Technical specifications of the DM 370 Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight H D 40 125 120 Voltages, Currents, Potentials Current consumption from the backplane bus Power loss Approx. 5 mA typ. 0.03 W Approx. 180 g 5.4 www..com Position Detection Module SM 338; POS-INPUT; (6ES7 338-4BC00-0AB0) Order Number 6ES7 338-4BC00-0AB0 Characteristics Position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT features the following characteristics: S S S S S 3 inputs for the connection of up to three encoders absolute (SSI) and 2 digital inputs for freezing encoder values Direct reaction to encoder values in moving systems possible Processing of the encoder values acquired by the SM 338 in the user program 24 VDC rated input voltage Isolated from CPU Supported encoder types The following encoder types are supported by the SM 338; POS-INPUT : S S S The encoder absolute (SSI) with 13 bit message frame length The encoder absolute (SSI) with 21 bit message frame length The encoder absolute (SSI) with 25 bit message frame length Supported data formats The SM 338; POS-INPUT supports the gray code and binary code data formats. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-7 Other Signal Modules Terminal connection diagram and block diagram Connection to the ground of the CPU Voltage monitoring Short-circuit protection Fault indicator - red 1 2 3 4 RS 422 L+ M 24V OD (data) OD (data) OC (clock) OC (clock) 1D (data) 1D (data) 1C (clock) 1C (clock) 2D (data) 2D (data) 2C (clock) 2C (clock) DI 0 (digital DI 1 inputs) 24 VDC (enc.) 24 VDC (enc.) M (encoder) M (encoder) SF S7-300 backplane bus 5 6 7 8 9 SSI www..com Logic circuitry SSI 10 11 12 13 14 15 SSI DI 0 DI 1 16 17 18 19 20 Twisted-pair lines Figure 5-3 Module View and Block Diagram of the SM 338; POS-INPUT Wiring Rules Be sure to observe the following important rules when wiring the module: S The ground of the encoder supply is non-isolated to the ground of the CPU. Therefore connect pin 2 of the SM 338 (M) to the ground of the CPU with low impedance. The encoder lines (pins 3 to 14) must be shielded, twisted-pair cables. Support the shield on either side. To support the shield on the SM 338, use the shield supporting element (Order number: 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0). If you exceed the maximum output current (900 mA) of the encoder supply, you must connect an external power supply. S S 5-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules Technical specifications of the SM 338; POS-INPUT Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W x H x D (mm) Weight 40 125 120 Approx. 240 g Voltages, Currents, Potentials Rated load voltage L+ 24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 V No No, only from shield Input delay Maximum repetition frequency Connection of a two-wire BERO type 2 Shielded line length Unshielded line length 1 VDC Input current 0 signal: v2 mA (closed-circuit current) 1 signal: 9 mA (typically) 0 > 1: max. 300 ms 1 > 0: max. 300 ms 1 kHz Possible 600 m 32 m S S www..com Range Reverse polarity protection Isolation Permitted potential difference Status, Interrupts, Diagnostics Interrupts S Between input (M connection) and central grounding point of CPU Output voltage Output current S L+ -0,8V max. 900 mA short circuit-proof max. 160 mA max. 10 mA typ. 3W Diagnostic Interrupt Parameters can be assigned LED (green) LED (red) Frame time + 130 ms (2 frame time) + monoflop time + 600 ms 13-bit 112 ms 56 ms 28 ms 14 ms 21-bit 25-bit Encoder supply S S S S Status display for digital inputs Group error/fault Unsharpness of the Measured Value Minimum unsharpness1 Maximum unsharpness1 Frame time of the encoders Current consumption From the backplane bus From the load voltage L+ (no load) Power dissipation of the module Encoder Inputs POS-INPUT 0 to 2 Position detection Data transmission rate and line length with absolute encoders (shielded) Absolute S S S S 125 kHz max. 320 m 250 kHz max. 160 m 500 kHz max. 60 m 1 MHz max. 20 m S S S S 125 kHz 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz time2 176 ms 208 ms 88 ms 44 ms 22 ms 104 ms 52 ms 26 ms Monoflop 16 ms, 32 ms, 48 ms, 64 ms Evaluation of the frame every 450 ms Update rate Digital inputs DI 0, DI 1 Isolation Input voltage No, only from shield 1 2 0 signal: -3 V to 5 V 1 signal: 11 V to 30.2 V Age of the encoder values determined by the method of transmission and the processing Encoders with a monoflop time of more than 64 ms cannot be used on the SM 338 You have to add the time 2 (1/transmission rate) to the specified values. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-9 Other Signal Modules 5.4.1 Operating Principle of the SM 338; POS-INPUT The SM 338 periodically acquires the signals from up to three connected encoders absolute (SSI). Example of the operating principle of the SM 338 at an encoder input The following figure illustrates the basic operating principle by means of an encoder input. A 25-bit encoder may be connected to the input, for example. www..com You will find a detailed description of the parameters and addressing in the sections that follow. Cyclical process in SM 338 in accordance with the transmission rate and monoflop time The encoder signals are read in Gray-to-binary converter (parameters can be assigned) Update rate 450 ms Normalizing (parameters can be assigned) Cyclical process in STEP 7 Set digital input DI 0/DI 1 Freeze encoder values (asynchronously to process; parameters can be assigned) Reset Read and process the values by the user program Enable the address areas in the output area of the SM 338 The encoder value is stored at the input address + the address offset on the SM 338 Freeze values (asynchronously to process by means of DI 0/DI 1) Figure 5-4 Operating Principle of the SM 338; POS-INPUT 5-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules 5.4.2 Assigning Parameters to the SM 338; POS-INPUT Tools for parameter assignment You assign parameters to the SM 338; POS-INPUT in STEP 7. You must perform parameter assignment in STOP mode of the CPU. When you have set all the parameters, download the parameters from the programming device to the CPU. On a transition from STOP to RUN mode, the CPU transfers the parameters to the SM 338. www..com Parameter assignment is not possible in the user program All parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT are static parameters. In other words, you can assign parameters to the module only as described above with the CPU in STOP mode, and not in the user program. Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT You will find an overview of the programmable parameters and their default values for the SM 338 in the table below. The default settings apply if you have not performed parameter assignment in STEP 7. Table 5-3 Parameters of the SM 338; POS-INPUT Value Range Default values Parameter Type Static Scope Parameter Enable S Diagnostic interrupt Encoder absolute (SSI) Code type Transmission rate Monoflop time Normalizing Yes/no None; 13-bit; 21-bit; 25-bit Gray; Binary 125 kHz; 250 kHz; 500 kHz; 1 MHz 16 ms; 32 ms; 48 ms; 64 ms 0 to 12 2 to 8192* Off; 0; 1 No 13 bits Gray 125 kHz 64 ms 0 8192 Dark Module Static Channel S Positions S Steps/revolution Enable Freeze * To the power of 2 Static Static Channel Channel S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-11 Other Signal Modules Transmission rate parameter Parameterize the transmission rate of the encoders absolute as specified by the encoder manufacturer and in accordance with the length of cable between the encoder and the module: Table 5-4 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Interrelationship between Length of Cable and Transmission Rate Maximum length of cable (shielded cable) www..com Baud Rate 125 kHz 250 kHz 500 kHz 1 MHz 320 m 160 m 60 m 20 m Note The transmission rate affects the message frame time of the encoders absolute (SSI). Monoflop time parameter The monoflop time is the interval between two SSI message frames. Rule: The programmed monoflop time must be greater than the monoflop time of the encoder absolute (refer to the technical specifications of the encoder manufacturer). Note Encoders absolute with a monoflop time of more than 64 ms cannot be used on the SM 338 Note that the transmission rate and the monoflop time affect the accuracy and topicality of the encoder values (refer to the technical specifications of the encoder manufacturer). 5-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules Normalizing of encoder values On account of normalizing, the encoder is right-justified in the address area; irrelevant places are discarded. You parameterize normalizing in STEP 7. Note When you use an encoder absolute which transfers additional information in the subsequent bits (refer to the manufacturer specifications) and you would like to evaluate this information, you must take this into account in normalizing by specifying the places. www..com Steps/revolution parameter The number of irrelevant bit places by which the encoder value must be moved to the right for it to be right-justified is automatically calculated from the number of steps per revolution of the encoder and the sensor type (for example, 13-bit). Example of encoder value normalizing You use a single turn encoder with 29 steps = 512 steps/revolution (resolution/360). You have parameterized the following in STEP 7: S S S Encoder absolute: 13-bit Normalizing: 4 places Steps/revolution: 512 Prior to normalizing: periodically acquired encoder value 100 Data double word 31 00 0 00 0 0 00 0 0 00 0 00 00 0 001 1 0010 0XXXX 0 Relevant bits Transmitted bits After normalizing: encoder value 100 0 31 Data double word 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 01 1 0 0 1 0 0 Relevant bits Result: Bits 0 to 3 (4 places, identified by "x") have been excluded. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-13 Other Signal Modules Enable FREEZE function With the FREEZE function, you "freeze" the current encoder values of the SM 338. The FREEZE function is connected to digital inputs DI 0 and DI 1 of the SM 338. Freezing is triggered by transitional edges (rising pulse edge) across DI 0 or DI 1. A frozen encoder value is identified by the set bit 31 (output address). With one digital input you can freeze one, two or three encoder values. You have to enable the FREEZE function - in other words parameterize accordingly in STEP 7. www..com The encoder values are retained until the end of the FREEZE function and can thus be evaluated as a function of the result. Terminating the FREEZE function You have to terminate the FREEZE function for each encoder input. You acknowledge the function in the user program by resetting bit 31 in the output address with the STEP 7 operation T PAB "xyz" (for an example program refer to Section 5.4.3). The encoder values are updated again following acknowledgement. The encoder values can be frozen again. 5-14 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules 5.4.3 Addressing SM 338; POS-INPUT Data areas for the encoder values The inputs and outputs of the SM 338 are addressed as of the initial module address. You determine the input and output addresses during configuration of the SM 338 in STEP 7. www..com Input addresses Table 5-5 SM 338; POS-INPUT: Input Addresses Input Address (from Configuration) + Address Offset "Initial module address" "Initial module address" + 4 bytes address offset "Initial module address" + 8 bytes address offset Encoder Input 0 1 2 Structure of the data double word The data double word is structured as follows at each encoder input: 31 0 FREEZE Encoder value in gray code or binary code 0 = encoder value is not frozen. The value is continuously updated. 1 = encoder value is frozen. The value remains the same until acknowledgment. Output address 7 0 Initial module address Acknowledgement of the FREEZE function: Bit 0 = encoder input 0 Bit 1 = encoder input 1 Bit 2 = encoder input 2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-15 Other Signal Modules Reading out data areas You can read out the data area in your user program with the STEP 7 operation L PED "xyz". Example of access to encoder values and use of the FREEZE function You want to read out and evaluate the value of the encoder at the encoder inputs. The initial module address is 256. www..com STL L T U = L T U = L T U = L T PED MD M M PED MD M M PED MD M M MB PAB 256 100 100.7 99.0 260 104 104.7 99.1 264 108 108.7 99.2 99 256 Explanation The encoder value in the address area for encoder input 0 is read. The encoder value is stored in the memory double word. Determine and store FREEZE status for acknowledgement later The encoder value in the address area for encoder input 1 is read. The encoder value is stored in the memory double word. Determine and store FREEZE status for acknowledgement later The encoder value in the address area for encoder input 2 is read. The encoder value is stored in the memory double word. Determine and store FREEZE status for acknowledgement later Load the FREEZE status and acknowledge (SM 338: output address 256) Afterwards you can further process the encoder values from the bit memory address area MD 100, MD 104 and MD 108. The encoder value is in bits 0 to 30 of the memory double word. 5-16 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules 5.4.4 Diagnostics of the SM 338; POS-INPUT Programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages In diagnostics, we make a distinction between programmable and non-programmable diagnostic messages. The SM 338 makes non-programmable diagnostic messages available. In other words, all diagnostic messages are provided by the SM 338 without your having to do anything. www..com Actions following diagnostic message in STEP 7 Each diagnostic message leads to the following actions: S S S The diagnostic message is entered in the diagnosis of the module and forwarded to the CPU. The SF LED on the module lights. If you have programmed "Enable Diagnostic Interrupt" in STEP 7, a diagnostic interrupt is triggered and OB 82 is called. Reading out diagnostic messages You can read out detailed diagnostic messages by means of SFCs in the user program (refer to the Appendix "Diagnostic Data of Signal Modules"). You can view the cause of the error in STEP 7, in the module diagnosis (refer to online Help for STEP 7). Diagnostic message by means of SF LED The SM 338 indicates errors by means of its SF-LED (group error LED). The SF LED lights as soon as a diagnostic message is triggered by the SM 338. It goes out when all errors have been rectified. The group fault (SF) LED also lights up in case of external errors (short circuit of sensor supply), independent of the operating status of the CPU (if power is on). The SF LED lights briefly during startup, during the SM 338 self-test. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-17 Other Signal Modules Diagnostic messages of the SM 338; POS-INPUT The table below gives an overview of the diagnostic messages for the SM 338; POS-INPUT. Table 5-6 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 338; POS-INPUT LED Scope of the Diagnostics Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Module Channel (encoder input) Channel (encoder input) Channel (encoder input) Parameters can be assigned No No No No No No No No No No No No Diagnostics Message Module problem www..com SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF SF Internal malfunction External malfunction Channel error present External auxiliary supply missing Module not parameterized. Wrong parameters Channel information available Time monitoring triggered Channel error present Configuring/parameter assignment error External channel error (encoder error) 5-18 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Other Signal Modules Causes of errors and troubleshooting Table 5-7 Diagnostic Messages of the SM 338, Causes of Errors and Troubleshooting Possible Error Cause An error detected by the module has occurred The module has detected an error within the programmable logic controller The module has detected an error outside the programmable logic controller Indicates that only certain channels are faulty Power supply L+ to module missing The module requires the information as to whether it should work with system default parameters or with your parameters One parameter or the combination of parameters is not plausible Channel error present; the module can supply additional channel information Temporary high electromagnetic interference An error detected by the module has occurred at the encoder input Illegal parameters transferred to module Wire break of encoder cable, encoder cable not connected or encoder defective Reassign module parameter Check connected encoder Eliminate interference Feed supply L+ Message queued after power-on until parameter transmission by the COU has been completed; parameterize the module, as required Reassign module parameter Remedy Diagnostics Message Module malfunction Internal error www..com External error Channel error present External auxiliary voltage missing Module not parameterized Wrong parameters Channel information present Watchdog tripped Channel error present Configuration/paramet erization error External channel error (encoder error) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5-19 Other Signal Modules 5.4.5 Interrupts of the SM 338; POS-INPUT Introduction This section describes the interrupt behavior of the SM 338; POS-INPUT. The SM 338 can trigger diagnostic interrupts. The OBs and SFCs mentioned below can be found in the online Help for STEP 7, where they are described in greater detail. www..com Enabling interrupts The interrupts are not preset - in other words, they are inhibited without appropriate parameter assignment. Assign parameters to the Interrupt Enable in STEP 7 (refer to Section 5.4.2). Diagnostic interrupt If you have enabled diagnostic interrupts, then active error events (initial occurrence of the error) and departing error events (message after troubleshooting) are reported by means of an interrupt. The CPU interrupts execution of the user program and processes the diagnostic interrupt block (OB 82). In the user program, you can call SFC 51 or SFC 59 in OB 82 to obtain more detailed diagnostic information from the module. The diagnostic information is consistent until such time as OB 82 is exited. When OB 82 is exited, the diagnostic interrupt is acknowledged on the module. 5-20 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Interface Modules 6 Interface modules www..com In this chapter you will find the technical specifications and characteristic features of the interface modules for the S7-300. Contents The following interface modules are described in this chapter: Section 6.1 6.2 6.3 6.4 Module Overview Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0) Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0) Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0) Contents Page 6-2 6-3 6-5 6-7 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 6-1 Interface Modules 6.1 Module Overview Introduction The following table summarizes the most important characteristics of the interface modules described in this chapter. This overview is intended to make it easy to choose the suitable module for your task. Table 6-1 www..com Interface Modules: Characteristics at a Glance Module Interface Module IM 360 Interface Module IM 361 Interface Module IM 365 Characteristics Suitable for plugging into S7-300 mounting racks Data transmission S0 S 0 and 1 S 0 and 1 S From IM 360 to IM 361 S From the IM 360 to the S From IM 365 to IM 365 over the connecting cable 386 IM 361 or from the IM 361 to the IM 361 via connecting cable 386 via connecting cable 386 Distance between... Special Features S max. 10 m --- S max. 10 m --- S 1 m, permanently connected S Preassembled module pair S Install only signal modules in rack 1 S IM 365 does not route the communication bus to subrack 1 6-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Interface Modules 6.2 Interface Module IM 360; (6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0) Order number 6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0 Characteristics The interface module IM 360 has the following characteristic features: www..com S S S Interface for rack 0 of the S7-300 Data transfer from IM 360 to IM 361 over the connecting cable 368 Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m (32.8 ft.) Status and fault LEDs The interface module IM 360 has the following status and fault LEDs. LED SF Meaning Group error/fault Explanation The LED lights up if S the connecting cable is missing. S IM 361 is switched off. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 6-3 Interface Modules Front view Figure 6-1 shows the front view of the interface module IM 360. X1 OUT SF www..com Front View Figure 6-1 Front View of the Interface Module IM 360 Technical specification The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module IM 360. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight Data for Specific Module Length of cable H D 40 125 120 Approx. 250 g S S Maximum length to next IM From the backplane bus 10 m Current consumption 350 mA typ. 2 W Yes Power loss Status and Fault LEDs 6-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Interface Modules 6.3 Interface Module IM 361; (6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0) Order number 6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0 Characteristics The interface module IM 361 has the following characteristic features: www..com S S S S S S 24 VDC power supply Interface for racks 1 to 3 of the S7-300 Current output via the S7-300 backplane bus max. 0.8 A Data transfer from the IM 360 to the IM 361 or from the IM 361 to the IM 361 via connecting cable 368 Maximum distance between IM 360 and IM 361 is 10 m Maximum distance between IM 361 and IM 361 is 10 m Status and fault LEDs The interface module IM 361 has the following status and fault LEDs. LED SF Meaning Group error/fault Explanation The LED lights up if S the connecting cable is missing S the series-connected IM 361 is switched off S the CPU is in the POWER OFF state 5 VDC 5 VDC supply for the S7-300 - backplane bus S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 6-5 Interface Modules Front view Figure 6-2 shows the front view of the interface module IM 361. X1 OUT SF 5 VDC www..com M L+ M X2 IN Figure 6-2 Front View of the Interface Module IM 361 6-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Interface Modules Technical specification The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module IM 361. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W (in millimeters) Weight Data for Specific Module www..com Length of cable Maximum length to next IM Current consumption From 24 VDC Power loss Current output To backplane bus Status and fault LEDs 0.8 A Yes 0.5 A typ. 5 W 10 m H D 80 505 g 125 120 6.4 Interface Module IM 365; (6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0) Order number 6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0 Characteristics The interface module IM 365 has the following characteristic features: S S S S S Pre-assembled pair of modules for rack 0 and rack 1 Total power supply of 1.2 A, of which up to 0.8 A can be used per rack. Connecting cable with a length of 1 m already permanently connected Install only signal modules in rack 1 IM 365 does not route the communication bus to subrack 1 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 6-7 Interface Modules Front view Figure 6-3 shows the front view of the interface module IM 365. IM 365 RECEIVE IM 365 SEND www..com In rack 1 In rack 0 Figure 6-3 Front View of the Interface Module IM 365 Technical specification The following overview lists the technical specifications for the interface module IM 365. Dimensions and Weight Dimensions W H D per rack (in millimeters) Total weight 40 125 120 Data for Specific Module Length of cable Maximum length to next IM 580 g Current consumption From the backplane bus Power loss Current output Per rack Status and fault LEDs 100 mA typ. 0.5 W max. 1.2 A 0.8 A No 1m 6-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 RS 485 Repeater 7 In this chapter www..com In this chapter, you will find a detailed description of the RS 485 repeater. Included in the description are: S S S S S The purpose of the RS 485 repeater The maximum cable lengths possible between two RS 485 repeaters The functions of the individual operating elements and terminals Information about grounded and non-grounded operation Technical specifications and the block diagram Further information You will find further information on the RS 485 repeater in the manuals Hardware and Installation in the Chapter "Configuring of an MPI or PROFIBUS-DP network". In this chapter Section 7.1 7.2 7.3 7.4 Contents Application and Characteristics; (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) Appearance of the RS-485 Repeater; (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation Technical Specification Page 7-2 7-3 7-4 7-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 7-1 RS 485 Repeater 7.1 Application and Characteristics; (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) Order number 6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0 What is an RS 485 repeater? www..com The RS 485 repeater amplifies data signals on bus lines and interconnects bus segments. Application of the RS 485 repeater You need an RS 485 repeater if: S S S more than 32 nodes are connected to the bus bus segments are to be operated non-grounded on the bus, or the maximum cable length of a segment is exceeded. (See table 7-1). Maximum Cable Length of a Segment Max. Cable Length of a Segment (in m) 1000 400 200 100 Table 7-1 Baud Rate 9.6 to 187.5 kbd 500 kbaud 1.5 Mbaud 3 to 12 Mbaud Rules If you configure the bus with RS 485 repeaters: S S Up to 9 RS 485 repeaters can be connected in series. The maximum cable length between two nodes must not exceed the values in Table 7-2. Maximum Cable Length between Two RS 485 Repeaters Maximum Length of Cable between 2 Nodes (in m) with RS 485 Repeater (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) 10000 4000 2000 1000 Table 7-2 Baud Rate 9.6 to 187.5 kbaud 500 kbaud 1.5 Mbaud 3 to 12 Mbaud 7-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 RS 485 Repeater 7.2 Appearance of the RS 485 Repeater; (6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0) The table below shows the appearance of the RS 485 repeater and lists its functions. Table 7-3 Description and Functions of the RS 485 Repeater No. A Function Connection for the RS 485 repeater power supply (pin "M5.2" is the ground reference, if you want to measure the voltage difference between terminals "A2" and "B2"). Shield clamp for the strain relief and grounding of the bus cable of bus segment 1 or bus segment 2 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 1 Terminating resistance for bus segment 1 Switch for OFF operating mode (= isolate bus segments from each other - for example, for startup A AE C E 10 Repeater Design www..com 24 VDC 10 L+ M PE M 5.2 A A A A1 B1 A1 B1 A A A A ON A 11 12 E PG OP DP1 OFF DP2 A A Terminating resistance for bus segment 2 Terminals for the bus cable of bus segment 2 Slide for mounting and removing the RS 485 repeater on the standard rail Interface for programming device/OP in bus segment 1 LED 24 V supply voltage LED for bus segment 1 LED for bus segment 2 ON SIEMENS RS 485-REPEATER A2 B2 A2 B2 AE A C 11 12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 7-3 RS 485 Repeater 7.3 RS 485 Repeater in Ungrounded and Grounded Operation Grounded or ungrounded The RS 485 repeater is ... S www..com grounded, if all other nodes in the segment are also operated with a grounded potential ungrounded, if all other nodes in the segment are operated with an ungrounded potential S Note The bus segment 1 is grounded if you connect a programming device to the PG/OP socket of the RS 485 repeater. Ground connection is effected since the MPI in the programming device is grounded and the PG/OP socket is connected internally with bus segment 1 in the RS 485 repeater. Grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater For grounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, you must jump terminals "M" and "PE" on the top of the RS 485 repeater. Ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater For ungrounded operation of the RS 485 repeater, "M" and "PE" on the top of the RS 485 repeater must not be interconnected. In addition, the supply voltage of the RS 485 repeater must be ungrounded. 7-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 RS 485 Repeater Terminal connection diagram In the case of a repeater configuration with ungrounded reference potential (ungrounded operation), any interference currents and static charges are discharged by means of an RC network integrated in the repeater (refer to Figure 7-1) to the protective conductor. PE 24 VDC L+ M PE M 5.2 22 nF www..com 10 M M A1 B1 A1 B1 Ground bus Figure 7-1 RC Network with 10 Mohm for Configuration with Ungrounded Reference Potential Isolation between bus segments Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other. The PG/OP interface is connected internally to the port for bus segment 1. Figure 7-2 shows the front panel of the RS 485 repeater. 24 VDC L+ M PE M 5.2 Terminals for bus segment 1 A1 B1 A1 B1 ON PG/OP interface PG OP DP1 OFF DP2 Isolation ON SIEMENS RS 485-REPEATER A2 B2 A2 B2 Terminals for bus segment 2 Figure 7-2 Isolation between the Bus Segments S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 7-5 RS 485 Repeater Amplification of the bus signals The amplification of the bus signals takes place between the port for bus segment 1 or the PG/OP interface and the port for bus segment 2. 7.4 Technical Specifications www..com Technical specifications of the RS 485 repeater Technical Specification Power supply S S S S S Rated voltage Ripple 24 VDC 20.4 to 28.8 VDC Current consumption at rated voltage without node at PG/OP socket Node at PG/OP socket (5 V/90 mA) Node at PG/OP socket (24 V/100 mA) 200 mA 230 mA 200 mA Yes, 500 VAC Yes, via repeater adapters No 9.6 kbaud, 19.2 kbaud, 45.45 kbaud, 93.75 kbaud, 187.5 kbaud, 500 kbaud. 1,5 Mbaud. 3 Mbaud, 6 Mbaud, 12 Mbaud IP 20 D (in millimeters) 45 350 g 128 67 mm Isolation Connection of fiber optic cables Redundancy operation Transmission rate (automatically detected by the repeater) Degree of protection Dimensions W H Weight (incl. packaging) Pin assignment of the sub-D connector (PG/OP socket) View Pin No. 1 2 5 4 3 7 2 1 6 9 8 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Signal Name - M24V RxD/TxD-P RTS M5V2 P5V2 P24V RxD/TxD-N - - Ground 24 V Data line B Request To Send Data reference potential (from station) Supply plus (from station) 24 V Data line A - Designation 7-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 RS 485 Repeater Block diagram of the RS 485 repeater S S S Bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 are galvanically isolated from each other. Bus segment 2 and the PG/OP socket are galvanically isolated from each other. Signals are amplified - between bus segment 1 and bus segment 2 - between PG/OP socket and bus segment 2 www..com Segment 1 A1 B1 A1 B1 Logic Segment 2 A2 B2 A2 B2 PG/OPsocket L+ (24 V) M A1 B1 5V M5 V 5V 24V 1M 5V 24V 1M L+ (24 V) M PE M 5.2 Figure 7-3 Block Diagram of the RS 485 Repeater S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 7-7 RS 485 Repeater www..com 7-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8 www..com Changes and modifications compared with the previous version of the reference manual The descriptions of SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA are summarized in this chapter. In this way it was possible to extract and give precedence to generally valid information. A new overview section will make it easier for you to access the information. The section entitled "Module Overview" shows the basic configuration of SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA. In addition, you will also find out which modules in the S7-300 family can be used with SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA. In this chapter Section 8.1 8.2 8.3 8.4 Module Overview Wiring Components Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect with Digital Modules Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect TPA with Analog Modules Contents Page 8-2 8-4 8-12 8-20 Structure of the chapter Sections 8.1 and 8.2 apply to SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA. Section 8.3 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect and thus supplements the preceding sections. Section 8.4 contains specific information on SIMATIC TOP connect TPA and thus supplements Sections 8.1 and 8.2. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.1 Module Overview Introduction "SIMATIC TOP connect" denotes components for wiring digital modules. "SIMATIC TOP connect TPA" denotes components for wiring analog modules. Wiring www..com Wiring with SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA is an elegant alternative to conventional wiring of the actuators and sensors directly at the front connector of the module. When using these components, you wire actuators and sensors "in situ" on one more terminal blocks. You establish the connection to the module by means of a connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable). Configuration of SIMATIC TOP connect with a S7-300 A SIMATIC TOP connect and a SIMATIC TOP connect TPA always consist of: S S S a front connector module with flat ribbon connection A, one or more terminal blocks A and one or more connecting cables with plug-and-socket connectors at ends A A A A Figure 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect on a S7-300 8-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Advantages Use of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA features the following advantages: S S S S S www..com Fast, low-cost wiring (the use of central terminal blocks is no longer necessary) Simple mounting of the components (front connector module, connecting cable, terminal block) Each component can be replaced separately Connecting cable configurable without waste Wiring errors are drastically reduced Neat and tidy cabinet wiring The supply voltage for the module can be connected to components of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA Simplification of the terminals for M- and L+ connection S S S Range of modules The table below lists all the modules which you can wire with SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA. You will find a detailed list of the components of SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA with their order numbers in Table 8-5 on page 8-12 and Table 8-13 on page 8-20. Table 8-1 SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA: Connectable Modules Front view of terminal block Wiring possible with module... SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC SIMATIC TOP connect SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; source input SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A; with diagnostic interrupt SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/2 A SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 331; AI 2 12 Bit SIMATIC TOP connect TPA ABCDEFGH I K Component SM 331; AI 8 12 Bit SM 332; AO 4 12 Bit SM 332; AO 2 12 Bit SM 332; AO 4 16 Bit SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 8/8 Bit Z Y YK K A A A A Z Z Y SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 12 Bit SM 335; AI 4/AO 4 14 Bit; S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-3 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.2 Wiring Components Introduction The following table contains the tasks that you have to perform one after the other to commission SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA successfully. The sequence of steps is a suggestion but you can perform individual steps sooner or later. www..com Sequence of steps for wiring Table 8-2 Sequence of Steps for Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect/... TPA Step 1. 2. 3. 4. Procedure Cut connecting cable to length and terminate Wire the front connector module Connect the connecting cable to the terminal block Wire actuators/sensors to the terminal block Refer to Section... 8.2.1 8.2.2 and 8.3 or 8.4 8.2.3 and 8.3 or 8.4 8.2.4 8.2.1 Cut the Connecting Cable to Length and Terminate Maximum length of cable The length of the connecting cable (round-sheath ribbon cable) between the SIMATIC S7 and the terminal blocks must not be more than 30 m. Using the connectors You must attach connectors to either end of the round-sheath ribbon cable, for connection to the front connector module and the terminal block. Connect the round-sheath ribbon cable to connector 1. Cut the round-sheath ribbon cable to the length required and remove part of the cable sheath at both ends. You will find the length of the cable sheath that has to be removed in the following table: 8-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA cable sheath to be removed Cable End to ... 20-pin 40-pin front front connec- connector tor 110 mm 70 mm 115 mm 75 mm outer ribbon cable inner ribbon cabel outer ribbon cable inner ribbon cable 20-pin front connector 40-pin front connector ... top connector of front connector module ... bottom connector of front connector module ... top connector of front connector module ... bottom connector of front connector module ... socket of terminal block 1 x 16 cores shielded/uns hielded www..com 95 mm 2 x 16 cores unshielded 95 mm 115 mm 40 mm 40 mm 115 mm 75 mm 100 mm 2. Thread the cable into the 16-pin connector. It is important that you note the position of the details marked in the following figure. Triangle Nose Marked Core Figure 8-2 Threading the Round-Sheath Ribbon Cable into the Connector 3. Clamp the end of the cable into the connector with the crimping tool. 4. Attach the strain relief device to the connector of the terminal block as follows: - Fold back the cable over the connector - Push the enclosed strain relief device over the cable - Snap the strain relief device into place on the connector S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-5 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.2.2 Wiring the Front Connector Module Introduction This chapter describes the principle of wiring the front connector modules. Note also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find, among other things, selection criteria for the front connector modules and specific connection examples. www..com Using the front connector module You require the front connector module to connect the connecting cable to the module. In addition, you can connect the supply voltage of the module to the front connector module. 8-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Wiring rules for connecting the supply voltage The following table shows you what you have to consider when connecting the module supply voltage to the terminal block or front connector module. The terminals for the supply voltage are screws or spring-loaded terminals (refer to Section 8.2.4 for handling spring-loaded terminals). Table 8-3 Wiring Rules for Connecting the Supply Voltage Terminal block Spring-loaded connection Conductor cross-sections suitable for connection: Solid conductors Stranded conductors No 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 No 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 0.25 to 1.5 mm2 No of conductors per terminal Max. diameter of conductor insulation Length of conductor insulation to be stripped No 0.25 to 0.75 mm2 0.25 to 0.75 mm2 Screw-type connection Front connector Up to 4 Terminals Up to 8 Terminals Rules for ... www..com S without end ferrules S with end ferrules 1 or combination of 2 conductors up to 1.5 mm2 (sum) in a common end ferrule 3.1 mm 3.1 mm 2.0 mm S without insulation collar 11 mm 11 mm 6 mm - S with insulation collar End ferrules to DIN 46228 S without insulation collar Model A; up to 12 mm long Model E; up to 12 mm long Model E; 12 mm long Model A; up to 12 mm long Model E; up to 12 mm long Model E; 18 mm long Model A; 5 to 7 mm long - S with insulation collar - - 0.25 to 1.0 mm2 1.5 mm2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-7 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Connect the connecting cable and the supply voltage to the front connector module 1. Open the front door of the module. 2. Bring the front connector into the wiring position. 3. If necessary, connect the cables for the incoming supply of the module supply voltage. 4. Insert the connecting cable into the front connector module as shown in the following figure: www..com Figure 8-3 Inserting the Connecting Cable into the Front Connector Module 5. Twist every connecting cable 90 _ downwards and turn through one whole turn to the extent possible. Additional steps for wiring for 32-channel digital modules Note When using 32-channel digital modules, you must observe the assignment of the supply connections to the connecting cable terminals and the assignment of the connecting cable terminals to the address bytes of the module (refer to Figure 8-4 and Table 8-4). 6. Thread a strain relief assembly into the middle of the front connector. This strain relief assembly is used to fix the connecting cables in the narrow cable stowage area of the module. 7. Thread the strain relief assembly into the front connector. 8-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Front connector module for 32-channel digital modules The following figure shows the front view of the front connector module for 32-channel digital modules. A Opening for the cable to be connected + _ + _ Supply terminals for www..com A Opening for the screwdriver Supply terminals for A A A A * Supply terminals for * + _ Legend: A Openings for strain relief A to : Terminals for connecting cable; refer to Table 8-4 for the address assignment Figure 8-4 + _ Supply terminals for A Front Connector Module for 32-Channel Digital Modules Assignment of connecting cable terminals to address bytes of 32-channel digital modules Table 8-4 Assignment of Connecting Cable Terminals to Address Bytes of 32-Channel Digital Modules Address Assignment for Digital Input Module IB x IB (x+1) IB (x+2) IB (x+3) Digital Output Module QB x QB (x+1) QB (x+2) QB (x+3) Digital Input/Output Module IB x IB (x+1) QB x QB (x+1) Refer to Figure 8-4: Connecting Cable Terminal * S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-9 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.2.3 Connecting the Connecting Cable to the Terminal Block Introduction A description of how to mount the terminal blocks is presented in the following. Note also the special sections for SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA (Section 8.3 and 8.4, respectively). In those sections, you will find, among other things, selection criteria for the different terminal blocks and specific connection examples. www..com Mounting the terminal block and connecting cable 1. Attach the terminal block to a 35 mm standard rail in accordance with EN 50 022. 2. Insert the connecting cable into the terminal block as shown in the following figure: Figure 8-5 Insert the Connecting Cable into the Terminal Block 8.2.4 Wiring Actuators/Sensors to the Terminal Block Screw-type or spring-loaded terminals To mount the signal leads of the actuators/sensors to the terminal block and the supply lines to the terminal block and front connector module, you can choose between screw-type and spring-loaded components. The principle of spring-loaded components is dealt with in greater detail in the following, since it allows fast and simple connection of the signal lines and supply cables. 8-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Spring-loaded terminal block Opening for the cable to be connected Opening for the screwdriver for pressing the spring-loaded contact www..com Figure 8-6 Spring-Loaded Terminal Block ! Caution The spring-loaded contact will be damaged, if you insert the screwdriver into the opening for the cable. Make sure that you insert the screwdriver only into the rectangular opening of the terminal block. Attaching the cable to the spring-loaded contact Attach the cables to the spring-loaded contacts as follows: 1. Use a screwdriver A to press down the spring-loaded terminal in the rectangular opening and to hold it down. 2. Insert the cable A into the round opening of the corresponding spring-loaded terminal as far as it will go. 3. Remove the screwdriver A from the spring-loaded terminal. The cable is held by the spring-loaded contact. Figure 8-7 Principle of Spring-Loaded Connections (R) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-11 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.3 Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect with Digital Modules Introduction For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect, you must first select the components as a function of the module and method of connection (screw-type or spring-loaded terminal, one-conductor, three-conductor or 2A connection; relay). www..com 8.3.1 SIMATIC TOP connect Components and Selection Aid Components The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect. Table 8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Terminal block ... for one-conductor connection ... for one-conductor connection (10 items) ... for three-conductor connection ... for three-conductor connection (10 items) ... for 2A modules ... for 2A modules (10 items) ... for relay Front connector for 32-channel modules (refer to Figure 8-4) for 16-channel modules for 16-channel 2A modules Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Spring-loaded screw-type Voltage supply via: Spring-loaded terminals Voltage supply via: spring-loaded screw-type Voltage supply via: spring-loaded screw-type Order number 6ES7 924-0AA00-0AB0 6ES7 924-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7 924-0AA00-1AB0 6ES7 924-0AA00-1AA0 6ES7 924-0CA00-0AB0 6ES7 924-0CA00-0AA0 6ES7 924-0CA00-1AB0 6ES7 924-0CA00-1AA0 6ES7 924-0BB00-0AB0 6ES7 924-0BB00-0AA0 6ES7 924-0BB00-1AB0 6ES7 924-0BB00-1AA0 6ES7 924-0CD00-0AB0 6ES7 924-0CD00-0AA0 6ES7 921 3AA20-0AA0 6ES7 921-3AA00-0AA0 6ES7 921-3AB00-0AA0 6ES7 921-3AC00-0AA0 6ES7 921-3AD00-0AA0 6ES7 921-3BE10-0AA0 Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation displacement connectors) 8-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Table 8-5 Components of SIMATIC TOP connect, continued Components of SIMATIC TOP connect Order number 6ES7 923-0CD00-0AA0 6ES7 923-0CG00-0AA0 6ES7 923-0CD00-0BA0 6ES7 923-0CG00-0BA0 6ES7 923-2CD00-0AA0 6ES7 923-2CG00-0AA0 6ES7 928-0AA00-0AA0 Round-sheath Unshielded ribbon cable 1x 16 Shielded Round-sheath Unshielded ribbon cable 2 x 16 www..com 30 m 60 m 30 m 60 m 30 m 60 m Crimping tool for 16-pin connector Selection aid In the following table you will find the components of SIMATIC TOP connect with which you can wire the digital modules. Table 8-6 Selection Table for SIMATIC TOP connect Components Terminal block for... OneThree2A conductor conductor modules connection connection SM 321; DI 32 SM 321; DI 16 SM 321; DI 16 source input SM 322; DO 32 SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC; 24 VDC/0.5 V 24 VDC/0.5 V 5 5 5 5 5 5 - 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 - 5 5 - - - - - - 5 - - Relay Front connector module for... SM; 16 or 32 channels 5 5 5 5 5 5 - 5 5 2A modules - - - - - - 5 - - Digital Modules - - - 5 5 - - - - SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 V; with diagnostic interrupt SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/2 A SM 323; DI 16 / DO 16 24 VDC/ 0.5 A SM323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A One-conductor or three-conductor connection With the three-conductor connection, you can optionally apply the supply voltage for the module to the front connector module or to the terminal block. With the one-conductor connection, this can only be done to the front connector module. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-13 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 2A module connection You require the following information on wiring 2A modules only when you want to use the SM 322; 8 DO 24 VDC/2 A with SIMATIC TOP connect. 8.3.2 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection www..com Connection Notes Table 8-7 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with One-Conductor Connection Connection Notes Supply Voltage Feed-In at front connector only add. ground conn. at terminal block - - - - - - - - at front connector or terminal block - - - - - - - - Additional jumper required at power supply Description on terminal block not in line with description on SM - - - - - 5 - - Digital Modules SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; source input SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A; with diagnostic interrupt SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 - - - - - - - - SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/ 0.5 A 8-14 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Assignments of the terminal block for one-conductor connection Table 8-8 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for One-Conductor Connection Assignments of the Terminals Top row: Terminals 0 to 7: inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7 Front view of terminal block www..com Connecting the power supply Always connect the supply voltage to the front connector module Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7. In the following example, you must connect L+ to Plus of the upper terminal and M to Minus of the lower terminal. Connecting the terminal block for one-conductor connection - L+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 + 12 14 15 16 17 18 19 M 20 13 - + Front connector module Terminal block Terminal block Figure 8-8 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a One-Conductor Connection S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-15 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.3.3 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection Connection Notes Table 8-9 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with Three-Conductor Connection Connection Notes Supply Voltage Feed-In at front connector only add. ground conn. at terminal block - - - - - - - - at front connector or terminal block 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Additional jumper required at power supply Description on terminal block not in line with description on SM - - - - - 5 - - Digital Modules www..com SM 321; DI 32 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC; source input SM 322; DO 32 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 24 VDC/0.5 A SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 24 VDC/ 0.5 A - - - - - - - - 5 5 5 - - 5 - - Assignment of the terminal block for three-conductor connection Table 8-10 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for Three-Conductor Connection Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals Top row: Terminals 0to 7:inputs/outputs x.0 to x.7 Center row: All terminals: M potential Bottom row: All terminals: L + potential 8-16 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Connecting the power supply Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7. With some digital modules, two jumpers are generally required for connecting the supply voltage (refer to Table 8-9 on page 8-16). You can wire the jumpers either in the front connector or in the terminal block. Irrespective of this, you must interconnect the two Plus terminals and the two Minus terminals. www..com Connecting the terminal block for three-conductor connection - + L+ 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 M 20 - + Front connector Jumper (1) Terminal block Terminal block Jumper (2) Jumper (1) or jumper (2) required Figure 8-9 Wiring a Digital Module with Terminal Block for a Three-Conductor Connection S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-17 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.3.4 Wiring the Module with Terminal Block for 2A Modules You can use the terminal block for 2A modules to wire the SM 322; 8 DO 24 VDC/2A. Connection Notes Table 8-11 Connection Notes for SIMATIC TOP connect with 2A Module Connection www..com Digital Modules Connection Notes Supply Voltage Feed-In at front connector only add. ground conn. at terminal block 5 at front connector or terminal block - add. jumper required for power supply Descr. on terminal block not in line with descr. on SM - SM 322; DO 16 24 VDC/2 A 5 - Assignment of the Terminal Block for Connection of 2A Modules Table 8-12 Terminal Assignments of the Terminal Block for 2A Modules Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals (left) Top row: Terminals 0 to 3: outputs x.0 to x.3 Center row: Terminals 0 to 3: potential M1 for x.0 to x.3 M1 M2 Assignments of the Terminals (right) Top row, on right: Terminals 0 to 3: outputs x.4 to x.7 Center row, on right: Terminals 0 to 3: potential M2 for x.4 to x.7 Bottom row: two-terminal connection for M2 Bottom row: two-terminal connection for M1 8-18 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Connecting the power supply Please observe the following when connecting the power supply: S S S S www..com Apply the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7. Connect the supply voltage at the front connector module to the potential terminals using separate cables. You must equip each terminal block with a cable for M1 or M2, in addition to the connecting cable. Connect M1 or M2 via a separate line with the front connector and the terminal block. You may jumper the potential of M1 and M2. Connection to terminal block for 2A modules M1 - + 1 L+ 2 4 6 8 1 3 5 7 9 1 M 10 2 L+ 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2 M 20 - + Front connector M2 Terminal block Figure 8-10 Wiring with Terminal Block for 2A Module S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-19 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.4 Wiring SIMATIC TOP connect TPA with Analog Modules Introduction For wiring the module with actuators/sensors using SIMATIC TOP connect TPA, you must first select the components as a function of the method of connection (screw-type or spring-loaded terminal). www..com 8.4.1 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components and Selection Aid Components The following table contains all the component of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA. Table 8-13 Components for SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Components of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal block Quantity: 1 Quantity: 10 Front connector Spring-loaded terminals Screw-type terminals Spring-loaded terminals Screw-type terminals Voltage supply via: Spring-loaded terminals Screw-type terminals Connectors (plug-in connectors), set of 8 (insulation displacement connectors) Shielding plate for terminal block, set of 4 Terminal element for: 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm Round-sheath ribbon cable, shielded 8 mm Crimping tool for 16-pin connector 30 m 60 m Order number 6ES7 924-0CC00-0AB0 6ES7 924-0CC00-0AA0 6ES7 924-0CC00-1AB0 6ES7 924-0CC00-1AA0 6ES7 921-3AF00-0AA0 6ES7 921-3AG00-0AA0 6ES7 921-3BE10-0AA0 6ES7 928-1BA00-0AA0 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0 6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0 6ES7 923-0CD00-0BA0 6ES7 923-0CG00-0BA0 6ES7 928-0AA00-0AA0 8-20 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.4.2 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Assignment and Terminal Allocation Terminal marking On the TPA terminal block, the terminals are identified by letters. This simplifies the allocation of the terminals on the analog module to the terminals on the terminal block. www..com Terminal block assignment Table 8-14 Terminal Assignment of the Terminal Block of SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Front view of terminal block Assignments of the Terminals Terminals Z and Y can be used for multiplying arbitrary potentials and signals. A BCDE FGH I K Y Y YK K A A A A Z Z Z The terminals having identical letters are electrically interconnected, with the exception of terminals Z and Z, and also Y and Y. Multiplier terminal The lower tier of terminals on the terminal block is designed as 2 terminals. 5 multiplier S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-21 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal allocation of an analog module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal number on module Terminal assignment on terminal block TPA Terminal block 1 Terminal block 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Y B C D E F G H I K A Y www..com K A B C D E F G H I Z Z Figure 8-11 Terminal Assignment of Analog Module to SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8-22 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.4.3 Connecting the Signal-Line Shield Two options for connecting the shield You can connect the signal line shield to ground as follows: S on the analog module by means of a shield-support element (refer to the manual Hardware and Installation for the S7-300 or the manual Distributed I/O device ET 200M in the section on wiring) www..com S directly to the terminal block by means of a shielding plate Connecting the shield to the terminal block using a shielding plate 1. Before mounting, attach a shielding plate to the terminal block. 2. Mount the terminal block on the DIN rail. (In the figure below, you can see that the shielding plate is applied to the rear of the terminal block and thus there is a connection to the grounded rail.) 3. Place the signal-line shield with the shield terminals on the shielding plate. Shield support for shield terminal and connecting cable to analog module Loosen shielding plate Press down lightly on the release to loosen the shielding plate Terminal block Snap the shielding plate into place Shielding plate Shield support fro shield terminal and signal lines from actuators/sensors Snap the shielding plate into place at the rear of the terminal block. Figure 8-12 SIMATIC TOP connect TPA Terminal Block with Shielding Plate S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 8-23 SIMATIC TOP connect and SIMATIC TOP connect TPA 8.4.4 Connection Example Connecting the load voltage supply You can connect the load voltage supply of the analog module to the front connector module. Their are separate terminals on the front connector module for the load voltage L+ und M. Observe the wiring rules in Table 8-3 on page 8-7. www..com Allocation of front connector to terminal block The upper socket of the front connector module is the connection for terminal block 1 and the lower socket of the front connector module is the connection for terminal block 2. Connection example The illustration below shows an example of connecting the analog input module SM 321; AI 8 12 Bit in "Resistance Test" mode. Resistance test Terminal number on module L+ L+ Terminal assignment on terminal block TPA Terminal block 1 Y B C D E F G H I K K Terminal block 2 Y SF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 M0 + CH0 M0* IC0 + IC0* M1 + CH2 M1* IC1 + IC1* Comp + Comp M M Comp - / Mana M2 + CH4 M2* IC2 + IC2* M3 + CH6 M3* IC3 + IC3* M 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 A Z A B C D E F G H I Z Figure 8-13 Example of Connecting SIMATIC TOP connect TPA to SM 321; AI 8 12 Bit 8-24 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A Page A-1 A-3 A-5 A-7 A-11 A-19 A-27 A-30 In this chapter www..com Section A.1 A.2 A.3 A.4 A.5 A.6 A.7 A.8 Contents How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD TC Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules A.1 How to Assign the Parameters for Signal Modules in the User Program Parameter assignment in the user program You have already assigned parameters to the modules in STEP 7. In the user program, you can use a SFC: S S to reassign parameters to the module and and transfer the parameters from the CPU to the addressed signal module On M7-300 On M7-300 programmable logic controllers you can likewise assign with the M7-API software to the signal modules in the user program (refer to System Software Manuals for M7-300/400). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-1 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Parameters stored in data records The parameters of the signal modules are located in data records 0 and 1; for some other analog input modules, in data record 128 as well. Modifiable parameters You can change the parameters of record 1 and pass them to the signal module using SFC 55. The parameters set on the CPU are not changed when you do this! You cannot modify the parameters of data record 0 in the user program. www..com SFCs for parameter assignment The following SFCs are available for assigning parameters to the signal modules in the user program: Table A-1 SFCs for Assigning Parameters to Signal Modules SFC No. 55 56 57 Identifier WR_PARM WR_DPARM PARM_MOD Application Transfer modifiable parameters (data record 1 and 28) to the addressed signal module. Transfer parameters (data record 0, 1 or 128) from the CPU to the addressed signal module. Transfer all parameters (data record 0, 1 and 128) from the CPU to the addressed signal module. Description of the parameters The following sections contain all the modifiable parameters for the various module classes. The parameters of the signal modules are described: S S in the on-line help of STEP 7 in this reference manual You will find the parameters that can be adjusted for the signal module concerned in the specific sections for the different signal modules. Further references An in-depth description of the principle of assigning parameters to signal modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals. A-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A.2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameters The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital input modules. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: S S www..com in STEP 7 with SFC 55 "WR_PARM" The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals). Table A-2 Parameters of the Digital Input Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Input delay Diagnostics Hardware interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Hardware interrupt with rising edge Hardware interrupt with falling edge 1 0 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-3 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Data record 1 structure The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the digital input modules. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". 76 Byte 0 Diagnostics interrupt enable Hardware interrupt enable 7654321 0 Byte 1 Hardware interrupt on rising edge at channel group 0 on falling edge at channel group 0 on rising edge at channel group 1 on falling edge at channel group 1 on rising edge at channel group 2 on falling edge at channel group 2 on rising edge at channel group 3 on falling edge at channel group 3 7654321 0 Byte 2 Hardware interrupt on rising edge at channel group 4 on falling edge at channel group 4 on rising edge at channel group 5 on falling edge at channel group 5 on rising edge at channel group 6 on falling edge at channel group 6 on rising edge at channel group 7 on falling edge at channel group 7 Byte 3 Not relevant 0 www..com Figure A-1 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Input Modules A-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A.3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameters The table below contains all the parameters you can set for digital output modules. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: S S www..com in STEP 7 with SFC 55 "WR_PARM" The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals). Table A-3 Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Diagnostics Diagnostics interrupt enable Behavior on CPU STOP Enable substitute value "1" 0 No Yes 1 Yes Yes Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-5 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Data record 1 structure The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the digital output modules. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to "1". 76 Byte 0 Behavior on CPU STOP Hold last valid value Apply substitute value Diagnostics interrupt enable 7 65 4321 0 Byte 1 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 0 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 1 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 2 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 3 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 4 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 5 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 6 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 7 10 www..com 7 65 4321 0 Byte 2 Substitute value Enable substitute value 1 on channel 8 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 9 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 10 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 11 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 12 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 13 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 14 Enable substitute value 1 on channel 15 Byte 3 Not relevant Figure A-2 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Digital Output Modules Note You should only enable the parameters in byte 0, "Hold last valid value" and "Enable substitute value" as an alternative. A-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A.4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameters The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input modules. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: S S www..com in STEP 7 with SFC 55 "WR_PARM" The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals). Table A-4 Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics: With wire-break check Temperature unit Temperature coefficient Smoothing Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Cycle end interrupt enable Interference Suppression Measuring Method Measuring Range Upper limit value Lower limit value 1 0 No No No No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-7 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Data record 1 structure The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog input modules. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to "1". 76 Byte 0 Cycle end interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Byte 1 Interference suppression 2 0 www..com Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 7 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 43 0 See Table A-5 Measurement channel group 0 Measurement channel group 1 Measurement channel group 2 Measurement channel group 3 Measuring Range Measuring Method Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 See Table A-6 Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Note: For the channel groups, only one limit value for channel 1 is ever set. High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte Figure A-3 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input Modules Note The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation (see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values. A-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Interference frequency suppression The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte 1 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3). You must count the resulting integration time separately for each channel! Table A-5 Codes for Interference Suppression of the Analog Input Modules Interference Suppression 400 Hz www..com Integration Time 2.5 ms 16.7 ms 20 ms 100 ms Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11 60 Hz 50 Hz 10 Hz Measuring methods and measuring ranges The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the analog input modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-3). Note Please note that a measuring range module may need to be reconnected, depending on the measuring range (see Chapter 4)! Table A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules Code 2#0000 2#0001 Measuring Range deactivated " 80 mV " 250 mV " 500 mV "1V " 2.5 V "5V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V " 25 mV " 50 mV Code 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#1010 2#1011 Measuring Method deactivated Voltage S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-9 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Table A-6 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input Modules, continued Code 2#0010 " 3.2 mA " 10 mA 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA " 5 mA 4 to 20 mA 150 W 300 W 600 W 10 kW 52 to 148 W 250 W 400 W 700 W Pt 100 climate Ni 100 climate Pt 100 standard range Pt 200 standard range Pt 500 standard range Pt 1000 standard range Ni 1000 standard range Pt 200 climate Pt 500 climate Pt 1000 climate Ni 1000 climate Ni 100 standard range Type B [PtRh - PtRh] Type N [NiCrSi - NiSi] Type E [NiCr - CuNi] Type R [PtRh -Pt] Type S [PtRh -Pt] Type J [Fe - CuNi IEC] Type L [Fe - CuNi] Type T [Cu - CuNi] Type K [NiCr - Ni] Type U [Cu -Cu Ni] Measuring Range Code 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0011 2#0010 2#0100 2#0110 2#1001 2#0001 2#0011 2#0101 2#0111 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#1001 2#1011 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 Measuring Method Four-wire transducer www..com Two-wire transducer Resistance, four-conductor connection Resistor four-conductor connection; 100 W compensation Thermal resistance + linearization four-conductor connection 2#0011 2#0100 2#0110 2#1000 Thermocouples internal comparison Thermocouples external comparison Thermocouples + linearization internal comparison Thermocouples + linearization external comparison 2#1010 2#1011 2#1101 2#1110 A-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A.5 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD Parameters The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input module SM 331; AI 8 RTD. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: S www..com in STEP 7 with SFC 55 "WR_PARM" S The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals). Table A-7 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter RTD Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Record No. Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics: With wire-break check Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Cycle end interrupt enable Temperature unit Measuring Method Measuring Range Module filtering mode Temperature coefficient Interference Suppression Smoothing Upper limit value Lower limit value 128 1 0 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-11 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of data record 1 The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for SM 331; AI 8 RTD. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". 76 Byte 0 Temperature unit Cycle end interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned Figure A-4 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD 0: degrees Celsius 1: degrees Fahrenheit 2 0 www..com A-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of data record 128 The figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8 RTD. 7 Byte 0 Byte 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module filtering mode (refer to Table A-8) Interference suppression Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 Byte 2 Measuring method, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 3 Measuring range, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 4 Temperature coefficient, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-11) Smoothing, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-12) Byte 5 www..com (refer to Table A-9) Measuring method, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 6 Measuring range, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 7 Temperature coefficient, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-11) Smoothing, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-12) Figure A-5 Data Record 128 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 RTD S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-13 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Byte 8 Measuring method, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 9 Measuring range, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-10) www..com Byte 10 Temperature coefficient, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-11) Smoothing, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-12) Byte 11 Measuring method, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 12 Measuring range, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-10) Byte 13 Temperature coefficient, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-11) Smoothing, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-12) Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Figure A-6 High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 1 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 1 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD (Continued) A-14 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 www..com High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Upper limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Upper limit value channel group 2 channel 5 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 5 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 7 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 7 Byte 28 Byte 29 Byte 30 Byte 31 Byte 32 Byte 33 Byte 34 Byte 35 Byte 36 Byte 37 Byte 38 Byte 39 Byte 40 Byte 41 Byte 42 Byte 43 Byte 44 Byte 45 Figure A-7 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD (Continued) Note The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation (see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-15 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Table A-8 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels software filter www..com Code 2#00000000 2#00000001 2#00000010 4 channels hardware filter Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3). Table A-9 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 RTD Interference Suppression 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50/60/400 Hz Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11 Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3). Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 Measuring Method deactivated Resistance, four-conductor connection Resistance, three-conductor connection Code 2#0000 2#0100 RTD Code 2#0000 2#0010 2#0100 2#0110 2#0010 2#0100 2#0110 Measuring Range deactivated 150 W 300 W 600 W 150 W 300 W 600 W 2#0101 A-16 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Table A-10 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 Measuring Method Thermal resistance + linearization four-conductor connection Code 2#1000 RTD, continued Code 2#00000000 2#00000001 2#00000010 2#00000011 2#00000100 2#00000101 2#00000110 2#00000111 2#00001000 2#00001001 2#00001010 2#00001011 2#00001100 2#00001101 2#00001110 2#00001111 2#00010000 2#00010001 2#00010010 2#00010011 2#00000000 2#00000001 2#00000010 2#00000011 2#00000100 2#00000101 2#00000110 2#00000111 2#00001000 2#00001001 2#00001010 2#00001011 2#00001100 2#00001101 2#00001110 2#00001111 2#00010000 2#00010001 2#00010010 2#00010011 Measuring Range Pt 100 climate Ni 100 climate Pt 100 standard Ni 100 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 1000 standard Pt 200 climate Pt 500 climate Pt 1000 climate Ni 1000 climate Pt 200 standard Ni 120 standard Ni 120 climate Cu 10 climate Cu 10 standard Ni 200 standard Ni 200 climate Ni 500 standard Ni 500 climate Pt 100 climate Ni 100 climate Pt 100 standard Ni 100 standard Pt 500 standard Pt 1000 standard Ni 1000 standard Pt 200 climate Pt 500 climate Pt 1000 climate Ni 1000 climate Pt 200 standard Ni 120 standard Ni 120 climate Cu 10 climate Cu 10 standard Ni 200 standard Ni 200 climate Ni 500 standard Ni 500 climate www..com Thermal resistance + linearization three-conductor connection 2#1001 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-17 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Bulb resistor temperature coefficient of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD The table below contains the codes for all temperature coefficients for the measuring range RTD-4L and RTD-3L, which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Table A-11 Codes of Temperature Coefficients of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD Temperature coefficient Pt 0.003850//C Pt 0.003916//C www..com Code 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#1000 2#1001 2#1100 Pt 0.003902//C Pt 0.003920//C Pt 0.003851//C Ni 0.00618//C Ni 0.00672//C Cu 0.00472//C Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Table A-12 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 RTD Smoothing None Low Average High Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11 A-18 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A.6 Parameters der SM 331; AI 8 TC Parameters The table below contains all the parameters which you can set for analog input module SM 331; AI 8 TC. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: S www..com in STEP 7 with SFC 55 "WR_PARM" S The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals). Table A-13 Parameters of the SM 331; AI 8 Parameter TC Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Data Record No. Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics: With wire-break check Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Cycle end interrupt enable Temperature unit Measuring method Measuring range Module filtering mode Reaction to open thermocouple Interference suppression Smoothing Upper limit value Lower limit value 128 1 0 No No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-19 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of data record 1 The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 of the SM 331; AI 8 You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit to "1". 76 Byte 0 Temperature unit Cycle end interrupt enable Diagnostics interrupt enable Limit value interrupt enable Bytes 1 to 13 are not assigned Figure A-8 Data Record 1 of the Parameters for SM 331; AI 8 TC 0: degrees Celsius 1: degrees Fahrenheit 2 0 TC. www..com A-20 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of data record 128 The figure below shows the structure of data record 128 for SM 331; AI 8 TC. 7 Byte 0 Byte 1 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Module filtering mode (refer to Table A-14) Interference suppression Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 Byte 2 Measuring method, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 3 Measuring range, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 4 www..com (refer to Table A-15) Smoothing, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-18) Reaction to open thermocouple, channel group 0 (refer to Table A-17) Byte 5 Measuring method, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 6 Measuring range, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 7 Smoothing, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-18) Reaction to open thermocouple, channel group 1 (refer to Table A-17) Figure A-9 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 TC S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-21 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Byte 8 Measuring method, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 9 Measuring range, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-16) www..com Byte 10 Smoothing, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-18) Reaction to open thermocouple, channel group 2 (refer to Table A-17) Byte 11 Measuring method, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 12 Measuring range, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-16) Byte 13 Smoothing, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-18) Reaction to open thermocouple, channel group 3 (refer to Table A-17) Byte 14 Byte 15 Byte 16 Byte 17 Byte 18 Byte 19 Byte 20 Byte 21 Figure A-10 High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 0 Upper limit value channel group 0; channel 1 Lower limit value channel group 0; channel 1 TC (Continued) A-22 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Byte 22 Byte 23 Byte 24 Byte 25 Byte 26 Byte 27 www..com High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte High Byte Low Byte Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 2 Upper limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Lower limit value channel group 1; channel 3 Upper limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 4 Upper limit value channel group 2 channel 5 Lower limit value channel group 2; channel 5 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 6 Upper limit value channel group 3; channel 7 Lower limit value channel group 3; channel 7 Byte 28 Byte 29 Byte 30 Byte 31 Byte 32 Byte 33 Byte 34 Byte 35 Byte 36 Byte 37 Byte 38 Byte 39 Byte 40 Byte 41 Byte 42 Byte 43 Byte 44 Byte 45 Figure A-11 Data Record 128 of the SM 331; AI 8 TC (Continued) Note The representation of the limit values matches the analog value representation (see Chapter 4). Please observe the range limits when setting the limit values. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-23 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Operating modes of the SM 331; AI 8 TC The table below contains the codes for the different operating modes, which you enter in byte 0 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Table A-14 Codes of Operating Modes of the SM 331; AI 8 TC Module filtering mode 8 channels hardware filter 8 channels software filter www..com Code 2#00000000 2#00000001 2#00000010 4 channels hardware filter Interference frequency suppression of the SM 331; AI 8 TC The table below contains the codes for the different frequencies, which you enter in byte 1 of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3). Table A-15 Interference Frequency Suppression Codes for SM 331; AI 8 TC Interference Suppression 400 Hz 60 Hz 50 Hz 50/60/400 Hz Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11 A-24 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Measuring methods and measuring ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 TC The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the module and its codes. You must enter these codes in the corresponding bytes of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-3). Table A-16 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the SM 331; AI 8 Measuring Method deactivated www..com TC Code 2#0000 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#0000 2#0001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 2#0101 2#0110 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 Code 2#0000 2#1010 Measuring Range deactivated B N E R S J L T K U B N E R S J L T K U B N E R S J L T K U B N E R S J L T K U TC-L00C: (thermocouple, linear, reference temperature 0 C) TC-L50C: (thermocouple, linear, reference temperature 50 C) 2#1011 TC-IL (thermocouple, linear, internal compensation) 2#1101 TC-EL (thermocouple, linear, external compensation) 2#1110 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-25 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Reaction to open thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 TC The table below contains the codes for the reactions to an open thermocouple, which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Table A-17 Codes of Reaction to Open Thermocouple of the SM 331; AI 8 TC Reaction to open thermocouple Overflow Underflow www..com Code 2#0 2#1 Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 TC The table below contains the codes for all smoothing modes, which you enter in the corresponding byte of data record 128 (refer to Figure A-5). Table A-18 Codes Smoothing of the SM 331; AI 8 TC Smoothing None Low Average High Code 2#00 2#01 2#10 2#11 A-26 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A.7 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameters Table A-19 contains all the parameters you can set for analog output modules.. The comparison shows: S S www..com which parameters you can change with STEP 7 and which parameters you can change with SFC 55 "WR_PARM". The parameters which you set with STEP 7 can also be transferred to the module with SFCs 56 and 57. Table A-19 Parameters of the Analog Output Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Diagnostics: Group diagnostics Diagnostics interrupt enable Behavior on CPU STOP Output type Output Range Substitute value 0 No Yes Yes 1 Yes Yes Yes Note If you want to enable the diagnostic interrupt in the user program in data record 1, you must enable the diagnosis in data record 0 beforehand using STEP 7. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-27 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Data record 1 structure The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog output modules. You activate the diagnostics interrupt enable by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to "1". 76 Byte 0 www..com 0 Diagnostics interrupt enable 7 Byte 1 3210 Behavior on CPU STOP Channel group 0 Channel group 1 Channel group 2 Channel group 3 7 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 43 0 Output channel group 0 Output channel group 1 Output channel group 2 Output channel group 3 0 = Outputs de-energized 1 = Hold last value Output Range Output type Refer to Table A-20 Byte 6 Byte 7 Byte 8 Byte 9 Byte 10 Byte 11 Byte 12 Byte 13 High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte High-Order Byte Low-Order Byte Substitute value channel group 0 Substitute value channel group 1 Substitute value channel group 2 Substitute value channel group 3 Figure A-12 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Output Modules A-28 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Setting substitute values Note For output ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V you must set the substitute value E500H so that the output remains de-energized (refer to Tables 4-33 and 4-35 on pages 4-25 and 4-26). The representation of the substitute values corresponds to the analog value representation. You should observe the relevant range limits when setting the substitute values. www..com Output methods and output ranges The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-12). Table A-20 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Output Modules Output type deactivated Voltage Code 2#0000 2#0001 deactivated 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V " 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA " 20 mA Output Range Code 2#0000 2#0111 2#1000 2#1001 2#0010 2#0011 2#0100 Current 2#0010 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-29 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules A.8 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules Parameters The table below contains all the parameters you can set for analog input/output modules. You will see which parameters you can modify from the list: S www..com in STEP 7 with SFC 55 "WR_PARM" S The parameters set with STEP 7 can also be transferred with SFCs 56 and 57 to the module (refer to the STEP 7 manuals). Table A-21 Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules Parameter Data Record No. Parameters can be assigned with ... ... SFC 55 ... Programming Device Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Measuring Method Measuring Range Integration Time Output type Output Range 1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A-30 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Structure of data record 1 The figure below shows the structure of data record 1 for the parameters of the analog input/output modules. You activate a parameter by setting the corresponding bit in byte 0 to "1". 7 Byte 0 7 Byte 1 www..com 0 Not relevant 0 Reset Time Set the same parameters for all channels. Channel 0 Channel 1 Channel 2 Channel 3 7 Byte 2 Byte 3 Byte 4 Byte 5 43 0 Meas. channel 0 Meas. channel 1 Meas. channel 2 Meas. channel 3 Measuring Method 7 Byte 6 Byte 7 43 Measuring Range 0 Output channel 0 Output channel 1 Output type Byte 8 : Byte 13 : Output Range Not relevant Figure A-13 Data Record 1 for Parameters of the Analog Input/Output Modules S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 A-31 Parameter Sets for Signal Modules Measuring methods and measuring ranges The table below contains all the measuring methods and measuring ranges of the analog input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 2 to 5 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-13). Table A-22 Codes for the Measuring Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules Measuring Method deactivated Voltage www..com Code 2#0000 2#0001 2#0100 2#1000 Measuring Range deactivated 0 to 10 V 10 kW Pt 100 climate Code 2#0000 2#1000 2#1001 2#0000 Resistance, four-conductor connection Thermal resistance + linearization four-conductor connection Output methods and output ranges The table below contains all the output methods and output ranges of the analog input/output modules and their codes. You must enter these codes in bytes 6 and 7 of data record 1 (refer to Figure A-13). Table A-23 Codes for the Output Ranges of the Analog Input/Output Modules Output type deactivated Voltage Code 2#0000 2#0001 deactivated 0 to 10 V Output Range Code 2#0000 2#1000 A-32 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules B Page B-1 B-2 B-5 B-7 In this Appendix www..com Section B.1 B.2 B.3 B.4 Contents Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 7 Diagnostic data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT B.1 Evaluating Diagnostic Data of the Signal Modules in the User Program In this Appendix This Appendix describes the structure of the diagnostic data in the system data. You must be familiar with this configuration if you want to evaluate the diagnostics data of the signal module in the STEP 7 user program. Diagnostic data are contained in data records The diagnostic data of a module can be up to 16 bytes long and are contained in data records 0 and 1: S S Data record 0 contains 4 bytes of diagnostic data that describe the current status of a programmable logic controller. Data record 1 contains the four bytes of diagnostic data that are also contained in data record 0 and as many as 12 bytes of module specific diagnostic data. Further references An in-depth description of the principle of evaluating the diagnostic data of signal modules in the user program and a description of the SFCs that can be used for that purpose will be found in the STEP 7 manuals. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 B-1 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules B.2 Structure and Content of Diagnostic Data Bytes 0 to 7 The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data are described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to "1". Bytes 0 and 1 7 65 4321 0 www..com Byte 0 Module problem Internal malfunction External malfunction Channel error present External auxiliary supply missing Front connector missing Module not parameterized. Incorrect parameter in the module 7 65 4321 0 Byte 1 0 0 Module type (see Table B-1) Channel information available User information available Figure B-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data Module types The following table contains the IDs of the module classes (bits 0 to 3 in byte 1). Table B-1 Codes of the Module Types Code 0101 0110 1000 1100 1111 Module Type Analog module CPU Function module CP Digital module B-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules Bytes 2 and 3 7 65 4321 0 Byte 2 0 Memory module or measuring range module (for analog modules) incorrect or missing Communication fault Operating status 0: RUN 1: STOP www..com Cycle time-out Module-internal supply voltage failure Battery empty Complete backup supply failure 7 65 4321 0 Byte 3 0 Rack failure Processor failure EPROM error RAM error ADC/DAC error Fuse blown Hardware interrupt lost Figure B-2 Bytes 2 and 3 of the Diagnostics Data S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 B-3 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules Bytes 4 to 7 7 65 4321 0 Byte 4 Channel type B#16#70: Digital input B#16#71: Analog input B#16#72: Digital output B#16#73: Analog output www..com Further channel type available? 0: no 1: yes 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module 7654321 0 Byte 7 Channel error channel 0 / channel group 0 Channel error channel 1 / channel group 1 ... ... ... ... Channel error channel 6 / channel group 6 ... Channel error channel 7 / channel group 7 Figure B-3 Bytes 4 to 7 of the Diagnostics Data B-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules B.3 Channel-Specific Diagnostic Data from Byte 8 From byte 8 up to byte 15, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data. The figures below show the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel or a channel group of the specific module. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to "1". You will find a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies in the section called "Diagnostics of the Modules". www..com Digital input channel of the SM 321; DI 16 diagnostic interrupts 7 65 4321 0 00 24 VDC; with hardware and Configuring/parameter assignment error Ground fault Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M Wire break Sensor supply missing Figure B-4 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Input Channel of the SM 321; DI 16 24 VDC Digital output channel of the SM 322; DO 8 interrupt 7 65 4321 0 0 24 VDC/0.5 A; with diagnostic Configuring/parameter assignment error Ground fault Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M Wire break External auxiliary supply missing Overtemperature Figure B-5 Diagnostic Byte for a Digital Output Channel of the SM 322; DO 8 24 VDC/0.5 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 B-5 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules Analog input channel of the SM 331 modules with diagnostics capability 7 65 4321 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Common mode error Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M www..com Wire break Reference channel error Underflow Overflow Figure B-6 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Input Channel of a SM 331 with Diagnostics Capability Analog output channel of the SM 332 modules with diagnostics capability 7 65 4321 0 0 0 Configuring/parameter assignment error Common mode error Short-circuit to L+ Short-circuit to M Wire break External auxiliary supply missing Figure B-7 Diagnostic Byte for an Analog Output Channel of a SM 332 with Diagnostics Capability B-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules B.4 Diagnostic Data of the SM 338; POS-INPUT The structure and contents of the different bytes of the diagnostic data for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT are described below. The following general rule applies: When an error occurs, the bit concerned is set to "1". Section 5.4 includes a description of possible error causes and appropriate remedies. Bytes 0 and 1 www..com 7 65 4321 0 Byte 0 00 Module problem Internal malfunction External malfunction Channel error present Module not parameterized Incorrect parameter in the module 7 65 4321 0 Byte 1 0 0 0 Module class 05H Channel information available Figure B-8 Bytes 0 and 1 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 B-7 Diagnostics Data of Signal Modules Bytes 2 to 7 7 65 4321 0 Byte 2 0 Cycle time-out 7 65 4321 0 Byte 3 www..com Not relevant 7 65 4321 0 Byte 4 0 Channel type 79H: SM POS-INPUT 7 Byte 5 7 Byte 6 7654321 0 Byte 7 0 0 0 0 0 Channel error, channel 0 Channel error, channel 1 Channel error, channel 2 Figure B-9 Bytes 2 and 7 of the Diagnostic Data for the SM 338; POS-INPUT 0 Number of channels of the same type in one module: 3 channels 0 Number of diagnostics bits that the module outputs per channel: 8 bits long Bytes 8 to 10 From byte 8 up to byte 10, data record 1 contains the channel-specific diagnostic data. The figure below shows the assignment of the diagnostic byte for a channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT. 7 65 4321 0 000000 Configuration/parameterization error (internal channel error) Encoder error (external channel error) Figure B-10 Diagnostic Byte for a Channel of the SM 338; POS-INPUT B-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Dimension Drawings C Introduction www..com In this appendix, you will find the dimension drawings for the most important components of an S7-300. The specifications in these dimension drawings are required for dimensioning the S7-300 configuration. The dimensions of an S7-300 configuration must be taken into account when installing an S7-300 in cabinets, switchgear rooms, etc. This appendix does not contain any dimension drawings of the CPUs of the S7-300 or M7-300 or of the IM 153-1. These dimension drawings are contained in the relevant manuals. Contents In this appendix, you will find the dimension drawings of the following S7-300 components. Section C.1 C.2 C.3 C.4 C.5 Contents Dimension Drawings of the Rails Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules Dimension Drawings for Accessories Page C-2 C-9 C-14 C-14 C-17 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 C-1 Dimension Drawings C.1 Dimension Drawings of the Rails 483 mm standard rail Figure C-1 shows the dimension drawing of the 483 mm standard rail. 8.7 163.9 www..com 465.2 155 24 19 35 15 11 482.6 Figure C-1 Dimension Drawing of the 483 mm Standard Rail C-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 7 Dimension Drawings 530 mm standard rail Figure C-2 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm standard rail. 15 25 20 25 = 500 24 19 www..com 35 15 18 530 Figure C-2 Dimension Drawing of the 530 mm Standard Rail 830 mm standard rail Figure C-3 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm standard rail. 15 25 32 25 = 800 24 19 35 15 18 830 Figure C-3 Dimension Drawing of the 830 mm Standard Rail S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 5.2 5.2 C-3 Dimension Drawings 2000 mm standard rail Figure C-4 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm standard rail. 24 www..com 19 15 35 2000 Figure C-4 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Standard Rail 160 mm rail Figure C-5 shows the dimension drawing of the 160 mm rail. 32.5 57.2 10 10 140 160 15 Figure C-5 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 160 mm Standard Width C-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 122 6 M6 7 Dimension Drawings 482.6 mm rail Figure C-6 shows the dimension drawing of the 482.6 mm rail. 32.5 57.2 www..com 10 8.3 466 482.6 15 Figure C-6 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 482.6 mm Standard Width 530 mm rail Figure C-7 shows the dimension drawing of the 530 mm rail. 32.5 57.2 10 15 500 530 15 Figure C-7 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 530 mm Standard Width S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 122 6 M6 7 122 6 M6 7 C-5 Dimension Drawings 830 mm rail Figure C-8 shows the dimension drawing of the 830 mm rail. 32.5 57.2 10 www..com 15 800 830 15 Figure C-8 Dimension Drawing of the Rail with 830 mm Standard Width 2000 mm rail Figure C-9 shows the dimension drawing of the 2000 mm rail. 2000 15 Figure C-9 Dimension Drawing of the 2000 mm Rail C-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 122 6 122 6 M6 7 Dimension Drawings Rail for "Insert and Remove" function Figure C-10 shows the dimension drawing of the rail for the "Insert and Remove" function with active bus module, S7-300 module and explosion-proof partition. The rail is 482.6 mm or 530 mm long. Explosion-proof partition www..com S7-300 module Rail for the "Insert and Remove" function 122 125 155 Figure C-10 Complete Dimension Drawing of a Rail for "Insert and Remove" Function with Active Bus Module, S7-300 Module and Explosion-Proof Partition S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 59 Active bus module 152 166 C-7 Dimension Drawings Bus modules (Expansion buses) Figure C-11 shows the dimension drawing of the active bus module for the "Insert and Remove" function. Bus modules BM PS/IM (...7HA) BM IM/IM (...7HD) BM 2 40 (...7HB) BM 1 80 (...7HC) 97 92 www..com Figure C-11 Dimension Drawing of the Active Bus Modules C-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Dimension Drawings C.2 Dimension Drawings of the Power Supply Modules PS 307; 2 A Figure C-12 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 2 A power supply module. 127.5 50 www..com 120 Figure C-12 Power Supply Module PS 307; 2 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 C-9 Dimension Drawings PS 307; 5A Figure C-13 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 5 A power supply module. 127.5 80 120 www..com Figure C-13 Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A C-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 Dimension Drawings PS 307; 10 A Figure C-14 shows the dimension drawing of the PS 307; 10 A power supply module. 127.5 200 120 www..com Figure C-14 Power Supply Module PS 307; 10 A S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 C-11 Dimension Drawings PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP Figures C-15 and C-16 show the dimension drawings of the configuration of a power supply module PS 307; 5 A with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Observe the dimensions that result from the use of the power connector for wiring the PS 307; 5 A with the CPU. www..com 27 68 Figure C-15 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Front View C-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 132 Dimension Drawings PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP Figure C-16 shows the dimension drawing of the power supply module PS 307; 5 A with the CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP in the side view. 130 120 www..com 6 13 Figure C-16 Dimension Drawing of the Power Supply Module PS 307; 5 A with CPUs 313/314/315/315-2 DP. Side View S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 C-13 Dimension Drawings C.3 Dimension Drawings of the Interface Modules IM 360 Figure C-17 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 360. 40 120 www..com Figure C-17 Interface Module IM 360 C-14 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 Dimension Drawings IM 361 Figure C-18 shows the dimension drawing of the interface module IM 361. 80 120 www..com Figure C-18 Interface Module IM 361 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 C-15 Dimension Drawings IM 365 Figure C-19 shows the dimension drawing of interface module IM 365. 40 120 www..com 9 120 Figure C-19 Interface Module IM 365 C-16 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 125 Dimension Drawings C.4 Dimension Drawings of the Signal Modules Signal Module Figure C-20 shows the dimension drawing of the signal module. A signal module might look slightly different than the example below. The dimensions however are always the same. 40 www..com 120 Figure C-20 Signal Module S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 130 C-17 Dimension Drawings C.5 Dimension Drawings for Accessories Shield connecting element Figure C-21 shows the dimension drawing of the shield connecting element in connection with two signal modules. 120 www..com 80 Figure C-21 2 Signal Modules with Shield Connecting Element 40 C-18 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 190 Dimension Drawings SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier Figure C-22 shows the dimension drawing of the 3-tier SIMATIC TOP connect. 35 www..com 60 40.5 35.5 Figure C-22 SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-Tier SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier Figure C-23 shows the dimension drawing of the 2-tier SIMATIC TOP connect. 35 60 40.5 35.5 Figure C-23 SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-Tier S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 70 70 C-19 Dimension Drawings SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier Figure C-24 shows the dimension drawing of the 1-tier SIMATIC TOP connect. 35 www..com 52 40.5 35.5 Figure C-24 SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-Tier RS 485 repeater on standard rail Figure C-25 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the standard rail. 45 73 55 Figure C-25 RS 485 Repeater on Standard Rail C-20 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 128 Dimension Drawings RS 485 repeater on S7-300 Rail Figure C-26 shows the dimension drawing of the RS 485 repeater on the S7-300 rail. 45 70 www..com Figure C-26 RS 485 Repeater on S7-300 Rail S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 125 C-21 Dimension Drawings www..com C-22 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules D www..com Spare parts Table D-1 lists all the parts you can order separately or later for S7-300 programmable controllers. Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts S7-300 Parts Bus connector Power connector between power supply unit and CPU Labeling strip (Qty 10) S for 8/16-channel modules S for 32-channel modules Slot numbering label Front connector 20-pin S Screw-type Connection S Spring-loaded Connection Front connector 40-pin S Screw-typeConnection Front connector for 2 flat ribbon terminals Order Number 6ES7 390-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7 390-7BA00-0AA0 6ES7 392-2XX00-0AA0 6ES7 392-2XX10-0AA0 6ES7 912-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7 392-1AJ00-0AA0 6ES7 392-1BJ00-0AA0 6ES7 392-1AM00-0AA0 S Screw-type Connection S Spring-loaded Connection Front connector for 4 flat ribbon terminals 6ES7 921-3AB00-0AA0 6ES7 921-3AA00-0AA0 S Spring-loaded Connection SIMATIC TOP connect, 1-tier, with S Screw-type Connection S Spring-loaded Connection SIMATIC TOP connect, 2-tier, with S Screw-type Connection S Spring-loaded Connection 6ES7 921-3AA20-0AA0 6ES7 924-0AA00-0AA0 6ES7 924-0AA00-0AB0 6ES7 924-0BB00-0AA0 6ES7 924-0BB00-0AB0 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 D-1 Spare Parts and Accessories for S7-300 Modules Table D-1 Accessories and Spare Parts, continued S7-300 Parts SIMATIC TOP connect, 3-tier, with S Screw-type Connection S Spring-loaded Connection Round-sheath ribbon cable (16-pin) S Unshielded 30 m S Unshielded 60 m S Shielded 30 m Order Number 6ES7 924-0CA00-0AA0 6ES7 924-0CA00-0AB0 6ES7 923-0CD00-0AA0 6ES7 923-0CG00-0AA0 6ES7 923-0CD00-0BA0 6ES7 923-0CG00-0BA0 6ES7 921-3BE10-0AA0 6ES7 390-5AA00-0AA0 6ES7 390-5AB00-0AA0 6ES7 390-5BA00-0AA0 6ES7 390-5CA00-0AA0 www..com S Shielded 60 m Plug-in connectors, 16-pin, set of 8 (insulation displacement connectors) Shield connecting element Shield connection terminals for S 2 cables, each with a shield diameter of 2 to 6 mm S 1 cable with a shield diameter of 3 to 8 mm S 1 cable with a shield diameter of 4 to 13 mm Measuring range module for analog modules 6ES7 974-0AA00-0AA0 Fuse set for 120/230 VAC digital output 6ES7 973-1HD00-0AA0 modules (contains 10 fuses and 2 fuse carriers) Connecting cable between IM 360 and IM 361 or alternatively IM 361 and IM 361 S S S S 1m 2.5m 5m 10 m 6ES7 368-3BB01-0AA0 6ES7 368-3BC51-0AA0 6ES7 368-3BF01-0AA0 6ES7 368-3CB01-0AA0 D-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) E www..com Introduction In this appendix, we explain S S what is meant by "electrostatic sensitive devices" the precautions you must observe when handling and working with electrostatic sensitive devices. Contents This chapter contains the following sections on electrostatic sensitive devices: Section E.1 E.2 E.3 What is ESD? Electrostatic Charging of Persons General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage Contents Page E-2 E-3 E-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 E-1 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) E.1 What is ESD? Definition All electronic modules are equipped with large-scale integrated ICs or components. Due to their design, these electronic elements are very sensitive to overvoltages and thus to any electrostatic discharge. These Electrostatic Sensitive Devices are commonly referred to by the abbreviation ESD. www..com Electrostatic sensitive devices are labelled with the following symbol: ! Caution Electrostatic sensitive devices are subject to voltages that are far below the voltage values that can still be perceived by human beings. These voltages are present if you touch a component or the electrical connections of a module without previously being electrostatically discharged. In most cases, the damage caused by an overvoltage is not immediately noticeable and results in total damage only after a prolonged period of operation. E-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) E.2 Electrostatic Charging of Persons Charging Every person with a non-conductive connection to the electrical potential of its surroundings can be charged electrostatically. Figure E-1 shows you the maximum values for electrostatic voltages which can build up on a person coming into contact with the materials indicated in the figure. These values are in conformity with the specifications of IEC 801-2. www..com Voltage in kV (kV) 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 1 2 Synthetic material Wool 1 3 Antistatic material, for example, wood or concrete 2 3 5 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Relative air humidity in % Figure E-1 Electrostatic Voltages which Can Build up on a Person S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 E-3 Guidelines for Handling Electrostatic Sensitive Devices (ESD) E.3 General Protective Measures Against Electrostatic Discharge Damage Ensure sufficient grounding Make sure that the personnel, working surfaces and packaging are sufficiently grounded when handling electrostatic sensitive devices. You thus avoid electrostatic charging. www..com Avoid direct contact You should touch electrostatic sensitive devices only if it is unavoidable (for example, during maintenance work). Hold modules without touching the pins of components or printed conductors. In this way, the discharged energy cannot affect the sensitive devices. If you have to carry out measurements on a module, you must discharge your body before you start the measurement by touching grounded metallic parts. Use grounded measuring devices only. E-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 List of Abbreviations Abbreviation AC www..com F Explanation Alternating current Analog-to digital converter Aanalog input Analog output Compensating terminal Communications processor Central processing unit of a PLC Digital-to-analog converter Data block Direct current Digital input Digital output Electromagnetic compatibility Erasable programmable read-only memory Encoder supply Electrostatic sensitive devices Apply substitute value Function block Function Flash erasable programmable read only memory Fiber-optic cable Constant-current lead Terminal for 24 VDC supply voltage Hold last valid value Ground terminal Measuring lead (positive) Measuring lead (negative) Reference potential of the analog measuring circuit Multipoint interface ADC AI AO Comp CP CPU DAC DB DC DI DO EMC EPROM ES ESD EWS FB FC FEPROM FOC IC L+ LWH M M+ M- MANA MPI S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 F-1 List of Abbreviations OB OP OS PIQ PII PLC Programming device www..com Organization block Operator panel Operator system Process-image output table Process-image input table Programmable logic controller Programming device Power supply Analog output current Analog output voltage Random access memory Load impedance Detector lead (positive) Detector lead (negative) "Group error" error LED System function block System function Signal module Synchronous serial interface Text display Common mode voltage Potential difference between MANA and local ground Sign PS QI QV RAM RL S+ S- SF SFB SFC SM SSI TD UCM Uiso VZ F-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary Address www..com An address denotes a specific operand or address area; examples of this are: input I 12.1; memory word MW 25; data block DB 3. Aggregate current Sum of the currents of all output channels on a digital output module. Backplane bus The backplane bus is a serial data bus that is used by the modules to communicate with each other and to supply them with the voltage they require. The interconnection of the modules is established by the bus connector. Backup battery The backup battery ensures that the User program is stored in a powerfail-proof manner in the CPU and defined data areas and memory markers, timers and counters are kept Retentive. Binary code Data format of encoders absolute Bus A bus is a transmission medium that interconnects several nodes. Data transmission can be serial or parallel, and be performed over electric conductors or fiber-optic cables. Bus segment A bus segment is a self-contained section of a serial bus system. Bus segments are interconnected by means of repeaters. Central processing unit CPU S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary-1 Glossary Common mode voltage A voltage that is common to all inputs/outputs of a group and is measured between this group and any reference point (usually to ground). Communication processor Programmable module for communication tasks, such as networking, point-to-point connection. www..com Comparison point When using thermocouples on analog input modules: point of known temperature (for example, compensating box). Compensating box Compensating boxes can be used for measuring temperatures with thermocouples on analog input modules. The compensating box is a compensation circuit for compensating temperature fluctuations at the Comparison point. Complete restart When a CPU starts up (say, when the mode selector switch is moved from STOP to RUN or when the mains supply is turned on), OB 100 (Restart) is processed before cyclic programming processing (OB 1). With a complete restart, the Process input image is read in and the STEP 7 user program is processed, starting with the first instruction in OB1. Configure Select and put together different components on a programmable logic controller and install the requisite software (for example, operating system on M7 automation computer) and adapt to the specific use (for example, by assigning parameters to the modules). CP communications processor CPU The CPU (central processing unit) is a CPU module of the programmable logic controller that stores and runs the user program. It contains the operating system, memory, processing unit and communication interface. Glossary-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary Default setting The default setting is a sensible basic setting that is used whenever no other value is used. Diagnostics Generic term for System diagnostics, process error diagnosis and user-defined diagnostics. www..com Diagnostic buffer The diagnostic buffer is a buffered memory area in the CPU which stores the diagnostics events in the order in which they occurred. For troubleshooting, the user can read out the exact error cause in STEP 7 (PLC -> Module State) from the diagnostic buffer. Diagnostic data All the diagnostics events that occurred are collected in the CPU and entered in the Diagnostic buffer. If there is an error OB, it is started. Diagnostic Interrupt Modules with diagnostics capability report system errors by means of diagnostic interrupts to the CPU. The operating system of the CPU calls OB 82 in the course of a diagnostic interrupt. Direct access A direct access is the direct accessing of the CPU by means of the Backplane bus to modules while avoiding the Process image. Edge, falling Signal status change from 1 to 0 Edge, rising Signal status change from 0 to 1 Encoder absolute An encoder absolute determines the path traveled during position detection by reading a numerical value. In the case of encoders absolute with a serial interface (SSI), path information is transferred synchronously and serially according to the SSI protocol (synchronous serial interface). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary-3 Glossary EPROM Erasable programmable read-only memory Equipotential bonding Electrical connection (equipotential bonding conductor), which brings the bodies of electrical resources and foreign conductive bodies to an identical or approximately identical potential in order to avoid interfering or hazardous voltages between these bodies. www..com External load memory Memory card FEPROM In their ability to retain data in the event of a power failure (even without a backup battery), FEPROMs (flash erasable programmable read only memories) are the equivalent of the electrically erasable EEPROMS, but can be erased considerably more quickly. FREEZE Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The FREEZE function is a control command for freezing current encoder values of the SM 338 to the instantaneous value. Gray code Data format of Encoders absolute Ground The conductive ground whose electric potential can be set equal to zero at every point. In the proximity of grounding electrodes, the ground can have a potential differing from zero. The term "reference ground" is frequently used to describe such circumstances. Ground The ground is the total number of all interconnected inactive parts of an item which cannot assume a hazardous voltage in the event of a fault. Ground, to To ground means connect an electrically conductive part by means of a grounding system to the grounding electrode (one or more conductive parts having a very good contact to ground). Glossary-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary Hardware interrupt A hardware interrupt is triggered by interrupt-triggering modules as a result of a certain event in the process (overshooting or undershooting of a limit value; a module has completed the cyclic conversion of its channels). The hardware interrupt is reported to the CPU. In accordance with the priority of this interrupt, the Organization block assigned to it is scanned. Hold last value (LWH) The module retains the last value read out before STOP mode. www..com Input delay Parameter in STEP 7 for digital input modules. The input delay is used to suppress injected interference. Interfering pulses from 0 ms to the set input delay are suppressed. The set input delay is subject to a tolerance, which can be taken from the technical specifications of the module. A high input delay suppresses long interfering pulses, whereas a low input delay suppresses short ones. The permissible input delay depends on the length of the cable between the encoder and the module. For example, a high input delay has to be set for long unshielded supply conductors to the encoder (longer than 100m). Integration time Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The integration time is the inverse value of the Interference frequency suppression in ms. Interface, multipoint MPI Interference frequency suppression Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The frequency of the AC network can interfere with the measured value, especially with measurements in low voltage ranges and with thermocouples. This parameter is used by the user to specify the prevailing line frequency on his system. Interrupt The SIMATIC S7 is familiar with 28 different run-time level, which govern running of the user program. These run-time levels include interrupts such as hardware interrupts, among other things. When an interrupt occurs, the operating system automatically calls an assigned organization block in which the user can program the reaction he wants (for example, in an FB). S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary-5 Glossary Interrupt, diagnostic Diagnostic Interrupt Interrupt, end-of-scan-cycle interrupt Hardware interrupt Interrupt, hardware Hardware interrupt www..com Logic block In a SIMATIC S7 context, a logic block is a block that contains a part of the STEP 7 user program. By contrast, a data block only contains data. There are the following logic blocks: organization blocks (OBs), function blocks (FBs), functions (FCs), system function block (SFBs), system functions (SFCs). M7 Owing to its standardized AT computer architecture, automation computers M7-300 and M7-400 represent a freely programmable expansion of the SIMATIC automation platform. The hardware configuration is similar to that of a S7-300 or S7-400. The user programs for the SIMATIC M7 can also be programmed in a high-level language, such as C, or graphically. Measuring range module Measuring range modules are plugged into the analog input modules for adaptation to different measuring ranges. Memory card Pluggable load memory. Memory cards are credit-card size storage media for CPUs and CPs. They are implemented as RAM or FEPROMs. Monoflop time Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. The monoflop time is the time interval between 2 SSI message frames ( Encoder absolute). MPI The multipoint interface (MPI) is the programmer port of the SIMATIC S7. It is used to access programmable modules ((CPUs, CPs), text displays and operator panel from a central point. The nodes on the MPI can communicate with each other. Glossary-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary Module filtering mode By operating mode we mean: 1. The selection of an operating mode of the CPU using the mode switch or the PG 2. The type of program execution in the CPU 3. A parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules Non-isolated In the case of non-isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are electrically connected. www..com Normalizing Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT. Normalizing right justifies the encoder value of the encoder absolute; non-relevant places are discarded. OB Organization block Operating system The operating system of the CPU organizes all functions and processes of the CPU that are not tied to a specific control task. Optically isolated With optically isolated input/output modules, the reference potentials of the control and load circuit are galvanically isolated; for example, by an optocoupler, contact assembly or repeater. Input/output circuits can be connected to common potential. Organization block Organization blocks (OBs) form the interface between the operating system of the CPU and the user program. The order in which the user program is processed is defined in the organization blocks. Parameters 1. Tag of a Logic block 2. Tag for setting the characteristics of a module (one or more per module). When delivered to the customer, each module has a practical basic setting for its parameters, which the user can modify in STEP 7. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary-7 Glossary PLC Programmable logic control Process image The signal states of the digital input and output modules are stored in the CPU in process image. A distinction is made between the process-image of inputs and of outputs. The process input image (PII) is read by the input modules before the operating system scans the user program. The process output image (PIQ) is transferred to the output modules at the end of program scanning. www..com Product status Products having an identical Order Number are distinguished by their product status. The product status is incremented for upwards compatible extensions, modifications due to production reasons (use of new component parts and components) and troubleshooting. PROFIBUS-DP Digital, analog and intelligent I/O modules and a wide range of field devices to EN 50170, Part 3, such as drives or valve terminals, are repositioned by the automation system to the process, on site, over a distance of as many as 23 km. The modules and field devices are connected to the programmable logic controller by means of the PROFIBUS-DP fieldbus and addressed in the same way as central I/O. Programmable logic control Programmable logic controls (PLCs) are electronic controls whose function is stored as a program on the control device. The design and wiring of the device do not therefore depend on the function of the control. The architecture of a programmable logic control is similar to that of a computer; it consists of a CPU (central processing unit) with memory, input/output modules and an internal bus system. The I/O and the programming language are designed to meet the requirements of open-loop control. Programmable logic controller A programmable logic controller is a programmable logic control consisting of a central device, a CPU and diverse input/output modules. Programming device A programming device (PG) is a personal computer in a specific industry-standard and compact design. A PG is completely equipped for programming SIMATIC programmable logic controllers. Glossary-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary RAM A RAM (random access memory) is a semiconductor memory with random access. Reaction to open thermocouple Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when using Thermocouples. This parameter defines whether "Overflow" (7FFFH) or "Underflow" (8000H) is output by the module in the event of an open thermocouple. www..com Repeater Equipment for the amplification of bus signals and connection of bus segments over long distances. Reference ground Ground Reference potential Potential from the point of view of which the voltages of the involved circuits are analyzed and measured. Resolution With analog modules, the number of bits which represent the digitized analog value in binary. Resolution depends on the module and with analog input modules on the integration time. The precision of the resolution of a measured value increases with the length of the integration time. The resolution can be as many as 16 bits, including sign. Retentivity Data areas in data blocks, and also timers, counters and memory markers are retentive when their contents are not lost upon a complete restart or POWER DOWN. Scan time The scan time is the time required by the CPU to scan the user program once. S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary-9 Glossary SDB System data block Segment Bus segment SFC System function www..com Signal module Signal modules (SM) form the interface between the process and the programmable logic controller. There are input modules, output modules, input/output modules (both digital and analog). Short-circuit Connection with negligibly low impedance between operationally opposed live conductors. The current is a multiple of the operating current; this can result in thermal overloading (rated short-time current) or mechanical overloading (rated peak withstand current) of the switchgear and system components. Smoothing Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules. The measured values are smoothed by digital filtering. For specific modules it is possible to choose between no, low, medium and high smoothing. The higher the smoothing, the greater is the time constant of the digital filter. STARTUP The STARTUP mode is transversed during the transition from STOP mode to RUN mode. STARTUP can be triggered by the Mode switch or following power-on or by means of an operator input on the programming device. With the S7-300 and M7-300, a Complete restart is performed. Status mode The SIMATIC S7 programmable logic controllers are familiar with the following of status modes: STOP, STARTUP, RUN and STOP. Glossary-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary STEP 7 Parameter assignment and programming software for assigning parameters to and the creation of user programs for SIMATIC S7 controllers. www..com Substitute value Substitute values are values that can be output to the process when signal output modules have failed or be used in the user program instead of a process value when signal input modules have failed. The substitute values can be assigned parameters by the user in STEP 7 (old value retained, substitute value 0 or 1). They are values which the output(s) have to output in the event of a CPU STOP. System data block SDBs (system data blocks) are data areas on the central processing unit which contain system settings and module parameters. The system data blocks are created and modified in STEP 7. System diagnostics System diagnostics is the detection, analysis and reporting of errors that occur within the programmable logic controller. Examples of such errors are: program errors or failures on modules. System errors can be indicated with LED displays or in STEP 7. System function A system function (SFC) is a function that is integrated in the operating system of the CPU a function that can be triggered in the STEP 7 user program, if necessary. Temperature coefficient Parameter in STEP 7 for analog input modules when measuring temperatures with a resistance thermometer (RTD). The temperature coefficient you select depends on the resistance thermometer being used (to DIN standard). Transmission rate Parameter in STEP 7 for position detection module SM 338; POS-INPUT: Rate of data transmission (bit/s) S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Glossary-11 Glossary Two-conductor/three-conductor/four-conductor connection Method of connection to the module - for example, of resistance thermometers/resistors to the front connector of the analog input module or of loads at the voltage output of an analog output module. Two-wire transmitter/four-wire transmitter Kind of transmitter (two-wire transmitter: supply (via terminals of the analog input module; four-wire transmitter: supply via separate terminals of the transmitter) www..com Ungrounded Without galvanic connection to ground User program The user program contains all the statements, tags and data for signal processing used to control a system or a process. It is assigned to a programmable module (CPU, FM, for example) and can be structured in smaller units (blocks). Varistor Voltage-dependent resistor Wire break Parameter in STEP 7. A wire break test is used for monitoring the connection from the input to the encoder and from the output to the actuator. With wire break, the module detects a flow of current at the appropriately parameterized input/output. Glossary-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index A Accessories, D-1 Active bus module, dimension drawing, C-8 Actuator connection, to analog output module, 4-62 Address, Glossary-1 Addressing, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-15 Aggregate current, Glossary-1 Ambient conditions, mechanical, 1-7, 1-13 Analog functions, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1 Analog input module causes of errors and remedies, 4-70 common-mode error, 4-70 configuring error, 4-70 connecting resistance thermometers, 4-51 connecting resistors, 4-51 connecting sensor, 4-43 connecting thermocouple, 4-55 diagnostic message in measured value, 4-68 diagnostic messages, 4-69 diagnostics, 4-39 diagnostics interrupt, 4-39 group diagnostics, 4-39 interference frequency suppression, 4-41, A-9 isolated, 4-43 limit value, 4-39 load voltage missing, 4-70 measurement, 4-40 measuring method, 4-40 measuring methods and measuring ranges, A-9 measuring range, 4-40 module filtering mode, 4-40 non-isolated, 4-43 overflow, 4-70 parameter assignment error, 4-70 parameters, 4-39, A-7 potential difference, 4-43, 4-44 reaction with open thermocouple, 4-40 SM 331; AI 2 x 12 Bit, 4-94 SM 331; AI 8 x 12 Bit, 4-74 SM 331; AI 8 x 16 Bit, 4-85 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, 4-105 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, 4-116 smoothing of analog input values, 4-41 structure of data record 1, A-8 temperature coefficient, 4-40 temperature unit, 4-40 underflow, 4-70 wire break, 4-70, 4-71 wire-break check, 4-39 Analog input modules, SM 331, channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6 Analog input/module, structure of data record 1, A-31 Analog input/output module integration time, 4-42 measurement, 4-42 measuring method, 4-42 measuring range, 4-42 output range, 4-42 output type, 4-42 parameters, 4-42, A-30 SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 12 Bit, 4-151 SM 334; AI 4/AO 2 x 8/8 Bit, 4-145 www..com S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index-1 Index Analog module assigning parameters, 4-38 behavior, 4-30 determination of measuring error/output error, 4-33 diagnostics, 4-68 dimension drawing, C-17 group error LED, 4-68 interrupts, 4-71 sequence of steps for commissioning, 4-7 SF LED, 4-68 supply voltage failure, 4-31 www..com Analog output channel, conversion time, 4-36 Analog output module causes of errors and remedies, 4-71 connecting loads and actuators, 4-62 connecting loads to current output, 4-66 connecting loads to voltage output, 4-63 diagnostic messages, 4-69 diagnostics, 4-41 diagnostics interrupt, 4-41 group diagnostics, 4-41 isolated, 4-62 load voltage missing, 4-71 M short-circuit, 4-71 non-isolated, 4-62 output methods and output ranges, A-29 output range, 4-41 output type, 4-41 parameter assignment error, 4-71 parameters, 4-41 response time, 4-37 response with CPU-STOP, 4-41 setting substitute values, A-29 settling time, 4-37 SM 332; AO 2 x 12 Bit, 4-134 SM 332; AO 4 x 12 Bit, 4-128 SM 332; AO 4 x 16 Bit, 4-140 structure of data record 1, A-28 Analog output modules, parameters, A-27 Analog output modules, SM 332, channel-specific diagnostic data, B-6 Analog value conversion, 4-8 sign, 4-8 Analog value representation, 4-8 binary representation of input ranges, 4-11 binary representation of output ranges, 4-23 for current measuring ranges, 4-14-4-16 for current output ranges, 4-26-4-29 for resistance-type transmitters, 4-15 for voltage measuring ranges, 4-12-4-14 for voltage output ranges, 4-25-4-28 Analog-to-digital conversion, 4-34 Approvals, iv, 1-2 Audience, for manual, iii Automation and drives, viii Auxiliary voltage missing, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 B Backplane bus, Glossary-1 Backup battery, 1-6, Glossary-1 shipping and storage conditions, 1-6 Basic error limit, 4-33 Battery. Siehe backup battery Behavior, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-21 Binary code, Glossary-1 Bus segment, Glossary-1 Bytes 0 and 1 of diagnostic data, B-2 of diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-7 Bytes 2 and 3, of diagnostic data, B-3 Bytes 2 to 7, of diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-8 Bytes 4 to 7, of diagnostic data, B-4 Bytes 8 to 10, of diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-8 C Cables, for analog signals, 4-43, 4-62 Causes of error and remedial action, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-53 Causes of error and remedial measures, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23 Index-2 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index www..com Causes of errors and remedies analog input module, 4-70 analog output module, 4-71 CE mark, 1-2 Changes, in manual, iv Channel error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Channel information present, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Channel-specific diagnostics, B-5 Climatic conditions, 1-8 Code type, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11 Commissioning analog modules, sequence of steps, 4-7 Commissioning digital modules, sequence of steps, 3-7 Common mode voltage, Glossary-2 Common-mode error, analog input module, 4-70 Communication processor, Glossary-2 Comparison point, 4-59, Glossary-2 Compensating box, 4-57 connecting, 4-58 Compensation external, 4-57 internal, 4-56, 4-58 Complete restart, Glossary-2 Configuration error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Configure, Glossary-2 Configuring error, analog input module, 4-70 Conversion time analog input channels, 4-34 analog output channel, 4-36 Converting, analog values, 4-8 Courses, vii CP, Glossary-2 CPU, Glossary-2 CSA, approval, 1-3 Current sensors, connecting, 4-49 D Data record, for diagnostic data, B-1 Data record 1 analog input module configuration, A-8 analog output module configuration, A-28 digital input module configuration, A-4 digital output module configuration, A-6 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-12 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-20 structure of analog input/output module, A-31 Data record 128 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-13 structure for SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-21 Data records, for parameters, A-2 Default setting, Glossary-3 Degree of protection, 1-9 IP 20, 1-9 Diagnostic buffer, Glossary-3 Diagnostic data, Glossary-3 bytes 0 and 1, B-2 bytes 2 and 3, B-3 bytes 4 to 7, B-4 channel-specific, B-5 channel-specific, for analog input modules of SM 331, B-6 channel-specific, for analog output modules of SM 332, B-6 channel-specific, for SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, B-5 channel-specific, for SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0,5 A, B-5 channel-specific, for SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-8 data record, B-1 SM 338; POS-INPUT, B-7 Diagnostic data for SM 338; POS-INPUT, bytes 0 and 1, B-7 Diagnostic data of SM 338; POS-INPUT Bytes 2 to 7, B-8 Bytes 8 to 10, B-8 Diagnostic interrupt of analog modules, 4-72 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-19, 3-24 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-50, 3-54 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20 Diagnostic interrupt enable, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11 Diagnostic messages, 3-9, 4-68, 5-17 of analog input modules, 4-69 of analog output modules, 4-69 reading out, 3-9, 4-68, 5-17 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-52 Diagnostics analog input module, 4-39 analog output module, 4-41 of analog modules, 4-68 of digital modules, 3-9 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-19, 3-21 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17, 5-18 system, Glossary-11 Diagnostics entry, 4-31 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index-3 Index Diagnostics interrupt analog input module, 4-39 analog output module, 4-41 Digital input module SM 321; DI 16 x 120 VAC, 3-30 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-13 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; source input, 3-26 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC; with hardware and diagnostic interrupts, 3-16 SM 321; DI 16 x 48-125 VDC, 3-28 SM 321; DI 32 x 120 VAC, 3-35 www..com SM 321; DI 32 x 24 VDC, 3-10 SM 321; DI 8 x 120/230 VAC, 3-32 structure of data record 1, A-4 Digital input modules, parameters, A-3 Digital input/output module SM 323; DI 16/DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-82 SM 323; DI 8/DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-86 Digital module assigning parameters, 3-8 diagnostics, 3-9 dimension drawing, C-17 group error LED, 3-9 sequence of steps for commissioning, 3-7 SF LED, 3-9 Digital output module parameters, A-5 SM 322; DO 16 x 120 VAC/1 A, 3-58 SM 322; DO 16 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-40 SM 322; DO 32 x 120 VAC/1.0 A, 3-64 SM 322; DO 32 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-37 SM 322; DO 8 x 120/230 VAC/2 A, 3-61 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VAC/2 A, 3-43 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A with diagnostic interrupt, 3-46 SM 322; DO 8 x 48-125 VDC/1.5 A, 3-55 structure of data record 1, A-6 Dimension drawing, active bus module, C-8 Dimension drawings, C-1 analog module, C-17 digital module, C-17 IM 361, C-14 interface module, C-14 power supply module PS 307, C-9 PS 307, C-9 rail, C-2 RS 485 repeater, C-20 shield connecting element, C-18 signal module, C-17 SIMATIC TOP connect, C-19 Direct access, Glossary-3 Documentation package, v Dummy module, DM 370, 5-5 E Edge, Glossary-3 Electromagnetic compatibility, 1-4 EMC Directive, 1-2 Encoder absolute, Glossary-3 Encoder absolute (SSI), SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11 Encoder error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Environmental conditions, 1-7 extended, 1-11 outdoor modules, 1-13 EPROM, Glossary-4 EPROM error SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-53 Equipotential bonding, Glossary-4 Error, of an analog module, 4-33 Error causes and troubleshooting, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Extended environmental conditions, 1-11 External auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23 F FEPROM, Glossary-4 FM, approval, 1-3 Four-conductor connection, Glossary-12 Four-wire connection, 4-52 Four-wire transmitter, Glossary-12 Four-wire transmitters, 4-51 FREEZE, Glossary-4 Freeze function, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11, 5-14 Further support, vii Fuse blown SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-53 G Gray code, Glossary-4 Ground, Glossary-4 Grounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4 Index-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index Group diagnostics analog input module, 4-39 analog output module, 4-41 Group error LED analog module, 4-68 digital module, 3-9 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17 H www..com Interrupt-triggering channels, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-25 Interrupts enabling, 3-24, 3-54, 4-72, 5-20 of analog modules, 4-71 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-24 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-54 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-20 IP 20, 1-9 Isolated sensors, connecting, 4-44 Hardware interrupt, Glossary-5 end of scan cycle, 4-73 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-19, 3-25 when limit exceeded, 4-72 Hardware interrupt lost, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23, 3-25 Hold last value, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-50 L Lack of encoder supply, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23 Limit value, analog input module, 4-39 Load connection, to analog output module, 4-62 Load connection to current output, to analog output module, 4-66 Load connection to voltage output, to analog output module, 4-63 Load voltage missing analog input module, 4-70 analog output module, 4-71 Logic block, Glossary-6 LWH, Glossary-5 I IEC 61131, 1-2 IM 360 dimension drawing, C-14 interface module, 6-3 IM 361, interface module, 6-5 IM 365 dimension drawing, C-16 interface module, 6-7 Input delay, Glossary-5 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-19 Insulation test, 1-9 Integration time, Glossary-5 analog input/output module, 4-42 Interface module, 6-1 dimension drawing, C-14 IM 360, 6-3 IM 361, 6-5 IM 365, 6-7 Interference pulse-shaped, 1-4 sinusoidal, 1-5 Interference frequency suppression, Glossary-5 analog input module, 4-41, A-9 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24 Internal auxiliary voltage missing, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23 Internal error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Interrupt, Glossary-5 M M short-circuit, analog output module, 4-71 M7, Glossary-6 M7-300, parameter assignment in user program, A-1 Manual, purpose, iii Manual changes, iv Manual package, v Measurement analog input module, 4-40 analog input/output module, 4-42 Measuring method analog input channels, 4-27 analog input module, 4-40, A-9 analog input/output module, 4-42 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index-5 Index Measuring range analog input channels, 4-27 analog input module, 4-40, A-9 analog input/output module, 4-42 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-25 Measuring range module, 4-27 replugging, 4-28 Memory card, Glossary-6 Module classes, ID, B-2 Module filtering mode, Glossary-7 analog input module, 4-40 www..com Module malfunction, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Module overview, 4-4 digital modules, 3-4 other signal modules, 5-2 SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA, 8-2 Modules, shipping and storage conditions, 1-6 Monoflop time, Glossary-6 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11, 5-12 MPI, Glossary-6 N Navigation, through the manual, vi No external auxiliary voltage, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-53 No internal auxiliary voltage, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-53 No load voltage L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-50, 3-53 Non-isolated, Glossary-7 Non-isolated sensors, 4-46 connecting, 4-46 Normalizing, Glossary-7 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11, 5-13 Operating mode of CPU, 4-30 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-16 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-24 Operating system, Glossary-7 Operational limit, 4-33 Optically isolated, Glossary-7 Order Number 6ES7 305-1BA80-0AA0, 2-2 6ES7 307-1BA00-0AA0, 2-6 6ES7 307-1EA00-0AA0, 2-10 6ES7 307-1EA80-0AA0, 2-10 6ES7 307-1KA00-0AA0, 2-15 6ES7 331-7KB02-0AB0, 4-94 6ES7 331-7KB82-0AB0, 4-94 6ES7 331-7KF02-0AB0, 4-74 6ES7 331-7NF00-0AB0, 4-85 6ES7 331-7PF00-0AB0, 4-105 6ES7 331-7PF10-0AB0, 4-116 6ES7 332-5HB01-0AB0, 4-134 6ES7 332-5HD01-0AB0, 4-128 6ES7 332-7ND00-0AB0, 4-140 6ES7 334-0CE01-0AA0, 4-145 6ES7 334-0KE00-0AB0, 4-151 6ES7 338-4BC00-0AB0, 5-7 6ES7 360-3AA01-0AA0, 6-3 6ES7 361 3CA01-0AA0, 6-5 6ES7 365-0BA01-0AA0, 6-7 6ES7 370-0AA01-0AA0, 5-5 6ES7 374-2XH01-0AA0, 5-3 6ES7 972-0AA01-0XA0, 7-2 O OB, Glossary-7 OB 40, 3-25, 4-72 start information, 4-73 OB 82, 3-24, 3-54, 4-72 Online services, ix Operating conditions, 1-7 Index-6 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index www..com Order number 6ES7 321-1BH02-0AA0, 3-13 6ES7 321-1BH50-0AA0, 3-26 6ES7 321-1BH82-0AA0, 3-13 6ES7 321-1BL00-0AA0, 3-10 6ES7 321-1BL80-0AA0, 3-10 6ES7 321-1CH80-0AA0, 3-28 6ES7 321-1EH01-0AA0, 3-30 6ES7 321-1EL00-0AA0, 3-35 6ES7 321-1FF01-0AA0, 3-32 6ES7 321-1FF81-0AA0, 3-32 6ES7 321-7BH00-0AB0, 3-16 6ES7 321-7BH80-0AB0, 3-16 6ES7 322-1BF01-0AA0, 3-43 6ES7 322-1BH01-0AA0, 3-40 6ES7 322-1BH81-0AA0, 3-40 6ES7 322-1BL00-0AA0, 3-37 6ES7 322-1CF80-0AA0, 3-55 6ES7 322-1EH01-0AA0, 3-58 6ES7 322-1EL00-0AA0, 3-64 6ES7 322-1FF01-0AA0, 3-61 6ES7 322-1FF81-0AA0, 3-61 6ES7 322-1HF01-0AA0, 3-71 6ES7 322-1HF10-0AA0, 3-74 6ES7 322-1HF20-0AA0, 3-78 6ES7 322-1HF80-0AA0, 3-74 6ES7 322-1HH00-0AA0, 3-68 6ES7 322-8BF00-0AB0, 3-46 6ES7 322-8BF80-0AA0, 3-46 6ES7 323-1BL00-0AA0, 3-82 6ES7 323-8BH01-0AA0, 3-86 6ES7 323-8BH81-0AA0, 3-86 Organization block (OB), Glossary-7 Outdoor modules, 1-11 Output analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1 Output method, analog output module, A-29 Output range analog input/output module, 4-42 analog output module, 4-41, A-29 Output type analog input/output module, 4-42 analog output module, 4-41 Overflow, analog input module, 4-70 P Parameter assignment for analog modules, 4-38 for digital modules, 3-8 in user program, A-1 Parameter assignment error analog input module, 4-70 analog output module, 4-71 Parameterization error, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Parameterization missing, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Parameters, Glossary-7 analog input module, 4-39, A-7 analog input/output module, 4-42, A-30 analog output module, 4-41 analog output modules, A-27 data records, A-2 digital input modules, A-3 digital output module, A-5 dynamic, 3-8, 4-38 modifying in user program, 3-8, 4-38 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-19 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-50 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-11 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-19 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11 static, 3-8, 4-38 Parameters, wrong SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 PARM_MOD, SFC 57, A-2 Pin assignment, RS 485 repeater, 7-6 PLC, Glossary-8 POS input module SM 338, 5-7 Position detection module, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-7 Potential difference, with analog input modules, 4-43, 4-44 Power supply module, 2-1 dimension drawing, C-9 PS 305 2 A, 2-2 PS 307 10 A, 2-15 PS 307 2 A, 2-6 PS 307 5 A, 2-10 Process image, Glossary-8 Product status, Glossary-8 PROFIBUS-DP, Glossary-8 Programmable logic control (PLC), Glossary-8 Programmable logic controller, Glossary-8 Programming device (PG), Glossary-8 Protection class, 1-9 PS 307, dimension drawing, C-9 Pulse edge, 3-19 Pulse-shaped interference, 1-4 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index-7 Index R Radio interference, emission of, 1-5 Rail for the "Insert and Remove" function, dimension drawing, C-7 Rails, dimension drawing, C-2 RAM, Glossary-9 RAM error SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-53 Rated voltages, 1-10 Reaction to open thermocouple, SM 331; AI 8 www..com x TC, A-26 Read analog values, STEP 7 blocks, 4-1 Reference junction temperature with thermocouples, compensating, 4-56 Reference potential, Glossary-9 Relay output module SM 322; DO 16 x Rel. 120 VAC, 3-68 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC, 3-71 SM 322; DO 8 x Rel. 230 VAC/5 A, 3-74, 3-78 Repeater, Glossary-9 Siehe auch RS 485 repeater Resistance thermometer connection, to analog input module, 4-51 Resistor connection, to analog input module, 4-51 Resolution, 4-8, Glossary-9 Response time, 4-37 Response with CPU-STOP, analog output module, 4-41 Retentivity, Glossary-9 RS 485 repeater, 7-1 appearance, 7-3 application, 7-2 definition, 7-2 dimension drawing, C-20 grounded, 7-4 grounded operation, 7-4 rules, 7-2 ungrounded, 7-4 ungrounded operation, 7-4 S Scan time, Glossary-9 analog input channels, 4-34 analog output channels, 4-36 Screw-type terminals, SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA, 8-10 SDB, Glossary-11 Sensor connection, to analog input module, 4-43 Sensors, non-isolated, 4-46 Service & Support, viii Settling time, 4-37 SF LED analog module, 4-68 digital module, 3-9 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-17 SFC, Glossary-10, Glossary-11 SFC 51, 3-24, 3-54, 4-72 SFC 55 WR_PARM, A-2 SFC 56 WR_DPARM, A-2 SFC 57 PARM_MOD, A-2 SFC 59, 3-24, 3-54, 4-72 Shield connecting element, dimension drawing, C-18 Short-circuit, Glossary-10 Short-circuit to L+, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-50, 3-53 Short-circuit to M, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-50, 3-53 Sign, analog value, 4-8 Signal module, Glossary-10 dimension drawing, C-17 SIMATIC Outdoor modules, 1-11 SIMATIC TOP connect components, 8-12 connection for 2A modules, 8-18 dimension drawing, C-19 one-conductor connection, 8-14 selecting components, 8-13 three-conductor connection, 8-16 wiring 32-channels digital modules, 8-8 Index-8 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index www..com SIMATIC TOP connect TPA component selection, 8-20 connection example, 8-24 multiplier terminal, 8-21 shield connection, 8-23 terminal allocation to analog module, 8-22 terminal assignment, 8-21 SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA advantages of using, 8-3 components, 8-3 configuration, 8-2 connecting cable, 8-4 connectors, 8-4 mounting terminal block and connecting cable, 8-10 screw-type terminals, 8-10 spring-loaded terminals, 8-10 wiring, 8-4 wiring actuators/sensors to terminal block, 8-10 wiring rules, 8-7 wiring the front connector module, 8-6 wiring with modules..., 8-3 Simulator module, SM 374; IN/OUT 16, 5-3 Sinusoidal interference, 1-5 SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC causes of error and remedial measures, 3-23 channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5 diagnostic interrupt, 3-19, 3-24 diagnostics, 3-19 EPROM error, 3-23 external auxiliary voltage missing, 3-23 fuse blown, 3-23 hardware interrupt, 3-19, 3-25 hardware interrupt lost, 3-23, 3-25 input delay, 3-19 internal auxiliary voltage missing, 3-23 interrupt-triggering channels, 3-25 interrupts, 3-24 lack of encoder supply, 3-23 parameters, wrong, 3-23 RAM error, 3-23 redundant encoder supply, 3-17 voltage type, 3-19 watchdog, 3-23 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A apply substitute value "1", 3-50 causes of error and remedial action, 3-53 diagnostic interrupt, 3-50, 3-54 diagnostic messages, 3-52 EPROM error, 3-53 fuse blown, 3-53 hold last value, 3-50 interrupts, 3-54 no external auxiliary voltage, 3-53 no internal auxiliary voltage, 3-53 no load voltage L+, 3-50, 3-53 parameters, 3-50 RAM error, 3-53 short-circuit to L+, 3-50, 3-53 short-circuit to M, 3-50, 3-53 substitute value application, 3-50 watchdog, 3-53 wire break, 3-50, 3-53 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0,5 A, channel-specific diagnostic data, B-5 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD interference frequency suppression, A-16 operating modes, A-16 parameters, A-11 smoothing, A-18 structure of data record 1, A-12 structure of data record 128, A-13 temperature coefficient, A-18 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD x 24 bit, measuring methods and measuring ranges, A-16 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index-9 Index SM 331; AI 8 x TC interference frequency suppression, A-24 measuring methods and measuring ranges, A-25 operating modes, A-24 parameters, A-19 reaction to open thermocouple, A-26 smoothing, A-26 structure of data record 1, A-20 structure of data record 128, A-21 SM 338, POS input module, 5-7 www..comSM 338; POS-INPUT addressing, 5-15 auxiliary voltage missing, 5-19 causes of errors and troubleshooting, 5-19 channel error, 5-19 channel information present, 5-19 channel-specific diagnostic data, B-8 code type, 5-11 configuration error, 5-19 diagnostic data, B-7 diagnostic interrupt, 5-20 diagnostic interrupt enable, 5-11 diagnostics, 5-17 encoder absolute (SSI), 5-11 encoder error, 5-19 external error, 5-19 Freeze function, 5-11, 5-14 group error LED, 5-17 internal error, 5-19 interrupts, 5-20 module malfunction, 5-19 monoflop time, 5-11, 5-12 normalizing, 5-11, 5-13 parameterization error, 5-19 parameterization missing, 5-19 parameters, wrong, 5-19 SF LED, 5-17 transmission rate, 5-11, 5-12 watchdog tripped, 5-19 Smoothing, Glossary-10 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18 SM 331; AI 8 x TC, A-26 Smoothing analog input values, 4-35 Smoothing of analog input values, analog input module, 4-41 Spare parts, D-1 Spring-loaded terminals, SIMATIC TOP connect/...TPA, 8-10 Standards, iv, 1-2 Startup, Glossary-10 Status mode, Glossary-10 STEP 7, Glossary-11 STEP 7 blocks, for analog functions, 4-1 Substitute value, Glossary-11 analog output module, A-29 Substitute value "1" application, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-50 Substitute value application, SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-50 Supply voltage failure, of the analog module, 4-31 Support, further, vii System data block (SDB), Glossary-11 System diagnostics, Glossary-11 System function (SFC), Glossary-11 T Technical specifications attributes, vi RS 485 repeater, 7-6 Temperature coefficient, Glossary-11 analog input module, 4-40 SM 331; AI 8 x RTD, A-18 Temperature unit, analog input module, 4-40 Test voltages, 1-9 Thermo emf, 4-55 Thermocouple design, 4-55 open, reaction to, Glossary-9 principle of operation, 4-55 Thermocouple connection, to analog input module, 4-55 Three-conductor connection, Glossary-12 Three-wire connection, 4-53 Transmission rate, Glossary-11 SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-11, 5-12 Two-conductor connection, Glossary-12 Two-wire connection, 4-54 Two-wire transmitter, Glossary-12 Two-wire transmitters, 4-50 U UL, approval, 1-3 Underflow, analog input module, 4-70 Ungrounded operation, RS 485 repeater, 7-4 User program, Glossary-12 parameter assignment in, A-1 Index-10 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index V Varistor, Glossary-12 Vibrations, 1-7 Voltage sensors, connecting, 4-48 Voltage type, SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-19 Watchdog tripped, SM 338; POS-INPUT, 5-19 Wire break, Glossary-12 analog input module, 4-70, 4-71 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-50, 3-53 Wire-break check, analog input module, 4-39 WR_DPARM, SFC 56, A-2 WR_PARM, SFC 55, A-2 W Watchdog SM 321; DI 16 x 24 VDC, 3-23 SM 322; DO 8 x 24 VDC/0.5 A, 3-53 www..com S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 Index-11 Index www..com Index-12 S7-300 and M7-300 Programmable Controllers Module Specifications A5E00105505-01 |
Price & Availability of 6ES7-332-5HD01-0AB0
 |
|
|
|
|
All Rights Reserved © IC-ON-LINE 2003 - 2022 |
| [Add Bookmark] [Contact Us] [Link exchange] [Privacy policy] |
|
Mirror Sites : [www.datasheet.hk]
[www.maxim4u.com] [www.ic-on-line.cn]
[www.ic-on-line.com] [www.ic-on-line.net]
[www.alldatasheet.com.cn]
[www.gdcy.com]
[www.gdcy.net] |